Vedantu’s

Vedantu’s Tatva
Vedantu’s Tatva Practice
TatvaPractice
Practice Book| Biology
Book Book- Vol.
| Physics - Vol.
2 !

Mathematics
Genetics
Evolution
and
Volume 3 Class 11 JEE
Class 11 JEE

SCAN
SCAN CODE
CODE
to
to know
know how
how to
to
use this Book
use this Book
 Academic Progress for every Student

Regular tests &

assignments

VEDANTU
IMPROVEMENT Report card with
PROMISE detailed analysis

VIP

Parent-teacher
meetings

Our Extraordinary Results 2021

Our Students

5.2X
HIGHER

Our Students
Our Students
3.8X
6.6X
HIGHER

All India HIGHER

All India All India

37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

9.84% 9.84% 1.25%

CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

student scoring above 90% student scoring above 90% Advanced

SCAN CODE
to know more
about VIP
 Vedantu’s
Vedantu’s Tatva
Vedantu’s Tatva Practice
TatvaPractice
Practice Book| Biology
Book Book- Vol.
| Physics - Vol.
2 !

Mathematics
Genetics
Evolution
and
Volume 3 Class 11 JEE
Class 11 JEE

SCAN CODE
to know how to
use this Book
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Pvt. Ltd.
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information
storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publishers.
Notice: Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best resources and knowledge.
Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book from sources regarded
as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this book. However, as authors and
publishers, we are not to be held responsible for unintentional mistakes that might have crept
in. Having stated that, errors (if any) brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged
and rectified in upcoming editions.

Printed by
Softberry Technology Pvt. Ltd
2nd Floor, above PNB, Scheme No 140
Indore, Madhya Pradesh - 452016
https://www.softberry.in
 How to use your
Tatva Practice Book

1
4. Fundamental Principle of
Counting :
If an event can occur in ‘m’
different ways following which
another event can occur in ‘n’
different ways following which Scan the QR Code in each
another event can occur in ‘p’ chapter’s theory section to
different ways then
view micro concept videos
related to the chapter, on
SCAN CODE the Vedantu app.
Permutations

Exercise - 2:

2
Solve all types of
1. If every element of a third
order determinant of value ∆ is
multiplied by 5, then the value
of new determinant is:
(JEE 2019)
exercise questions
based on the latest JEE (a) ∆ (b) 5∆
pattern. (c) 25∆ (d) 125∆

Answer Key

3
CHAPTER-1: DETERMINANTS
For extra exam
Exercise-1: Basic Objective preparation content,
visit the Vedantu app.
Scan the QR code in the You can find previous
Answers Section to view years’ JEE papers with
detailed solutions for all solutions and detailed
exercise questions. analysis.
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
I am delighted to present to you a Ready Reckoner and an amazing book to guide you for your
exams-‘TATVA’. Tatva—which means the ‘Core’ is fully aligned with the culture, the mission, and the
vision of Vedantu and therefore it gives me immense pleasure and joy to share this book with you. We
at Vedantu have always believed in revolutionizing the teaching and learning process and always
speedily progressed in the direction of bringing superior quality education and content to your table.
Tatva is a step forward in this direction. This book is your guide, your practice guru, and your
companion in moving towards your dreams. The book is a result of the consistent effort, diligence, and
research by our experienced team of subject experts and teachers.
This book has been customized with curated content to suit the needs of JEE aspirants like you and
guide you on the right path to cracking JEE and optimizing your efficiency. Tatva is a comprehensive
amalgamation of important concepts, theories, derivations, definitions, solved examples, concept
videos, practice questions, and important questions. We have ensured that high-quality content and
the right ingredients are in place in this booklet to help you climb up the success ladder.
A few guiding points to optimally use Tatva with a planned approach:
Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you revise concepts,
mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary, and eventually makes you capable of
clearing all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
We suggest revision of theory followed by practice of solved examples.
Practice relevant questions daily after finishing Vedantu lectures and session assignments. We
believe that a daily dose of Tatva will keep all your exam blues at bay.
Use the Tatva booklet to mark notes so that it always comes in handy for last-minute revision
sessions before your exams. Notes should include key points of theory, solved examples, and some
questions which you couldn't solve in the first attempt.
Exercise 1 and Exercise 2 of JEE Tatva deal with basic questions and those which can be asked or
already asked in JEE Main. Similarly, Exercise 3 and Exercise 4 deal with JEE Advanced level
questions. We recommend you solve basic JEE Main questions before moving to JEE Advanced
level questions.
Before wrapping up, the practice mantra: “Don't practice until you get it right. Practice until you
can't get it wrong.”

We strongly believe in you and your capabilities. So believe in yourself

because success is only one step away. Wishing that your talent shines
bright. All the very best!

Anand Prakash
Founder and Academic Head, Vedantu

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing Top Ranks in JEE/NEET
and Olympiads. He has personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6, 7 (JEE
Advanced), AIR-1, 7, 9(AIIMS), and thousands of more students who have
successfully cleared these competitive exams in the last few years.
Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Franklin D. Roosevelt

Tatva is the brainchild of a group of creative Vedans who have strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you.
We extend our heartfelt gratitude to the superb team of Vedans who give wings to the vision of Vedantu,
starting with our leaders who have been guiding and encouraging us at every step of the way:
Vamsi Krishna Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Jain Sir

We thank our leaders for their insight and mentorship. They steered the project in the right direction and were
instrumental in making Tatva a reality:
Sahil Bhatia, Sudhanshu Jain, Shubam Gupta, Ajay Mittal, Arshad Shahid, Jaideep Sontakke

The managers who embodied every aspect of what Tatva aimed to accomplish and brought their ideas and
diligence to the table to execute this vision immaculately:
Harish Rao, Neha Surana, Charubak Chakrabarti, Prashant Palande

Mathematics Team
We truly appreciate all the Master Teachers of Vedantu whose relentless efforts helped us translate this vision
into reality. Our heartfelt gratitude to our creative content developers and the typesetting team, who have put
in their hard work, insight, and eagerness to nurture and execute Tatva into ‘your ready handbook’ and bring a
positive learning experience to you.
Teachers Subject Matter Experts
Amit Singh Ziyad Tungekar Nikhil Goyal (Team Lead) Aman Bhartiya
Ankit Kumar Gupta

Typesetting Team Graphic Designer

Raman Kumar Kinjal Sojitra

We cannot thank the creative team enough. Their creative minds and contagious energy have added a visual
flair, truly making Tatva the treasure trove of knowledge that it is.
Kajal Nilanjan Chowdhury Rabin Jacob Mohit Kamboj
Kiran Gopal Balaji Sakamuri Thamam Mubarish Haritha Ranchith
Sarib Mohammad

We thank and appreciate the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal, and Dipshi
Shetty.

The journey of bringing Tatva to life, from an idea to the book you are holding, would not have been possible
without the extensive support of our diligent Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated
team of Teachers, and our talented Tech Team.
 6

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CIRCLES

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 8

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 14

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 30

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 35

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 42

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 50

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 180

CONIC SECTIONS

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 56

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 68

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 84

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 90

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 103

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 111

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 182

 7

BINOMIAL THEOREM

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 118

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 122

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 133

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 137

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 144

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 148

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 184

PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 150

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 156

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 162

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 166

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 171

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 177

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 186

CIRCLES
 Chapter 10 9

CIRCLES

A circle is a locus of a point whose distance from a fixed point

2. INTERCEPTS MADE BY A CIRCLE ON THE AXES
(called centre) is always constant (called radius).
The intercepts made by the circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
1. STANDARD EQUATION OF CIRCLE
on the co-ordinate axes are 2 g 2 - c and 2 f 2 - c
(a) The circle with centre as origin & radius 'r' has the equation;
x² + y² = r². respectively.
(b) The circle with centre (h, k) & radius 'r' has the equation; If :
(x – h)² + (y – k)² = r²
g² – c > 0 Þ circle cuts the x axis at two distinct points.
(c) The general equation of a circle is
g² – c = 0 Þ circle touches the x–axis
x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 with centre as (–g, –f) and
g² – c < 0 Þ circle lies completely above or below the
2 2
radius = g + f - c . If : x–axis.

g2 + f 2 – c > 0 Þ real circle.

g2 + f 2 – c = 0 Þ point circle 3. PARAMETRIC EQUATIONS OF A CIRCLE
g2 + f 2 – c < 0 Þ imaginary circle, with real
The parametric equations of (x – h)² + (y – k)² = r² are :
centre, that is (–g, –f)
x = h + r cos q ; y = k + r sin q ; – p < q < p
NOTES : where (h, k) is the centre, r is the radius & q is a parameter.

Every second degree equation in x & y, in which coefficient of

x² is equal to coefficient of y² & the coefficient of xy is zero,
4. POSITION OF A POINT WITH RESPECT
always represents a circle. TO A CIRCLE

(d) The equation of circle with (x1, y1) & (x2, y2) as extremities of The point (x1,y1) is inside, on or outside the
its diameter is :
circle S º x1² + y1² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0.
(x – x1) (x – x2) + (y – y1) (y – y2) = 0.
Note that this will be the circle of least radius passing through
(x1, y1) & (x2, y2).
(e) Equation of circle passing through origin is
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy = 0
according as S1 º x1² + y1² + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c <, = or > 0.
(f) Equation of circle touching x-axis is
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + g2 = 0
NOTES :
(g) Equation of circle touching y-axis is
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + f2 = 0 The greatest & the least distance of a point A from a circle with
(h) Equation of circle touching both axes is centre C & radius r is AC + r & AC – r respectively.

x2 + y2 ± 2ax ± 2ay + a2 = 0
CIRCLES
10

(c) Parametric form :

5. LINE AND A CIRCLE
The equation of a tangent to circle x² + y² = a² at
Let L = 0 be a line & S = 0 be a circle. If r is the radius of the (a cos a, a sin a) is : x cosa + y sina = a.
circle & p is the length of the perpendicular from the centre
on the line, then: NOTES :
(i) p>r Û the line does not meet the circle, i.e,
passes outside the circle. The point of intersection of the tangents at the points P(a) &
Q(b) is :
(ii) p=r Û the line touches the circle.
(It is tangent to the circle) æ a +b a +b ö
(iii) p < r Û the line is a secant of the circle. ç a cos 2 a sin
2 ÷
ç , ÷
a - b a - b
(iv) p = 0 Þ the line is a diameter of the circle. çç cos cos ÷÷
è 2 2 ø
Also, if y = mx + c is line and x² + y² = a² is circle then.
(i) c² < a² (1 + m²) Û the line is a secant of the circle.
(ii) c² = a²(1 + m²) Û the line touches the circle.
7. PAIR OF TANGENTS FROM A POINT
(It is tangent to the circle) The combined equation of a pair of tangents drawn from the
(iii) c² > a²(1 + m²) Û the line does not meet the point A (x1, y1) to the circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is :
circle i.e. passes out side the circle. SS1 = T²
Where S º x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c ;
6. TANGENT S1 = x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c

(a) Slope form : T º xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c

y = mx + c is always a tangent to the circle x² + y² = a²

if c² = a² (1 + m²).
8. LENGTH OF A TANGENT AND POWER OF A POINT

2 The length of a tangent from an external point (x1, y1) to the

Hence, equation of tangent is y = mx ± a 1 + m and the
circle :
æ a 2m a 2 ö S º x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is given by
point of contact is çç - c , c ÷÷, where c = ± a 1 + m .
2
è ø
L = x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c = S1
(b) Point form :
Square of length of the tangent from the point P is also
(i) The equation of the tangent to the circle x² + y² = a² called the power of point w.r.t. a circle. Power of a point w.r.t
at its point (x1, y1) is, x x1 + y y1 = a². a circle remains constant.
(ii) The equation of the tangent to the circle Power of a point P is positive, negative or zero according
x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 at its point (x1, y1) is : as the point 'P' is outside, inside or on the circle respectively.
xx1 + yy1 + g (x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c = 0.
9. DIRECTOR CIRCLE
NOTES :
The locus of the point of intersection of two perpendicular
In general, the equation of tangent to any second degree tangents is called the director circle of the given circle. The
curve at point (x1, y1) on it can be obtained by replacing director circle of a circle is the concentric circle having

x + x1 radius equal to 2 times the original circle.

x 2 by xx1 , y 2 by yy1 , x by ,
2 Equation of circle concentric with x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is
y + y1 x y + xy1 x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + k = 0
y by , xy by 1 and c remains as c.
2 2
CIRCLES
11

10. CHORD OF CONTACT 12. EQUATION OF THE CHORD JOINING TWO

POINTS OF CIRCLE
If two tangents PT1 & PT2 are drawn from the point
P (x1, y1) to the circle S º x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, then the The equation of chord PQ of the circle x² + y² = a²
equation of the chord of contact T1T2 is : joining two points P(a) and P(b) on it is given by.
xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c = 0., i.e., T = 0
α+β α+β α -β
xcos + ysin = acos
2 2 2

13. NORMAL

If a line is normal /orthogonal to a circle then it must pass

through the centre of the circle. Using this fact equation of
Here R = radius, L = Length of tangent. normal to x2 + y2 = a2 at (x1, y1) is
(a) Chord of contact exists only if the point 'P' is not inside.
x y
=
2LR x1 y1
(b) Length of chord of contact T1T2 =
R 2 + L2 Also,
Equation of normal to the circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c
(c) Area of the triangle formed by the pair of the tangents
= 0 at (x1, y1) is ;
RL3
& its chord of contact = 2 y1 + f
R + L2 y - y1 = x - x1
x1 + g
(d) Tangent of the angle between the pair of tangents from

æ 2 RL ö
(x1, y1) = ç 2 ÷ 14. COMMON TANGENTS TO TWO CIRCLES
è L - R2 ø
(e) Equation of the circle circumscribing the triangle CASE NUMBEROF CONDITION
PT1 T2 is : (x – x1) (x + g) + (y – y1) (y + f) = 0. TANGENTS
(i) 4 common tangents r1 + r2 < C1C2.
11. EQUATION OF THE CHORD WITH A GIVEN
MIDDLE POINT

The equation of the chord of the circle

(ii) 3 common tangents r1 + r2 = C1C2.
S º x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 in terms of its mid point
M(x 1 , y 1 ) is xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c
= x12 + y1 2 + 2gx 1 + 2fy1 + c which is designated by (iii) 2 common tangents | r1 – r2 |< C1C2 < r1 + r2
T = S 1.

NOTES :
(iv) 1 common tangent |r1 – r2| = C1C2.
(i) The shortest chord of a circle passing through a point 'M'
inside the circle is one chord whose middle point is M.
(ii) The chord passing through a point 'M' inside the circle (v) No common tangent. C1C2 < | r1 – r2|
and which is at a maximum distance from the centre is a
chord with middle point M. (Here C1C2 is distance between centres of two circles.)
CIRCLES
12

NOTES : 17. RADICAL AXIS AND RADICAL CENTRE

(i) The direct common tangents meet at a point which The radical axis of two circles is the locus of points whose
divides the line joining centre of circles externally in the powers w.r.t. the two circles are equal. The equation of radical
ratio of their radii. axis of the two circles S1 = 0 & S2 = 0 is given by :
Transverse common tangents meet at a point which S1 – S2 = 0
divides the line joining centre of circles internally in the i.e. 2(g1 – g2)x + 2(f1 – f2)y + (c1 – c2) = 0
ratio of their radii.
The common point of intersection of the radical axes of
(ii) Length of an external (or direct) common tangent & three circles taken two at a time is called the radical centre
internal (or transverse) common tangent to the two of three circles. Note that the length of tangents from radical
centre to the three circles are equal.
circles are given by : L ext . = d 2 - (r1 - r2 ) 2 and

NOTES :
2 2
L int . = d - ( r1 + r2 ) , where d = distance between the
(a) If two circles intersect, then the radical axis is the common
centres of the two circles and r1, r2 are the radii of the two
chord of the two circles.
circles. Note that length of internal common tangent is
always less than the length of the external or direct (b) If two circles touch each other then the radical axis is the
common tangent of the two circles at the common point
common tangent.
of contact.

15. ANGLE OF INTERSECTION OF TWO CIRCLES (c) Radical axis is always perpendicular to the line joining the
centres of the two circles.
Angle between two circle is the angle between their tangents (d) Radical axis will pass through the mid point of the line
at their point of intersection which is given by: joining the centres of the two circles only if the two circles
have equal radii.
d 2 – r12 + r22
cos q = , where d is distance between (e) Radical axis bisects a common tangent between the two
2r1r2
circles.

centres of two circles. (f) A system of circles, every two of which have the same
radical axis, is called a coaxial system.
16. ORTHOGONALITY OF TWO CIRCLES (g) Pairs of circles which do not have radical axis are
concentric.
Two circles S1 = 0 & S2 = 0 are said to be orthogonal or said
to intersect orthogonally if the tangents at their point of (h) The centre of a variable circle orthogonal to two fixed
intersection include a right angle. The condition for two circles lies on the radical axis of two circles.

circles to be orthogonal is : (i) The centre of a circle which is orthogonal to three given
circles is the radical centre provided the radical centre lies
2g1g2 + 2 f1f2 = c1 + c2. or r12 + r22 = d 2
outside all the three circles.
CIRCLES
13

18. FAMILY OF CIRCLES NOTES :

(a) The equation of the family of circles passing  Family of circles circumscribing a triangle whose sides
through the points of intersection of two circles are given by L1 = 0; L2 = 0 and L3 = 0 is given by ;
S1 = 0 and S2 = 0 is : S1 + K S2 = 0 L1L2 +  L2L3 +  L3L1 = 0 provided co-efficient of xy = 0
(K  –1, provided the co-efficient of x2 & y2 in and co-efficient of x² = co-efficient of y².
S1 & S2 are same)  Equation of circle circumscribing a quadrilateral
(b) The equation of the family of circles passing through whose side in order are represented by the lines
the point of intersection of a circle S = 0 & a line L1 = 0, L2 = 0, L3 = 0 & L4 = 0 are  L1L3 + L2L4 = 0 where
L = 0 is given by S + KL = 0. value of and  can be found out by using condition
that co-efficient of x2 = co-efficient of y2 and co-efficient
(c) The equation of a family of circles passing through
of xy = 0.
two given points (x1, y1) & (x2, y2) can be written in
the form :

x y 1
(x – x1) (x – x2) + (y – y1) (y – y2) + K x 1 y 1 1  0 where
x2 y2 1

K is a parameter.
(d) The equation of a family of circles touching a
fixed line y – y1 = m(x – x 1) at the fixed point
(x1, y1) is

(x – x1)2 + (y – y1)2 + K[y – y1 – m (x – x1)] = 0 where

K is a parameter.

SCAN CODE
Circles
CIRCLES 14

SOLVED EXAMPLES

Example – 1 Example – 3

The lines 2x – 3y = 5 and 3x – 4y = 7 are diameters of a circle The equation of a circle with origin as a centre and passing
having area as 154 sq. units. Then the equation of the through equilateral triangle whose median is of length 3a
circle is is
(a) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y = 47 (a) x2 + y2 = 9a2 (b) x2 + y2 = 16a2
(b) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y = 47 (c) x2 + y2 = 4a2 (d) x2 + y2 = a2
(c) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y = 62 Ans. (c)
(d) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y = 62 Sol. Given median of the equilateral triangle is 3a.
Ans. (b) In LMD, ( LM ) 2  ( LD )2  ( MD ) 2
Sol. Centre of the circle is the point of intersection of both
lines, i.e., (1, –1)  LM 
2

( LM ) 2  9a 2   
Again  R 2  154, R 2  49  R  7  2 

 Required equation of circle be 3

 ( LM ) 2  9a 2  ( LM )2  12a 2
2 2
( x  1)  ( y  1)  49 4

 x 2  y 2  2 x  2 y  47 Again in triangle OMD, (OM )2  (OD ) 2  ( MD ) 2

2
 LM 
Example – 2 R 2  (3a  R ) 2   
 2 
The point diametrically opposite to the point P(1, 0) on the
circle x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – 3 = 0 is  R 2  9a 2  R 2  6aR  3a 2
(a) (3, 4) (b) (3, –4)
(c) (–3, 4) (d) (–3, –4)
Ans. (d)
Sol. The center C of the circle is seen to be (-1,-2). As C is the
mid point of P and P’ the coordinate of P’ is given by
P'  (3, 4)

Remark : If P be ( ,  ) and C (h, k ) then

P '  (2h   , 2k   )

 6aR  12a 2
R  2a
So, equation of circle be

( x  0) 2  ( y  0) 2  R 2  (2a ) 2

 x 2  y 2  4a 2
CIRCLES 15

Example – 4 4h + 8k = 44
- 7k = –28 k = 4
If the lines 2x + 3y + 1 = 0 and 3x – y – 4 = 0 lie along
diameters of a circle of circumference 10, then the equation Substituting k = 4 in equation (iii) we get
of the circle is 4h + 4 = 16
(a) x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y – 23 = 0 or 4h = 12
(b) x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y – 23 = 0 or h=3
(c) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 23 = 0 Substituting the value of h = 3, k = 4 in equation
(d) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y – 23 = 0 (i) we get
Ans. (c) (4 – 3)2 + (1 – 4)2 = r2
Sol. As per given condition center of the circle is the point of or 1 + 9 = r2
intersection of the 2 x  3 y  1  0 and 3x  y  4  0 or 10 = r2
 center is (1, -1) Hence, the required equation of the circle is
Also circumference of the circle is given (x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 10
or x2 – 6x + 9 + y2 – 8y + 16 = 10
2 r  10 ,  r  5
or x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y + 15 = 0
 Required equation of cicle is
( x  1)2  ( y  1)2  52 Example – 6

Or x 2  y 2  2 x  2 y  23  0 Find the equation of the circle with radius 5 whose centre

lies on x-axis and passes through the point (2, 3).
Example – 5 Sol. Let the equation of the circle be (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2
Since the circle passes through, (2, 3) and its radius is 5
Find the equation of the circle passing through the points
(2 – h)2 + (3 – k)2 = 25
(4, 1) and (6, 5) and whose centre is on the line
4x + y=16 or 4 – 4h + h2 + 9 – 6k + k2 = 25
Sol. Let the equations of the circle be (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2 or – 12 –4h + h2 – 6k + k2 = 0 ... (i)
Since the circle passes through (4, 1) and (6, 5), we have Also since the centre lies on the x-axis, we have
2 2 2
(4 – h) + (1 – k) = r ... (i) k=0 ... (ii)
2 2 2
and (6 – h) + (5 – k) = r ... (ii) Putting k = 0 in equation (i) we have
Also, since the centre lies on the line 4x + y = 16, we have – 12 – 4h + h2 = 0
4h + k = 16 ... (iii) or h2 – 4h – 12 = 0
Simplifying the equation (i), we get or h2 – 6h + 2h – 12 = 0
16 – 8h + h2 + 1 – 2k + k2 = r2 or h (h – 6) + 2(h – 6) = 0
or 17 – 8h + h2 – 2k + k2 = r2 or (h – 6) (h + 2) = 0
from equation (ii), we get or h = 6 or h = –2
36 – 12h + h2 + 25 – 10k + k2 = r2 Hence, the required equations of the circle are
or 61 – 12h + h2 – 10k + k2 = r2 (a) For h = 6
Now, (x – 6)2 + (y – 0)2 = (5)2
17 – 61 – 8h + 12h –2k + 10k = 0 or x2 – 12x + 36 + y2 = 25
(eliminating square terms) or x2 + y2 – 12x + 11 = 0
or –44 + 4h + 8k = 0 (b) For h = –2
or 4h + 8k = 44 ... (iv) (x – (–2))2 + (y – 0)2 = (5)2
Solving equations (iii) and (iv) we get or (x + 2)2 + y2 = 25
4h + k = 16 or x2 + 4x + 4 + y2 = 25
or x2 + y2 + 4x – 21 = 0
CIRCLES 16

Example – 7 Example – 9

Find the equation of a circle with centre (2, 2) which passes Find the equation of the circle passing through (1, 0) and
through the point (4, 5) (0, 1) and having the smallest possible radius.
Sol. Since the centre is (2, 2) Sol. Let the equation of the required circle be
We have (x – 2)2 + (y – 2)2 = r2 x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (i)
This circle passes through the point (4, 5) This passes through A (1, 0) and B (0, 1).
(4 – 2)2 + (5 – 2)2 = r2 \ 1 + 2g + c = 0 and 1 + 2 f + c = 0
2
or 4+9=r
æ c +1 ö æ c +1 ö
or r2 = 13 Þ g = -ç ÷ and f = - ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø
The required equation of the circle is

(x – 2)2 + (y – 2)2 = 13 Let r be the radius of circle (i). Then,

or x2 – 4x + 4 + y2 – 4y + 4 = 13 r = g2 + f 2 - c
or x2 + y2 – 4x – 4y – 5 = 0

2 2
Example – 8 æ c +1 ö æ c +1ö
Þ r= ç ÷ +ç ÷ -c
è 2 ø è 2 ø
A circle has radius equal to 3 units and its centre lies on
the line y = x – 1. Find the equation of the circle if it passes
æ c2 + 1 ö
through (7, 3). Þ r= ç ÷
è 2 ø
Sol. Let the centre of the circle be (a, b). It lies on the line
y=x–1
1 2
Þ b = a – 1. Hence the centre is (a, a – 1). Þ r2 = (c + 1)
2
Þ Then equation of the circle is (x – a)2 + (y – a + 1)2 = 9.
Clearly, r is minimum when c = 0 and the minimum value of r
It passes through (7, 3)

Þ (7 – a)2 + (4 – a)2 = 9 1
is .
2
Þ a2 – 11a + 28 = 0

Þ (a – 4) (a – 7) = 0 Þ a = 4, 7. For c = 0, we have

Hence the required equations are

1 1
g=- and f = -
x2 + y2 – 8x – 6y + 16 = 0 and 2 2

x2 + y2 – 14x – 12y + 76 = 0.
Substituting the values of g, f and c in (i), we get

x2 + y2 – x – y = 0 as the equation of the required circle.

CIRCLES 17

Example – 10
æ1 ö
Therefore, the given circle has centre at ç ,0 ÷ and has
In each of the following questions, find the centre and è4 ø
radius of the circles
1
(i) (x + 5)2 + (y – 3)2 = 36 radius .
4
(ii) x2 + y2 – 4x – 8y – 45 = 0
(iii) x2 + y2 – 8x + 10y – 12 = 0 Example – 11
2 2
(iv) 2x + 2y – x = 0
Find the centre and radius of the circle
Sol. (x + 5) + (y – 3)2 = 36
2

(x cos a + y sin a – a)2 + (x sin a – y cos a – b)2 = k2,

or (x – (–5))2 + (y – 3)2 = 62
h = –5, k = 3 and r = 6 if a varies, the locus of its centre is again a circle. Also,
find its centre and radius.
Therefore, the given circle has centre at (–5, 3) and radius 6.
(ii) The given equation is Sol. The given equation is

x2 + y2 – 4x – 8y – 45 = 0 (x cos a + y sin a – a)2 + (x sin a – y cos a – b)2 = k2

or (x2 – 4x) + (y2 – 8y) = 45 Þ x2 (cos2 a + sin2 a) + y2 (sin2 a + cos2 a) – 2 (a cos a + b sin a)
(x2 – 4x + 4) + (y2 – 8y + 16) = 4 + 16 + 45 x –2 (a sin a – b cos a) y + a2 + b2 – k2 = 0
or (x–2)2 + (y–4)2 = 65 Þ x2 + y2 – 2x (a cos a + b sin a) – 2y (a sin a – b cos a) + a2 +
Therefore, the given circle has centre at (2, 4) and radius b2 – k2 = 0

65 The coordinates of the centre of this circle are

(iii) The given equation is (a cos a + b sin a, a sin a – b cos a)

x2 + y2 – 8x + 10y – 12 = 0
and, Radius = (a cos a + bsin a)2 + (a sin a - bcos a)2 - (a 2 + b2 - k 2 )
2 2
or (x – 8x) + (y + 10) = 12
or (x2–8x + 16) + (y2 + 10y + 25) = 12 + 16 + 25 Þ Radius = a 2 (cos 2 a + sin 2 a ) + b 2 (sin 2 a + cos 2 a) - (a 2 + b 2 - k 2 )
or (x – 4)2 + (y + 5)2 = 53
Therefore, the given circle has centre at (4, –5) and radius Þ Radius = a 2 + b 2 - a 2 - b2 + k 2 = k

53 . Let (p, q) be the coordinates of the centre of the given circle.

(iv) The given equation is Then,
2x2 + 2y2 – x = 0 p = a cos a + b sin a and q = a sin a – b cos a

x To find the locus of (p, q) we have to eliminate a.

or x 2 + y2 - =0
2 Squaring and adding these two, we get

p2 + q2 = (a cos a + b sin a)2 + (a sin a – b cos a)2

æ 2 xö 2
or çx - ÷+ y = 0 Þ p2 + q2 = a2 (cos2 a + sin2 a) + b2 (sin2 a + cos2 a)
è 2ø
Þ p 2 + q 2 = a2 + b 2
æ 2 x 1ö 2 1
or çx - + ÷+ y =
è 2 16 ø 16 Hence, the locus of (p, q) is x2 + y2 = a2 + b2

2 This is a circle having centre at (0, 0) and radius equal to a 2 + b2 .

æ 1ö 2 1
or çx - ÷ + y =
è 4 ø 16
CIRCLES 18

Example – 12 Example – 14

Find the equation of the circle that passes through the

x y
points (1, 0), (–1, 0) and (0, 1). The straight line + = 1 cuts the coordinate axes at
a b
Sol. Let the required circle be x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (i) A and B. Find the equation of the circle passing through
It passes through (1, 0), (–1, 0) and (0, 1). O (0, 0), A and B
Therefore, on substituting the coordinates of three points x y
successively in equation (i), we get Sol. The straight line + = 1 cuts the coordinate axes at A (a,
a b
1 + 2g + c = 0 ... (ii), 0) and B (0, b).
1 – 2g + c = 0 ... (iii), Let x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 be the circle passing through
1 + 2f + c = 0 ... (iv) O, A and B. Then, ... (i)
Subtracting (iii) from (ii), we get 0+0+c=0 ... (ii)
4g = 0 Þ g = 0 a2 + 2ga + c = 0 ... (iii)
2
Putting g = 0 in (ii), we obtain c = –1 b + 2fb + c = 0 ... (iv)

Now putting c = –1 in (iv), we get f = 0 Solving (ii), (iii) and (iv), we obtain

Substituting the values of g, f and c in (i), we obtain the a b

g = - ,f = - and c = 0
equation of the required circle as x2 + y2 = 1 2 2
Substituting these values in (i), we obtain the equation of
Example – 13 the required circle as
Find the equation of the circle which passes through the x2 + y2 – ax – by = 0
points (5, –8), (2, –9) and (2, 1). Find also the coordinates
of its centre and radius. Example – 15
Sol. Let the required circle be Show that the points (9, 1), (7, 9) (–2, 12) and (6, 10) are
2 2
x + y + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (i) concyclic.
It passes through (5, –8), (2, –9) and (2, 1). Therefore, Sol. Let the equation of the circle passing through (9, 1), (7, 9)
\ 89 + 10g – 16f + c = 0 ... (ii) and (–2, 12) be
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (i)
85 + 4g – 18f + c = 0 ... (iii)
Then, 82 + 18g + 2f + c = 0 ... (ii)
5 + 4g + 2f + c = 0 ... (iv)
130 + 14g + 18f + c = 0 ... (iii)
Subtracting (iii) from (ii), we obtain
148 – 4g + 24f + c = 0 ... (iv)
4 + 6g + 2f = 0 Þ 2 + 3g + f = 0... (v)
Subtracting (ii) from (iii), we get
Subtracting (iv) from (iii), we get
48 – 4g + 16 f = 0 Þ 12 – g + 4f = 0 ... (v)
80 – 20f = 0 Þ f = 4
Subtracting (iii) from (iv), we get
Putting f = 4 in (v), we get g = –2
18 – 18g + 6f = 0 Þ 3 – 3g + f = 0 ... (vi)
Putting f = 4, g = –2 in (iv), we get
Solving (v) and (vi) as simultaneous linear equations in g and f,
5 – 8 + 8 + c = 0 Þ c = –5 we get
Substituting the values of g, f, c in (i), we obtain the equation f = –3, g = 0
of the required circle as
Putting f = –3, g = 0 in (ii), we get
x2 + y2 –4x + 8y – 5 = 0
82 + 0 –6 + c = 0 Þ c = – 76
The coordinates of the centre are (–g, –f) i.e., (2, –4) Substituting the values of g, f, c in (i), we get

and Radius = g 2 + f 2 - c = 4 + 16 + 5 = 5 x2 + y2 – 6y – 76 = 0
Clearly, point (6, 10) satisfies this equation. Hence, the given
points are concyclic.
CIRCLES 19

Example – 16 Sol. Equation of circle ( x  h) 2  ( y  k ) 2  k 2

Find the equation of the circle circumscribing the triangle It is passing through (-1, 1)
formed by the lines x + y = 6, 2x + y = 4 and x + 2y = 5.
( 1  h) 2  (1  k ) 2  k 2  h 2  2h  2k  2  0, D  0
Sol. Let the equations of sides AB, BC and CA of  ABC are
respectively
1
2k  1  0  k  .
x+y=6 ... (i) 2
2x + y = 4 ... (ii)
and x + 2y = 5 ... (iii) Example – 18

Solving (i) and (iii), (i) and (ii); (ii) and (iii) we get the
A circle of radius 2 lies in the first quadrant and touches
coordinates of A, B and C.
both the axes of co-ordinates. Find the equation of the
The coordinates A, B and C are (7, –1), (–2, 8) and (1, 2) circle with centre at (6, 5) and touching the above circle
respectively. externally.
Let the equation of the circumcircle of ABC be Sol. Given, AC = 2 units
2 2
x + y + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (iv) and A  (2, 2), B  (6, 5)
It passes through A (7, –1), B (–2, 8) and C (1, 2). Therefore,
Y
50 + 14g – 2f + c = 0 ... (v)
68 – 4g + 16f + c = 0 ... (vi)
5 + 2g + 4f + c = 0 ... (vii)
Subtracting (v) from (vi), we get
18 – 18g + 18f = 0 1 – g + f = 0 ... (viii) B (6, 5)
Subtracting (v) from (vii), we get – 45 – 12g + 6f = 0 ... (ix) r
Solving (viii) and (ix), we get g = –17/2, f = –19/2. C
2
Putting the values of g and f in (v), we get c = 50.
Substituting the values of g, f and c in (iv), the equation of the A
required circumcircle is (2, 2)
X’ X
x2 + y2 – 17x – 19y + 50 = 0 O

Example – 17
Y’
Consider a family of circles which are passing through the
point (–1, 1) and are tangent to x–axis. If (h, k) are the then AB  (2  6) 2  (2  5) 2  16  9  5
coordinate of the centre of the circles, then the set of
Since AC + CB = AB
values of k is given by the interval
 2 + CB = 5
1 1 1
(a)   k  (b) k   CB = 3
2 2 2
Hence equation of required circle with centre at (6, 5) and radius 3 is
1 1 (x – 6)2 + (y – 5)2 = 32
(c) 0  k  (d) k 
2 2 or x2 + y2 – 12x – 10y + 52 = 0
Ans. (d)
CIRCLES 20

Example – 19 Example – 21

A variable circle passes through the fixed point A(p, q) If the point (1, 4) lies inside the circle x2 +y2-6x -10y + p = 0
and touches x–axis. The locus of the other end of the and the circle does not touch or intersect the coordinate
diameter through A is axes, then the set of all possible values of p is the interval:
(a) (y – p)2 = 4qx (b) (x – q)2 = 4py (a) (0, 25) (b) (25, 39)
(c) (x – p)2 = 4qy (d) (y – q)2 = 4px (c) (9, 25) (d) (25, 29)
Ans. (c) Ans. (d)
Sol. Let the other end of diameter be B (). Equation of circle Sol. (1, 4) lies inside circle
with AB as diameter is given by  1  16  6  40  P  0

( x  p)( x   )  ( y  q)( y   )  0  P  29  (1)

Now it does not touch or intersect co-ordinate axes
 x 2  y 2  x ( p   )  y ( q   )  p  q   0 ...(I) At x = 0

Now (I) touches x–axis on so put y = 0 in (I) y 2  10y  p  0

Hence, D < 0
 x 2  x( p   )  p  q   0 and D  0 100  4p  0
Or
 ( p   ) 2  4  p  q 
p  25
Hence
p  (25, 29)

Example – 22
A (p, q)
Find the shortest and largest distance from the point
x-axis (2, –7) to the circle x2 + y2 – 14x – 10y – 151 = 0
Sol. Let S  x2 + y2 – 14x – 10y – 151 = 0
 ( p   ) 2  4q   S1 = (2)2 + (–7)2 – 14 (2) – 10 (–7) – 151
= – 56 < 0
Now  x,   y

 ( p  x ) 2  4q ( y ) which is required locus of one end

point of the diameter.

Example – 20

The equation of the circle passing through the point

(1, 0) and (0, 1) and having the smallest radius is
(a) x2 + y2 + x + y – 2 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – x – y = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y – 7 = 0  P (2, –7) lies inside the circle
Ans. (c)
 radius of the circle r  ( 7) 2  ( 5) 2  151  15
Sol. Radius will be minimum when (1, 0) and (0,1) are end point
 Centre of circle C  (7, 5)
of diameter
 equation of circle is  CP  (7  2) 2  (5  7) 2  13
 Shortest distance = PA = r – CP = 15 – 13 = 2
( x  1)( x  0)  ( y  0)( y  1)  0
and Largest distance = PB = r + CP = 15 + 13 = 28
2 2
 x  y x y  0
CIRCLES 21

Example – 23 Let OM be the perpendicular from O on the line

4x – 3y – 10 = 0
Find the equation of the circle which touches the axis of y
at a distance of 4 units from the origin and cuts the intercept 4  1  3  ( 2)  10
of 6 units from the axis of x. then OM  0
4 2  ( 3) 2
Sol.  CM = NO = 4
In PCM, (PC)2 = (3)2 + (4)2 Hence line 4x – 3y – 10 = 0 passes through the centre of the
 PC = 5 circle.
hence intercepted length = diameter of the circle
= 2 × 5 = 10

Example – 25

No tangent can be drawn from the point (5/2, 1) to the

circumcircle of the triangle with vertices

1, 3 , 1,  3 , 3,  3

radius of circle = 5
 NC = 5 Ans. True

centre of circle is (5, 4) Sol. The circle passes through

 Equation of circle, if centre in I quadrant
(x – 5)2 + (y – 4)2 = 25    
A 1, 3 , B 1,  3 and C 3,  3  
If centre in II, III and IV quadrant, then equations are
Here line AB is parallel to y-axis and BC is
(x + 5)2 + (y – 4)2 = 25,
Parallel to x-axis  ABC  90
(x + 5)2 + (y + 4)2 = 25
and (x – 5)2 + (y + 4)2 = 25  AC is diameter of circle
Hence, there are 4 circles which satisfy the given conditions.
 equation of circle is
They are
(x ± 5)2 + (y ± 4)2 = 25

( x  1)( x  3)  y  3  y  3   0
or x2 + y2 ± 10x ± 8y + 16 = 0

Example – 24  x2  y2  4x  0

Find the length of the intercept on the straight line

5 
4x – 3y – 10 = 0 by the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 20 = 0. the position of point  ,1
2 
Sol. Centre and radius of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 20 = 0 are
(1, –2) and 1  4  20  5 respectively.. with respect to circle is

25
S1   1  10  0
4

 Point lies inside the circle

 No tangent can be drawn.
 given statement is true.
CIRCLES 22

Example – 26 Example – 27

Find the equations of the tangents to the circle x2 + y2 =9, Find the length of tangents drawn from the point (3, –4) to
which the circle 2x2 + 2y2 – 7x – 9y – 13 = 0.
(i) are parallel to the line 3x + 4y – 5 = 0 Sol. The equation of the given circle is

(ii) are perpendicular to the line 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 2x2 + 2y2 – 7x – 9y – 13 = 0

Re-writing the given equation of the circle in standard form
(iii) make an angle of 60° with the x-axis
7 9 13
3 i.e., x 2  y2  x  y   0
Sol. (i) Slope of 3x + 4y – 5 = 0 is  2 2 2
4
7 9 13
3
Let S  x 2  y2  x  y 
Let m   2 2 2
4
7 9 13
and equation of circle is x2 + y2 = 9  S1  (3) 2  (4) 2   3   (4) 
2 2 2
 Equations of tangents are
21 13
 25   18 
  3 2
 2 2
3
y x3 1     
4   4  = 43 – 17 = 26
 
 Length of tangent  S1  26
 4y = –3x ± 15
or 3x + 4y ± 15 = 0
Example – 28
2
(ii) slope of 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is  If the length of tangent from (f, g) to the circle x2 + y2 = 6 be
3
twice the length of the tangent from (f, g) to circle
x2 + y2 + 3x + 3y = 0 then will f2 + g2 + 4f + 4g + 2 = 0 ?
3
 Slope of perpendicular to 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is  m (say)
2 Sol. According to the question

and given circle is x2 + y2 = 9

(g 2  f 2  6)  2 (f 2  g 2  3f  3g)
 Equations of tangents perpendicular to 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is
On squaring, g2 + f2 – 6 = 4f2 + 4g2 + 12f + 12g
2
3 3 or 3f2 + 3g2 +12f + 12g + 6 = 0
y x  3 1  
2 2 or f2 + g2 + 4f + 4g + 2 = 0
which is true, yes.
 2y  3x  3 13
Example – 29
or 3x  2y  3 13  0

(iii) Since tangent make an angle 60° with the x-axis Find the power of point (2, 4) with respect to the circle
x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 8 = 0
 m  tan 60  3
Sol. The power of the point (2, 4) with respect to the circle
and given circle x2 + y2 = 9
x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 8 = 0 is ( S1 )2 or S1
 Equation of tangents are y  3x  3 1  ( 3) 2 where S = x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 8
 S1 = (2)2 + (4)2 – 6 × 2 + 4 × 4 – 8
or 3x  y  6  0 = 4 + 16 – 12 + 16 – 8 = 16
CIRCLES 23

Example – 30 Example – 31

The angle between a pair of tangents drawn from a point P Find the equations of the tangents to the circle
x2 + y2 = 16 drawn from the point (1, 4).
to the circle x2 +y2 +4x –6y +9 sin2 a + 13 cos2 a = 0 is 2a.
The equation of the locus of the point P is : Sol. Given circle is
x2 + y2 = 16 ... (1)
(a) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y + 4 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y – 9 = 0
Any tangent of (1) in terms of slope is
(c) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y – 4 = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y + 9 = 0
Ans. (d) y  mx  4 (1  m 2 ) ... (2)

Sol. Centre of the circle which passes through (1, 4)

x 2  y 2  4 x  6 y  9 sin 2 a  13cos 2 a  0 is then 4  m  4 (1  m 2 )

C(-2, 3) and its radius is  (4–m)2 = 16 (1 + m2)

( 2) 2  (3) 2  9sin 2 a  13cos 2 a 8

 15m2 + 8m = 0 m = 0, –
15
 13  13cos 2 a  9sin 2 a From (2), equations of tangents drawn from (1, 4) are

 13sin 2 a  9sin 2 a  4sin 2 a  2sin a 8 64

y = 4 and y   x  4 1
15 225
or 8x + 15y = 68 respectively.

Example – 32

Find the equations of the tangents from the point A(3, 2)

to the circle x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 8 = 0.

Sol. Combined equation of the pair of tangents drawn from

A(3, 2) to the given circle x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 8 = 0 can be
written in the usual notation.

T2 = SS1 namely

Let P(h,k) be any point and APC  a, PAC 
2  [3x + 2y + 2(x + 3) + 3 (y + 2) + 8]2 = [x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 8]

That is, triangle APC is a right angled triangle [9 + 4 + 12 + 12 + 8]

 (5x + 5y + 20)2 = 45 (x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 8)

AC 2sin a
 sin a  
PC (h  2) 2  (k  3) 2  5 (x + y + 4)2 = 9 (x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 8)

 5 (x2 + y2 + 2xy + 8x + 8y + 16) = 9 (x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y +8)

2 2
 ( h  2)  ( k  3)  4
 4x2 + 4y2 – 10xy – 4x + 14y – 8 = 0
 h2  4  4h  k 2  9  6k  4 or 2x2 + 2y2 – 5xy – 2x + 7y – 4 = 0

 h2  k 2  4h  6k  9  0 or (2x – y – 4) (x – 2y + 1) = 0

Thus, required equation of lous is Hence the required tangents to the circle from A (3, 2) are

x2  y2  4x  6 y  9  0 2x – y – 4 = 0 and x – 2y + 1 = 0
CIRCLES 24

Example – 33 | 0 + 0 - b2 |
 =c
(a 2 cos 2 θ + a 2 sin 2 θ)
Find the co–ordinates of the point from which tangents are
 b2 = ac  a, b, c are in G.P.
drawn to the circle x2 + y2 – 6x – 4y + 3 = 0 such that the mid
point of its chord of contact is (1, 1). Example – 35
Sol. Let the required point be P(x1, y1). Find the condition that chord of contact of any external
point (h, k) to the circle x2 + y2 = a2 should subtend right
The equation of the chord of contact of P with respect to
angle at the centre of the circle.
the given circle is
Sol. Equation of chord of contact AB is
xx1 + yy1 – 3(x + x1) – 2(y + y1) + 3 = 0. ...(1) hx + ky = a2 ...(i)
Now we will find equation of pair of lines OA and OB by
Then equation of the chord with mid–point (1, 1) is
homogenising x2 + y2 = a2 with equation of chord of contact
x + y – 3(x + 1) – 2(y + 1) + 3 = 1 + 1 – 6 – 4 + 3 AB.
From (i) hx + ky = a2 . 1
 2x + y = 3.
hx  ky
Equating the ratios of the coefficients of x, y and the constant  1 ...(ii)
a2
terms and solving for x1, y1 we get x1 = – 1, y1 = 0 To homogenise circle x2 + y2 = a2 with equation of chord
of contact AB, we can write circle as x2 + y2 = a2 . 12 and
Example – 34 replace value of (1) from (ii).

2
 hx  ky 
The chord of contact of tangents drawn from a point  x2 + y2 = a2  2 
 a 
on the circle x2 + y2 = a2 to the circle x2 + y2 = b2
 a2 (x2 + y2) = (hx + ky)2
touches the circle x2 + y2 = c2. Show that a, b, c are in G.P.
 x2 (a2 – h2) – 2hkxy + y2 (a2 – k2) = 0
Sol. Let P (a cos , a sin ) be a point on the circle x2 + y2 = a2.
The equation represents pair of straight lines.
Then equation of chord of contact of tangents drawn from
It is given that AB substends angle /2 at O. It implies
P (a cos , a sin ) to the circle x2 + y2 = b2 is

AOB 
2
 angle between pair of lines OA and OB is /2.
Angle between pair of lines is 90° if
coefficient of x2 + coefficient of y2 = 0
 a2 – h2 + a2 – k2 = 0
 h2 + k2 = 2a2

ax cos  + ay sin  = b2 ...(i)

This touches the circle x2 + y2 = c2 ...(ii)
 Length of perpendicular from (0, 0) to (i) = radius of (ii)
CIRCLES 25

Example – 36 Example – 39

Through a fixed point (h, k), secants are drawn to the A circle touches the x–axis and also touches the circle
circle x2 + y2 = r2. Show that the locus of mid point of the with centre at (0, 3) and radius 2. The locus of the centre of
portions of secants intercepted by the circle is the circle is
x2 + y2 = hx + ky. (a) a circle (b) an ellipse

Sol. Let P (x1, y1) be the middle point of any chord AB, which (c) a parabola (d) a hyperbola
passes through the point C (h, k). Ans. (c)

Sol. Let C1 (h, k) be the center of the circle.

Circle touches the x- axis then its radius r1  k .

Also circle touches the circle with centre C 2 (0,3) and

radius r2  2.

 C1C2  r1  r2

2 2
  h  0   k  3  k  2

Squaring
Equation of chord AB is T = S1
h 2  10k  5  0
 xx1 + yy1 – r2 = x12 + y12 – r2

2 2
 Locus is x 2  10y  5  0 , which is parabola.
or x  y  xx1  yy1
1 1

But since AB passes through C (h, k) then Example – 40

x12  y12  hx1  ky1 The two circles x2 + y2 = ax and x2 + y2 = c2 (c > 0) touch
each other if
 Locus of P (x1, y1) is x2 + y2 = hx + ky
(a) |a| = c (b) a = 2c
(c) |a| = 2c (d) 2|a| = c
Example – 37
Ans. (a)
Find the equation of the chord of x2 + y2 – 6x + 10y –9 =0 Sol. The centers and radii of the circles
which is bisected at (–2, 4).
2
 a 2 a2 2 2 2
Sol. The equation of the required chord is  x    y  , x  y  c are
 2 4
–2x + 4y –3 (x – 2) + 5 (y + 4) – 9 = 4 + 16 + 12 + 40 – 9
 –5x + 9y – 46 = 0 a  a
C1  ,0  , C2  0, 0 , r1  , r2  c
or 5x – 9y + 46 = 0 2  2

Two circles touch each other if C1C2  r1  r2

Example – 38

If two tangents are drawn from a point on the circle a a

  c
x2 + y2 = 50 to the circle x2 + y2 = 25 then find the angle 2 2
between the tangents.
a a
Sol.  x2 + y2 = 50 is the director circle of x2 + y2 = 25   c
2 2
Hence angle between tangents = 90°
 a  c.
CIRCLES 26

Example – 41 Example – 43

Prove that the circles x 2 + y 2 + 2ax + c 2 = 0 and Show that the common tangents to the circles
1 1 1 x2 + y2 – 6x = 0 and x2 + y2 + 2x = 0 form are equilateral
x2 + y2 + 2by + c2 = 0 touch each other, if 2
 2 2 triangle.
a b c
Sol. For the circle x2 + y2 – 6x = 0
Sol. Given circles are
centre C1  (3, 0) and r1 = 3
x2 + y2 + 2ax + c2 = 0 ... (1)
And for the circle x2 + y2 + 2x = 0
and x2 + y2 + 2by + c2 = 0 ... (2)
centre C2 (–1, 0) and r2 = 1
Let C 1 and C 2 be the centres of circles (1) and (2)
respectively and r1 and r2 be their radii, then

C1 = (–a, 0), C2 = (0, –b), r1  a 2  c 2 , r2  b 2  c 2

Here we do not find the two circles touch each other

internally or externally.

For touch, C1 C2  r1  r2

or (a 2  b 2 )  ( a 2  c 2 )  (b 2  c 2 )

Now C1C2 = [3  ( 1)]2  0  4 and r1 + r2 = 4

On squaring a2 + b2 = a2 – c2 + b2 – c2 ± 2 2 2 2
(a  c ) (b  c ) 2

 C1 C2 = r1 + r2
or c 2   a 2 b 2  c 2 (a 2  b 2 )  c 4 Hence the two circles touch each other externally,
therefore, there will be three common tangents.
Again squaring, c4 = a2b2 – c2 (a2 + b2) + c4
Equation of the common tangent at the point of contact is
or c2 (a2 + b2) = a2b2 S1 – S2 = 0
1 1 1  (x2 + y2 – 6x) – (x2 + y2 + 2x) = 0
or 2
 2  2
a b c  – 8x = 0
 x=0
Example – 42 Let the point of intersection of direct common tangent be
Q (h, k). Then Q divides C1 C2 externally in the ratio of 1 : 3.
Examine if the two circles x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 and
x2 + y2 – 8y – 4 = 0 touch each other externally or internally. 1.3  3. 1
 h = –3 and k = 0
Sol. Given circles are 1 3
x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 ... (1)  Q  (–3, 0)
2 2
and x + y – 8y – 4 = 0 ... (2) Let the equation of direct common tangent be :
Let centres and radii of circles (1) and (2) are represented by y – 0 = m (x + 3) or mx – y + 3m = 0 ...(i)
C1, r1 and C2, r2 respectively.
Apply condition of tangency with second circle to get :
 C1  (1, 2), r1  1  4  5 |  m  0  3m |
 =1  4m2 = m2 + 1
and C2  (0, 4), r2  0  16  4  2 5 m2 1

1
Now C1 C 2  (1  0) 2  (2  4) 2  3m2 = 1  m=±
3
C1C2  5  r2  r1 From(i), direct common tangents are :
Hence the two circles touch each other internally.
CIRCLES 27

tangents intersects C1C2 at D and C respectively then

x x
y= + 3 and y = - - 3 point D will divide C2 C1 in the ratio 3 : 1 (externally). And
3 3
the point C divide C2 C1 in the ratio 3 : 1 (internally)
Hence all common tangents are
æ 3 1 -1 - 3 3 3 -1 1 ö
Þ Co–ordinates of D are ç , ÷
x=0 ...(ii) è 3 -1 3 -1 ø

x or (3, 4)
y= + 3 ...(iii)
3
æ 3 1 +1 - 3 3 3 +1 1 ö
and co–ordinates of C are ç , ÷
x è 3 +1 3 +1 ø
and y=- - 3 ....(iv)
3 or (0, 5/2)
Let P, Q, R be the point of intersection of these lines. Step 2 : (Equation of transverse common tangent)
On solving, we get : Equation of line through C º (0, 5/2) is y – 5/2 = mx
or mx – y + 5/2 = 0 ...(i)
P º (0, 3 ) ; Q º (–3, 0) and R º (0, – 3 )
Step (i) Apply the usual condition of tangency using first
Now PQ = QR = RP = 2 3 circle to get :

Hence DPQR is an equilateral triangle. Thus common m ×1 - 3 + 5 / 2

\ = ±1
tangents form an equilateral triangle. m2 + 1

Example – 44 1
Þ m2 + – m = m2 + 1
4
Find equation of all the common tangents to the circles
x2 + y2 – 2x – 6y + 9 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 6x – 2y + 1 = 0 3
Þ 0. m2 – m – = 0.
Sol. For the circle x2 + y2 – 2x– 6y + 9 = 0 4

centre C1 º (1, 3) and r1 = 1 Þ m = ¥ and m = – 3/4

and for the circle x2 + y2 + 6x – 2y + 1 = 0 Step (ii) Hence equations of transverse tangents are
centre C2 º (–3, 1) and r2 = 3 x = 0 and 3x + 4y – 10 = 0.
Step 3 : (Equation of direct common tangent)
Equation of any line through (3, 4) is y – 4 = m (x – 3)
Þ m x – y + 4 – 3m = 0
Step (iii) Apply the usual condition of tangency using
first circle to get :

m - 3 + 4 - 3m
=±1
m2 + 1
Now C1 C2 = 16 + 4 = 2 5 and r1 + r2 = 4
Þ (– 2m + 1)2 = m2 + 1
Þ C1 C2 > r1 + r2 Þ 3m2 – 4m = 0
Hence the circles do not intersect to each other. \ m = 0, m = 4/3
So there will be four common tangents between them. Step (iv) Equations of Direct common tangents are
Applying the working rule, we get : y = 4 and 4x – 3y = 0.
Step 1 : The direct common tangents and transverse common
CIRCLES 28

NOTES : then –g = 2
\ g = –2 ... (3)
When two circles S1 and S2 are of same radii then From (2), 1 – 2f + c = 0 ... (4)
(i) For Indirect tangents the approach is same as given 2 2
and given circle is x + y + 5x + 7y – 4 = 0 ... (5)
above.
Given the circles (1) and (5) cut each other orthogonally,
(ii) For Direct tangent we can use following approach.
5 7
\ 2g ´ + 2f ´ = c - 4
2 2
or 5g + 7f = c – 4
– 10 + 7f = c – 4 (from (3))
or –6 + 7f – c = 0 ... (6)
Let the slope of direct common tangent be m from figure Solving (4) and (6), we get
we have slope of C1C2 = m then equation of direct
f = 1 and c = 1
common tangent be y = mx + c, where ‘c’ is the unknown
variable parameter. Apply condition tangency to find the Substituting the values of g, f, c in (1), we get
value of c. x2 + y2 – 4x + 2y + 1 = 0

Example – 45 Example – 47

Show that the circles x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y + 8 = 0 and Find the equation of the circle passing through the point
x2 + y2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0 touch at (3, –1). of intersection of the circles x2 + y2 – 6x + 2y + 4 = 0,
Sol. Equation of tangent at (3, –1) of the circle x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y – 6 = 0 and with its centre on the line
x2 + y2 –4x + 6y + 8 = 0 is y= x

3x + (–1) y – 2 (x + 3) + 3 (y – 1) + 8 = 0 Sol. Equation of any circle through the point of intersection of

or x + 2y –1 = 0 ... (1) given circles is

and equation of tangent at (3, –1) of the circle (x2 + y2 – 6x + 2y + 4) + l (x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y – 6) = 0

x2 + y2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0 is
Þ x2 (1 + l) + y2 (1 + l) – 2x (3 – l) + 2y (1 – 2l) + (4–6l)=0
3 . x + (–1) . y – 5 (x + 3) – 3 (y – 1) + 14 = 0
or –2x – 4y + 2 = 0 2x(3 - l) 2y(1 - 2l) (4 - 6l)
or x 2 + y2 - + + = 0 ... (1)
or x + 2y – 1 = 0 ... (2) (1 + l) (1 + l ) (1 + l)
which is the same as (1).
Hence the given circles touch at (3, –1). ì 3 - l 2l - 1 ü
Its centre í , ý lies on the line y = x
î1 + l 1 + l þ
Example – 46
2l - 1 3 - l
then =
Find the equation of the circle which cuts the circle 1+ l 1+ l
x2 + y2 + 5x + 7y – 4 = 0 orthogonally, has its centre on the
line x = 2 and passes through the point (4, –1). Þ l ¹ –1
Sol. Let the required circle be \ 2l – 1 = 3 – l
2 2
x + y + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (1) or 3l = 4
Since (4, –1) lie on (1) then
\ l = 4/3
17 + 8g – 2f + c = 0 ... (2)
Centre of (1) is (–g, –f) \ Substituting the value of l = 4/3 in (1), we get the required
equation as
Since centre lie on x = 2
7x2 + 7y2 – 10x – 10y – 12 = 0
CIRCLES 29

Example – 48 Example – 50

Find the equation of the circle through points of A tangent is drawn to eac h of t he circles
intersection of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 4 = 0 and the line x2 + y2 = a2 ; x2 + y2 = b2. Show that if the two tangents are
x + 2y =4 which touches the line x + 2y = 0. perpendicular to each other, the locus of their point of
intersection is a circle concentric with the given circles.
Sol. Equation of any circle through points of intersection of the
Sol. Let P º (x1, y1) be the point of intersection of the tangents
given circle and the line is
PA and PB where A, B are points of contact with the two
(x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 4) + l (x + 2y – 4) = 0 circles respectively.

or x2 + y2 + (l – 2)x + (2l – 4) y + 4 (1 – l) = 0 ... (1) As PA perpendicular to PB. the corresponding radii OA

and OB are also perpendicular.
It will touch the line x + 2y = 0 if solution of equation (1) and
x = –2y be unique. Let ÐAOX = q
Þ ÐBOX = q + 90°
Þ (–2y)2 + y2 + (l – 2) (–2y) + (2l – 4) y + 4 (1 – l) = 0
Using the parametric form of the circles we can take :
or 5y2 + 4 (1 – l) = 0
A º (a cosq, a sin q)
Hence the roots of the equation must be equal. B º [b cos (q + 90°), b sin (q + 90°)]

Then 0 – 4.5.4 (1 – l) = 0 or 1 – l = 0 or l = 1 B º (–b sin q, b cos q)

The equation of PA is : x (a cos q) + y (a sin q) = a2
From (1), the required circle is x2 + y2 – x – 2y = 0
Þ x cosq + y sinq = a
Example – 49 The equation of PB is : x (–b sin q) + y (b cos q) = b2
Þ y cosq – x sinq = b
Find the equation of the circle described on the common chord
of the circles x2 + y2 – 4x – 5 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 8y + 7 = 0 as Þ P º (x1 , y1) lies on PA and PB both.
diameter. Þ x1 cosq + y1 sin q = a

Sol. Equation of the common chord is S1 – S2 = 0 and y1 cos q – x1 sin q = b

As q is changing quantity (different for different positions
Þ x + 2y + 3 = 0.
of P), we will eliminate.
Equation of the circle through the two circles is S1 + lS2 = 0
Squaring and adding, we get : x12 + y12 = a2 + b2
4 8ly 7l - 5
Þ x2 + y2 – x+ + = 0. Þ the locus of P is x2 + y2 = a2 + b2 which is concentric with
1+ l 1+ l 1+ l
the given circles.

æ 2 4l ö
Its centre ç ,- ÷ lies on x + 2y + 3 = 0
è1+ l 1+ l ø

2 8l
Þ - + 3 = 0 Þ 2 – 8l + 3 + 3l = 0 Þ l = 1.
1+ l 1+ l

Hence the required circle is x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 1 = 0.

CIRCLES 30

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

The general form of the equation of a circle 7. Centre of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 1 = 0 is –
(a) (–1, 2) (b) (1, –2)
1. The equation ax2 + by2 + 2hxy + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 represents
(c) (1, 2) (d) (–1, –2)
a circle only if
8. The equation of a circle which passes through the three
(a) a = b, h = 0
points (3, 0), (1, –6), (4, –1) is-
(b) a = b ¹ 0, h = 0
(a) 2x2 + 2y2 + 5x – 11y + 3 = 0
(c) a = b ¹ 0, h = 0, g2 + f2 – c > 0
(b) x2 + y2 – 5x + 11y – 3 = 0
(d) a = b ¹ 0, h = 0, g2 + f2 – ac > 0
(c) x2 + y2 + 5x – 11y + 3 = 0
2. Equation of the circle which passes through the centre of
the circle x2 + y2 + 8x + 10y – 7 = 0 and is concentric with the (d) 2x2 + 2y2 – 5x + 11y – 3 = 0
circle 2x2 + 2y2– 8x – 12y – 9 = 0 is 9. The equation of the circle which touches the axis of y at
2 2
(a) x + y – 4x – 8y – 97 = 0 the origin and passes through (3, 4) is-
(b) x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 87 = 0 (a) 4 (x2 + y2) – 25x = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 2x – 8y – 95 = 0 (b) 3 (x2 + y2) – 25x = 0
(d) None of these (c) 2 (x2 + y2) – 3x = 0
3. Equation of a circle concentric with the circle (d) 4 (x2 + y2) – 25x + 10 = 0
2x2 + 2y2 – 6x + 8y + 1 = 0 and of double its area is 10. The length of the diameter of the circle which touches the
2 2
(a) 2x + 2y – 12x + 16y + 1 = 0 x-axis at the point (1, 0) and passes through the point (2, 3)
is
(b) 4x2 + 4y2 – 3x + 16y + 2 = 0
(c) 4x2 + 4y2 – 12x + 16y – 21 = 0 10 3
(a) (b)
(d) None of these 3 5
4. The equation of a circle which passes through the
point (1, –2) and (4, –3) and whose centre lies on the 6 5
(c) (d)
line 3x + 4 y = 7 is 5 3
(a) 15 (x2 + y2) – 94 x + 18 y – 55 = 0 11. The equation of the circle touches y axis and having centre
(b) 15 (x2 + y2) – 94 x + 18 y + 55 = 0 (–2, –3) is
(c) 15 (x2 + y2) + 94 x – 18 y + 55 = 0 (a) x2 + y2 – 4x – 9y – 4 = 0
(d) none of these (b) x2 + y2 + 4x + 9y + 4 = 0
5. Two vertices of an equilateral triangle are (–1, 0) and (c) x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 9 = 0
(1, 0), and its third vertex lies above the x-axis. Then the (d) x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 9 = 0
equation of the circumcircle of the triangle is :
Diametric form of a circle
(a) x2 + y2 = 1
(b) 3 (x2 + y2) + 2y – 3 = 0 12. The abscissae and ordinates of the points A and B are the
roots of the equations x 2 + 2ax + b = 0 and
(c) 3 (x2 + y2) – 2y – 3 = 0 x2 + 2cx + d = 0 respectively, then the equation of circle with
(d) none of these AB as diameter is
6. Equation of the circle of radius 5 whose centre lies on (a) x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2cy + b + d = 0
y-axis in first quadrant and passes through (3, 2) is
(b) x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2cy – b – d = 0
(a) x2 + y2 – 12y + 11 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 6y – 1 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2cy + b + d = 0
2 2
(c) x + y – 8y + 3 = 0 (d) None of these (d) x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2cy – b – d = 0
CIRCLES 31
13. A point A(2, 1) is outside the circle
æ l l ö
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 & AP, AQ are tangents to the 19. If the point ç - 5 + , -3 + ÷ is an interior point of
è 2 2ø
circle. The equation of the circle circumscribing the triangle
the larger segement of the circles x2 + y2 = 16 cut off by the
APQ is :
line x + y = 2, then
(a) (x + g) (x – 2) + (y + f) (y – 1) = 0
(a) l Î -¥,5 2
(b) (x + g) (x – 2) – (y + f) (y – 1) = 0
(c) (x – g) (x + 2) + (y – f) (y + 1) = 0 (b) l Î 4 2 - 14, 5 2
(d) none of these
14. The intercept on the line y = x by the circle x2 + y2 – 2x = 0 is (c) l Î 4 2 - 14, 4 2 + 14

AB. Equation of the circle on AB as a diameter is (d) none of these

(a) x2 + y2 + x + y = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – x + y = 0 20. The point (sin q, cos q), q being any real number, lie inside
(c) x2 + y2 – x – y = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + x – y = 0 the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + l = 0, if

Intercept made by a circle (a) l <1 + 2 2 (b) l > 2 2 -1

15. A circle touches x axis at +3 distance and cuts an intercept (c) l < –1– 2 2 (d) l >1+ 2 2

of 8 in +ve direction of y axis. Its equation is– 21. The co-ordinate of the point on the circle
(a) x2 + y2 + 6x + 10y – 9 = 0 x2 + y2 – 12x – 4y + 30 = 0, which is farthest from the origin
are:
(b) x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y – 9 = 0
(a) (9, 3) (b) (8, 5)
(c) x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y + 9 = 0
(c) (12, 4) (d) none of these
(d) x2 + y2 + 6x + 10y + 9 = 0
Condition of tangency in circle
16. The equation to a circle passing through the origin and
cutting of intercepts each equal to 5 of the axes is- 22. The equation of circle with centre (1, 2) and tangent
x + y – 5 = 0 is
(a) x2 + y2 + 5x – 5y = 0
(a) x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y + 6 = 0
(b) x2 + y2 – 5x + 5y = 0
(b) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 3 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 5x – 5y = 0 (c) x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 8 = 0
(d) x2 + y2 + 5x + 5y = 0 (d) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 8 = 0
17. The circle x2 + y2 – 3x – 4y + 2 = 0 cuts x-axis at 23. The equation of the incircle of the triangle formed by the
axes and the line 4x + 3y = 6 is
(a) (2, 0), (–3, 0) (b) (3, 0), (4, 0)
(a) x2 + y2 – 6x – 6y + 9 = 0
(c) (1, 0), (–1, 0) (d) (1, 0), (2, 0)
(b) 4(x2 + y2 – x – y) + 1 = 0
Position of a point wrt circle (c) 4(x2 + y2 + x + y) + 1 = 0
(d) none of these
18. The range of values of q Î [0, 2p] for which
24. The line 3x – 2y = k meets the circle x2 + y2 = 4r2 at only one
(1 + cos q, sin q) is on interior points of the circle
point, if k2 is
x2 + y2 = 1, is
(a) 20r2 (b) 52r2
(a) (p/6, 5p/6) (b) (2p/3, 5p/3)
52 2 20 2
(c) (p/6, 7p/6) (d) (2p/3, 4p/3) (c) r (d) r
9 9
CIRCLES 32
Equation of tangents in circle 32. The centre of the circle passing through (0, 0) and (1, 0)
and touching the circle x2 + y2 = 9 is
25. The angle between the tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 25 at
(3, 4) and (4, –3) is : æ1 1ö æ1 ö
(a) ç , ÷ (b) ç ,- 2 ÷
p è2 2ø è 2 ø
p
(a) (b)
2 3
æ3 1ö æ1 3ö
(c) ç , ÷ (d) ç , ÷
p p è2 2ø è2 2ø
(c) (d)
4 6
Family of circle
26. The equation of the tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 4, which
are parallel to x + 2y + 3 = 0, are 33. The circle passing through (1, –2) and touching the axis of
x at (3, 0) also passes through the point
(a) x – 2y = 2 (b) x + 2y = ± 2 3
(a) (–5, 2) (b) (2, –5)
(c) x + 2y = ± 2 5 (d) x - 2y = ± 2 5 (c) (5, –2) (d) (–2, 5)
27. The equations of the tangents to the circle 34. The equation of the circle passing through (1, –3) & the
x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 12 = 0 which are parallel to the line points common to the two circle,
4x + 3y + 5 = 0, are 2 2 2 2
x + y – 6x + 8y – 16 = 0, x + y + 4x – 2y – 8 = 0 is.
(a) 4x + 3y + 11 = 0 and 4x + 3y + 8 = 0 (a) x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y + 24 = 0
(b) 4x + 3y – 9 = 0 and 4x + 3y + 7 = 0 (b) 2x2 + 2y2 + 3x + y – 20 = 0
(c) 4x + 3y + 19 = 0 and 4x + 3y – 31 = 0 (c) 3x2 + 3y2 – 5x + 7y – 19 = 20
(d) 4x + 3y – 10 = 0 and 4x + 3y + 12 = 0 (d) none of these
28. If the equation of the tangent to the circle
35. The circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 3ky – 2 = 0 passes through the fixed
x2 + y2 – 2x + 6y – 6 = 0 parallel to 3x – 4y + 7 = 0 is
point :
3x – 4y + k = 0, then the values of k are
(a) 5, – 35 (b) –5, 35 (a) 1+ 3 ,0 (b) - 1+ 3 ,0
(c) 7, –32 (d) –7, 32
29. The equation of a tangent to the circle x2 + y2 = 25 passing (c) - 3 - 1,1 (d) 1 - 3,1
through (–2, 11) is 36. If y = 2x is a chord of the circle x2 + y2 = 10x, then the
(a) 4x + 3y = 25 (b) 7x – 24y = 320 equation of the circle whose diameter is this chord is
(c) 3x + 4y = 38 (d) 24x + 7y + 125 = 0 (a) x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y = 0 (b) x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y = 0
Common tangents (c) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 (d) None of these
37. If the line y =x +3 meets the circle x2 + y2 = a2 at A and B,
30. The set of all real values of l for which exactly two common
then the equation of the circle having AB as a diameter will be-
tangents can be drawn to the circles
(a) x2 + y2 + 3x – 3y – a2 + 9 = 0
x2 + y2 - 4x - 4y + 6 = 0 and x2 + y2 - 10x - 10y + l = 0 is the
(b) x2 + y2 + 3x + 3y – a2 + 9 = 0
interval:
(a) (12, 32) (b) (18, 42) (c) x2 + y2 – 3x + 3y – a2 + 9 = 0

(c) (12, 24) (d) (18, 48) (d) None of these

31. For the two circles x2 + y2 = 16 and x2 + y2 - 2y = 0, there is/ 38. The equation of the circle described on the chord
are: 3x + y + 5 = 0 of the circle x2 + y2 = 16 as diameter is
(a) one pair of common tangents (a) x2 + y2 + 3x + y - 11 = 0
(b) two pairs of common tangents (b) x2 + y2 + 3x + y +1 = 0
(c) three common tangents (c) x2 + y2 + 3x + y - 2 = 0
(d) no nommon tangent (d) x2 + y2 + 3x + y - 22 = 0
CIRCLES 33

Chords of a circle Position of two circles with respect to each other

39. If the chord y = mx + 1 of the circle x2 + y2 = 1 subtends an 45. The circles x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 and
angle of measure 45° at the major segment of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 touch each other
then value of m is
(a) externally at (0,1) (b) internally at (0,1)
(a) 2 ± 2 (b) - 2 ± 2 (c) externally at (1,0) (d) internally at (1,0)

(c) - 1± 2 (d) ±1 46. If the two circles (x – 1)2 + (y – 3)2 = r2 and

x2 + y2 – 8x + 2y + 8 = 0 intersect in two distinct points,
40. Let C be the circle with centre (0, 0) and radius 3 units. The
then
equation of the locus of the mid points of chord of the
circle C that subtend an angle of 2p/3 at its centre is (a) r < 2 (b) r = 2
(c) r > 2 (d) 2 < r < 8
3
(a) x2 + y2 = (b) x2 + y2 = 1 47. Let C be the circle with centre at (1, 1) and radius = 1. If T
2
is the circle centred at (0, y), passing through origin and
27 9 touching the circle C externally, then the radius of T is
(c) x2 + y2 = (d) x2 + y2 = equal to :
4 4
41. If two distinct chords, drawn from the point (p, q) on the 1 3
circle x2 + y2 = px + qy (where pq ¹ 0) are bisected by the (a) (b)
4 2
x-axis, then :
(a) p2 = q2 (b) p2 = 8q2 3 1
(c) (d)
(c) p2 < 8q2 (d) p2 > 8q2 2 2

Pair of tangents in circle 48. The centre of a circle passing through the points (0, 0),
(1, 0) and touching the circle x2 + y2 = 9 is :
42. The equation of tangent drawn from the origin to the circle (a) (3/2, 1/2) (b) (1/2, 3/2)
x2 +y2 –2rx –2hy + h2 =0 is-
(a) y = 0 (b) x – y =0 æ1 ö
(c) (1/2, 1/2) (d) ç ± 2 ÷
(c) (h2 – r2) x – 2rhy =0 (d) None of these è 2 ø
43. The angle between the tangents from (a, b) to the circle 49. The circles x2 + y2 + 6x + 6y = 0 and x2 + y2 – 12x – 12y =0
x2 + y2 = a2 is – (a) touch each other internally
(b) touch each other externally
æ a ö
-1 ç
æ a ö
(a) tan ÷ (b) 2 tan-1 ç ÷ (c) intersect in two points
ç S ÷ ç S ÷
è 1 ø è 1ø
(d) cut orthogonally
50. The two circles x2 + y2 – 2x + 6y + 6 = 0 and
æ S1 ö
-1 ç
(c) 2 tan ÷ (d) None of these x2 + y2 –5x + 6y + 15 = 0
ç a ÷
è ø (a) intersect (b) are concentric
Where S1 = a2 + b2 – a2 (c) touch internally (d) touch externally
44. If from any point P on the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 51. Which of the following statements is true regarding the
tangents are drawn to the circle following two circles ?
x2 +y2 +2gx +2fy + csin2 a + (g2 + f 2) cos2 a = 0, x2 + y2 – 4x – 8y = 0 and x2 + y2 – 8x – 6y + 20 = 0
(a is acute) then the angle between the tangents is : (a) These circles do not touch each other
(a) a (b) 2 a (b) These circles touch each other internally
a (c) These circles touch each other externally
(c) (d) none of these
2 (d) None of these
CIRCLES 34
52. The locus of the centre of a circle, which touches externally Numerical Value Type Questions
the circle x2 +y2 –6x –6y +14 =0 and also touches the
y-axis is given by the equation : 57. The radius of the circle passing through the points
(1, 2), (5, 2) & (5, –2) is :
(a) x2 – 6x – 10y + 14 = 0 (b) x2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0
58. The greatest distance of the point P (10, 7) from the circle
(c) y2 – 6x – 10y + 14 = 0 (d) y2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0
x2 + y2 – 4x –2y – 20 = 0 is-
Misc examples-circles 59. The length of intercept on y-axis, by a circle whose diameter
is the line joining the points (–4, 3) & (12, –1) is-
53. The centre of the circle passing through the point (0,1)
and touching the curve y = x2 at (2, 4) is : 60. The circle x2 + y2 + 4x – 7y + 12 = 0 cuts an intercept on y-
axis which is equal to
æ 16 27 ö æ 16 53 ö 61. The length of the chord of the circle (x – 3)2 + (y – 5)2 = 80
(a) ç - , ÷ (b) ç - , ÷
è 5 10 ø è 7 10 ø cut off by the line 3x – 4y – 9 = 0 is
62. The value of |c| for which the line y = 2x + c is a tangent to
æ 16 53 ö the circle x2 + y2 = 16, is
(c) ç - , ÷ (d) none of these
è 5 10 ø 63. The square of the length of the tangent from (3, –4) to the
54. For the circle x2 + y2 +4x –7y +12 =0 the following statement circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y + 3 = 0 is
is true- 64. Let A be the centre of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 20 = 0,
(a) the length of tangent from (1, 2) is 7 and B (1,7) and D (4, –2) are points on the circle then, if
tangents be drawn at B and D, which meet at C, then area
(b) Intercept on y-axis is 2
of quadrilateral ABCD is-
(c) intercept on x-axis is 2– 2 65. The area of the triangle formed by the tangents from the
(d) None of these point (4, 3) to the circle x² + y² = 9 and the line joining their
point of contact is :
55. The line joining (5, 0) to (10 cosq, 10 sinq) is divided
internally in the ratio 2 : 3 at P. If q varies then the locus of 66. The angle between the two tangents from the origin to the
P is : circle (x – 7)² + (y + 1)² = 25 equals :

(a) a pair of straight lines (b) a circle 67. The number of common tangents that can be drawn to two
circles x2 + y2 = 6x and x2 + y2 + 6x + 2y + 1 = 0 is
(c) a straight line (d) none of these
68. The number of common tangents to the circles
56. The centres of a set of circles, each of radius 3, lie on the
circle x2 + y2 = 25. The locus of any point in the set is x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 1 = 0 and x2 + y2 – 12x – 16y + 91 = 0 is

(a) 4 £ x2 + y2 £ 64 (b) x2 + y2 £ 25 69. The value of l, for which the circle

(c) x2 + y2 ³ 25 (d) 3 £ x2 + y2 £ 9 x2 + y2 + 2lx + 6y + 1 = 0 inersects the circle

x2 + y2 + 4x + 2y = 0 orthogonally, is
70. The value of k for which the circles x2 + y2 + 5x + 3y + 7 = 0
and x2 + y2 – 8x + 6y + k = 0 intersects orthogonally.
CIRCLES 35

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. The number of common tangents to the circles 8. A line drawn through the point P (4, 7) cuts the circle
x2 + y2 –4x – 6y –12 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 6x + 18y + 26 = 0, is: x2 + y2 = 9 at the points A and B. Then PA.PB is equal to :
(2015) (2017/Online Set–1)
(a) 3 (b) 4
(a) 53 (b) 56
(c) 1 (d) 2
(c) 74 (d) 65
2. Let the tangents drawn to the circle, x2 + y2 = 16 from the
9. If a point P has co-ordinates (0, –2) and Q is any point on the
point P(0, h) meet the x-axis at points A and B. If the area
circle, x2 + y2 – 5x – y + 5 = 0, then the maximum value of
of DAPB is minimum, then h is equal to :
(PQ)2 is : (2017/Online Set–1)
(2015/Online Set–1)

(a) 4 2 (b) 4 3 25 + 6
(a) (b) 14 + 5 3
2
(c) 3 2 (d) 3 3
3. If a circle passing through the point (-1, 0) touches 47 + 10 6
(c) (d) 8 + 5 3
y-axis at (0, 2) then the length of the chord of the circle 2
along the x-axis is : (2015/Online Set–2)
10. If two parallel chords of a circle, having diameter 4 units,
3 lie on the opposite sides of the centre and subtend angles
(a) (b) 3
2 æ1ö
cos -1 ç ÷ and sec–1(7) at the centre respectively, then
è7ø
5
(c) (d) 5 the distance between these chords, is :
2
4. If one of the diameters of the circle, given by the equation, (2017/Online Set–1)
x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y – 12 = 0 is a chord of a circle S, whose centre
4 8
is at (–3, 2), then the radius of S is : (2016) (a) (b)
7 7
(a) 5 3 (b) 5
8 16
(c) 10 (d) 5 2 (c) (d)
7 7
5. A circle passes through (–2, 4) and touches the y-axis at
11. Let the orthocentre and centroid of a triangle be
(0, 2). Which one of the following equations can represent
a diameter of this circle ? (2016/Online Set–1) A (–3,5) and B (3, 3) respectively. If C is the circumcentre
of this triangle, then the radius of the circle having line
(a) 4x + 5y – 6 = 0 (b) 2x – 3y + 10 = 0
segment AC as diameter, is : (2018)
(c) 3x + 4y – 3 = 0 (d) 5x + 2y + 4 = 0
6. Equation of the tangent to the circle, at the point (1, –1), 3 5
(a) (b) 10
whose centre is the point of intersection of the straight lines 2
x – y = 1 and 2x + y = 3 is : (2016/Online Set–2)
(a) 4x + y – 3 = 0 (b) x + 4y + 3 = 0 5
(c) 2 10 (d) 3
(c) 3x – y – 4 = 0 (d) x – 3y – 4 = 0 2
7. The radius of a circle, having minimum area, which touches 12. A circle passes through the points (2, 3) and (4, 5). If its
the curve y = 4 – x2 and the lines, y = |x| is: (2017) centre lies on the line, y – 4 x + 3 = 0, then its radius is
equal to : (2018/Online Set–1)
(a) 2 2 +1 (b) 2 2 -1
(a) 2 (b) 5
(c) 4 2 -1 (d) 4 2 +1
(c) (d) 1
2
CIRCLES 36

13. The tangent to the circle C1 : x2 + y2 – 2x – 1 = 0 at the point 19. A rectangle is inscribed in a circle with a diameter lying
(2, 1) cuts off a chord of length 4 from a circle C2, whose along the line 3 y = x + 7 . If the two adjacent vertices of
centre is (3, -2). The radius of C2 is :
the rectangle are (–8,5) and (6,5) then the area of the
(2018/Online Set–2)
rectangle (in sq. units) is: (9-4-2019/Shift -2)
(a) 2 (b) 2 (a) 84 (b) 98

(c) 3 (d) (c) 72 (d) 56

6
14. If a circle C, whose radius is 3, touches externally the 20. If the circles x 2 + y2 + 5Kx + 2y + K = 0 and
circle, x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 at the point (2, 2), then the
length of the intercept cut by this circle C, on the x-axis is 2 x 2 + y 2 + 2Kx + 3y - l = 0, ( K Î R), intersect at the
equal to : (2018/Online Set–3)
points P and Q, then the line 4 x + 5 y - K = 0 passes
(a) 2 5 (b) 3 2 through P and Q, for: (10-4-2019/Shift -1)
(c) 5 (d) 2 3 (a) infinitely many values of K
15. The sum of the squares of the lengths of the chords (b) no value of K.
intercepted on the circle, x2 +y2= 16, by the lines, (c) exactly two values of K
x + y = n, n ÎN, where N is the set of all natural numbers, (d) exactly one value of K
is : (8-4-2019/Shift -1)
21. The line x = y touches a circle at the point 1,1 . If the
16. The tangent and the normal lines at the point to circle also passes through the point (1, –3), then its radius
the circle x2 + y2 = 4 and the x-axis form a triangle. The area is: (10-4-2019/Shift -1)
of this triangle (in square units) is :
(a) 3 (b) 2 2
(8-4-2019/Shift -2)
(c) 2 (d) 3 2
(a) (b) 22. The locus of the centres of the circles, which touch the
circle, x 2 + y 2 = 1 externally, also touch the y - axis
(c) (d) and lie in the first quadrant, is: (10-4-2019/Shift -2)

(a) (b)
17. If a tangent to the circle intersects the
coordinate axes at distinct points P and Q, then the locus (c) (d)
of the mid-point of PQ is: (9-4-2019/Shift -1)
23. If the angle of intersection at a point where the two circles
(a) with radii 5 cm and 12 cm intersect is 90°, then the length
(in cm) of their common chord is :
(b) (12-4-2019/Shift -1)

(c) 13 120
(a) (b)
3 13
(d)
60 13
18.
2 2
The common tangent to the circles x + y = 4 and (c) (d)
13 2
x 2 + y 2 + 6 x + 8 y - 24 = 0 also passes through the point: 24. A circle touching the X- axis at (3, 0) and making an
(9-4-2019/Shift -2) intercept of length 8 on the Y- axis passes through the
(a) (4, –2) (b) (–6, 4) point: (12-4-2019/Shift -2)

(c) (6, –2) (d) (–4, 6) (a) (3, 10) (b) (3, 5)
(c) (2, 3) (d) (1, 5)
CIRCLES 37
25. Three circles of radii a, b, c (a < b < c) touch each other 31. Two circles with equal radii are intersecting at the points
externally. If they have x- axis as a common tangent, then: (0, 1) and (0, –1). The tangent at the point (0, 1) to one of
(9-1-2019/Shift -1) the circles passes through the centre of the other circle.
Then the distance between the centres of these circles is:
1 1 1 1 1 1 (11-1-2019/Shift -1)
(a) = + (b) = +
a b c b a c
32. A circle cuts a chord of length 4a on the x-axis and passes
through a point on the y-axis, distant 2b from the origin.
(c) a, b, c are in A.P (d) a , b , c are in A.P.
Then the locus of the centre of this circle, is :
26. If the circles x 2 + y 2 - 16 x - 20 y + 164 = r 2 and (11-1-2019/Shift -1)
(a) A hyperbola (b) An ellipse
( x - 4) 2 + ( y - 7) 2 = 36 intersect at two distinct points,
(c) A straight line (d) A parabola
then: (9-1-2019/Shift -1)
33. Let C1 and C2 be the centres of the circles x2 + y -2x - 2y –
(a) r > 11 (b) 0 < r < 1 2 = 0 and x2 + y2- 6x - 6y + 14 = 0 respectively. If P and Q are
(c) r = 11 (d) 1 < r < 11 the points of intersection of these circles then, area (in
27. If a circle C passing through the point (4, 0) touches the sq. units) of the quadrilateral PC1QC2is : ______

circle x 2 + y 2 + 4 x - 6 y = 12 externally at the point (12-1-2019/Shift -1)

(a) 8 (b) 6
1, -1 . then the radius of C is: (10-1-2019/Shift -1)
(c) 9 (d) 4
28. If the area of an equilateral triangle inscribed in the circle,
34. If a circle of radius R passes through the origin O and
is then c is intersects the coordinate axes at A and B, then the locus
equal to: (10-1-2019/Shift -2) of the foot of perpendicular from O on AB is :
(a) 13 (b) 20 (12-1-2019/Shift -2)
(c) –25 (d) 25
(a)
29. A square is inscribed in the circle

x 2 + y 2 - 6 x + 8 y - 103 = 0 with its sides parallel to the (b)

coordinate axes. Then the distance of the vertex of this
square which is nearest to the origin is : (c)
(11-1-2019/Shift -1)

(a) 6 (b) 137 (d)

(c) (d) 13 35. The number of integral values of k for which the line,
41
30. The straight line x + 2y = 1 meets the coordinate axes at A 3x + 4y = k intersects the circle, x 2 + y 2 - 2 x - 4 y + 4 = 0
and B. A circle is drawn through A, B and the origin. Then at two distinct points is …….. (2-9-2020/Shift -1)
the sum of perpendicular distances from A and B on the
tangent to the circle at the origin is :
(11-1-2019/Shift -1)

5
(a) (b) 2 5
2

5
(c) (d) 4 5
4
CIRCLES 38

36. The diameter of the circle , whose centre lies on the line 42. If a line, y = mx + c is a tangent to the circle,
x + y = 2 in the first quadrant and which touches both the
( x - 3) 2 + y 2 = 1 and it is perpendicular to a line L1, where
lines x = 3 and y = 2, is …….. (2-9-2020/Shift -1)
2 2
37. The circle passing through the intersection of the circles, L1 is the tangent to the circle, x + y = 1 at the point
x2 + y2 – 6x = 0 and x2 + y2 – 4y = 0, having its centre on the
æ 1 1 ö
line, 2x – 3y + 12 = 0, also passes through the point: ç , ÷ ; then: (8-1-2020/Shift -2)
è 2 2ø
(4-9-2020/Shift -2)
(a) c 2 + 7c + 6 = 0 (b) c 2 - 6c + 7 = 0
(a) (–1, 3) (b) (1, –3)
(c) (–3, 6) (d) (–3, 1) (c) c 2 - 7c + 6 = 0 (d) c 2 + 6c + 7 = 0
38. Let PQ be a diameter of the circle x2 + y2 = 9. If a and b are 43. A circle touches the y- axis at the point (0,4) and passes
the lengths of the perpendiculars from P and Q on the through the point (2,0). Which of the following lines is
straight line, x + y = 2 respectively, then the maximum not a tangent to the circle? (9-1-2020/Shift -1)
value of ab is _____ (4-9-2020/Shift -2) (a) 4x – 3y + 17 = 0 (b) 3x + 4y – 6 = 0

39. If the length of the chord of the circle, x2 + y2 = r2 (r > 0) (c) 4x + 3y – 8 = 0 (d) 3x – 4y – 24 = 0
along the line, y – 2x = 3 is r, then r2 is equal to: 44. If the curves x 2 - 6 x + y 2 + 8 = 0 and
(5-9-2020/Shift -2)
x 2 - 8 y + y 2 + 16 - k = 0, k > 0 touch each other at a
24 point, then the largest value of k is _________.
(a) 12 (b)
5 (9-1-2020/Shift -2)

45. Let r1 and r2 be the radii of the largest and smallest circles,
9 12
(c) (d)
5 5 respectively, which pass through the point -4,1 and
having their centres on the circumference of the circle
40. The centre of the circle passing through the point (0, 1)
and touching the parabola y = x2 at the point (2, 4) is: r1
x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 4y - 4 = 0. If = a + b 2, then a + b is
(6-9-2020/Shift -2) r2
equal to ? (20-07-2021/Shift-2)
æ 3 16 ö æ 6 53 ö
(a) ç , ÷ (b) ç , ÷ (a) 3 (b) 11
è 10 5 ø è 5 10 ø
(c) 5 (d) 7
46. Let P and Q be two distinct points on a circle which has
æ -16 53 ö æ -53 16 ö
(c) ç , ÷ (d) ç , ÷ center at C 2, 3 and which passes through origin O, If
è 5 10 ø è 10 5 ø
OC is perpendicular to both the line segments CP and CQ,
41. Let the tangents drawn from the origin to the circle,
then the set P, Q is equal to: (27-07-2021/Shift-1)
2 2
x + y - 8x - 4 y + 16 = 0 touch it at the points A and B.
(a) -1, 5 , 5,1
The (AB)2 is equal to : (7-1-2020/Shift -2)

32 64 (b) 2 + 2 2,3 - 5 , 2 - 2 2,3 + 5

(a) (b)
5 5
(c) 2 + 2 2,3 + 5 , 2 - 2 2,3 - 5
52 56
(c) (d)
5 5 (d) 4, 0 , 0, 6
CIRCLES 39

47. Let 51. A circle C touches the line x = 2y at the point (2, 1) and

A = { x, y Î R ´ R | 2x 2 + 2y 2 - 2x - 2y = 1}, intersects the circle C1 : x 2 + y 2 + 2y - 5 = 0 at two point

B = { x, y Î R ´ R | 4x 2 + 4y 2 - 16y + 7 = 0} and P and Q such that PQ is a diameter of C1. Then the diameter
of C is: (26-08-2021/Shift-2)
2 2 2
C = { x, y Î R ´ R | x + y - 4x - 2y + 5 £ r }. 3
(a) 285 (b) 4 15

Then the minimum value of r such that A È B Í C is (c) 15 (d) 7 5

equal to: (27-07-2021/Shift-1)
52. Let the equation x 2 + y 2 + px + 1 – p y + 5 = 0 represent
3 + 10
(a) (b) 1 + 5
2 circles of varying radius r Î 0, 5 . Then the number of

2 + 10 3+ 2 5 elements in the set S = { q : q = p 2 and q is an integer} is

(c) (d)
2 2 _______. (27-08-2021/Shift-1)
53. The locus of a point, which moves such that the sum of
48. Two tangents are drawn from the point P -1,1 to the
squares of its distances from the points 0, 0 , 1, 0 ,
circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x - 6y + 6 = 0 . If these tangents touch
the circle at points A and B, and if D is a point on the circle 0, 1 , 1, 1 is 18 units, is a circle of diameter d. Then
such that length of the segments AB and AD are equal,
d 2 is equal to _____. (26-08-2021/Shift-1)
then the area of the triangle ABD is eqaul to:
(27-07-2021/Shift-1) 54. Two circles each of radius 5 units touch each other at the
point (1,2). If the equation of their common tangent is
(a) 2 (b) 3 2 + 2 4x + 3y = 10, and C1 a, b and C2 g, d ,C1 ¹ C2 are

(c) 4 (d) 3 2 -1 their centres, then a + b g + d is equal to.________.

49. Consider a circle C which touches the y-axis at (0, 6) and (27-08-2021/Shift-2)
cuts off an intercept 6 5 on the x-axis. Then the radius of 55. If the variable line 3x + 4y = a lies between the two circles
the circle C is equal to: (27-07-2021/Shift-2)
2 2 2 2
x -1 + y -1 = 1 and x - 9 + y -1 = 4,
(a) 82 (b) 9
without intercepting a chord on either circle, then the sum
(c) 8 (d) 53 of all the integral values of a is __________ ?

50. Let the circle 36x 2 + 36y 2 - 108x + 120y + C = 0 be such (31-08-2021/Shift-1)

that it neither intersects nor touches the co-ordinate axes. 56. Let the lengths of intercepts on x-axis and y-axis made by

If the point of intersection of the lines, x - 2y = 4 and the circle x 2 + y 2 + ax + 2ay + c = 0, (a < 0) be 2 2 and
2x - y = 5 lies inside the circle S, then :
2 5, respectively. Then the shortest distance from origin
(22-07-2021/Shift-2) to a tangent to this circle which is perpendicular to the line
x + 2y = 0, is equal to : (16-03-2021/Shift-2)
25 13
(a) 100 < C < 156 (b) <C<
9 3 (a) 7 (b) 6
(c) 81 < C < 156 (d) 100 < C < 165 (c) 11 (d) 10
CIRCLES 40

57. Let ABCD be a square of side of unit length. Let a circle 62. Choose the incorrect statement about the two circles whose
C1 centered at A with unit radius is drawn. Another circle equations are given below :

C 2 which touches C1 and the lines AD and AB are tangent

x 2 + y 2 - 10 x - 10 y + 41 = 0 and
to it, is also drawn. Let a tangent line from the point C to
the circle C 2 meet the side AB at E. If the length of EB is x 2 + y 2 - 16 x - 10 y + 80 = 0 (17-03-2021/Shift-1)

a + 3b , where a, b are integers, then a + b is equal to (a) Both circles pass through the centre of each other.
_______. (16-03-2021/Shift-1)
(b) Both circles’ centres lie inside region of one another.
2 2
58. Let the tangent to the circle x + y = 25 at the point R (c) Circles have two intersection points.
(3, 4) meet x-axis and y-axis at points P and Q, respectively. (d) Distance between two centres is the average of radii of
If r is the radius of the circle passing through the origin O both the circles.
and having centre at the incentre of the triangle OPQ, then
63. The minimum distance between any two point P1 and P2
r 2 is equal to : (17-03-2021/Shift-2) while considering point P1 on one circle and point P2 on
625 585 the other circle for the given circles’ equations
(a) (b)
72 66
x 2 + y2 - 10x - 10y + 41 = 0
529 125
(c) (d)
64 72 x 2 + y2 - 24x - 10y + 160 = 0 is ………….. .

59. Two tangents are drawn from a point P to the circle (17-03-2021/Shift-1)
2 2
x + y - 2x - 4y + 4 = 0, such that the angle between
64. Let S1 : x 2 + y2 = 9 and S2 : (x - 2) 2 + y2 = 1. Then the
æ 12 ö æ 12 ö
these tangents is tan -1 ç ÷ , where tan -1 ç ÷ Î (0, p). locus of centre of a variable circle S which touches S1
è 5ø è 5ø
internally and S2 externally always passes through the
If the centre of the circle is denoted by C and these
tangents touch the circle at points A and B, then the ratio points : (18-03-2021/Shift-2)
of the areas of DPAB and DCAB is:
æ1 5ö
(17-03-2021/Shift-2) (a) çç 2 , ± 2 ÷÷ (b) (0, ± 3)
è ø
(a) 11 : 4 (b) 3 : 1
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 9 : 4
æ 3ö
60. The line 2x - y + 1 = 0 is a tangent to the circle at the point (c) ç 2, ± ÷ (d) (1, ± 2)
è 2ø
(2, 5) and the centre of the circle lies on x - 2y = 4. Then,
the radius of the circle is : (17-03-2021/Shift-1) 65. Choose the correct statement about two circles whose
equations are given below :
(a) 3 5 (b) 5 3
x 2 + y 2 - 10x - 10y + 41 = 0
(c) 5 4 (d) 4 5

61. Let B be the centre of the circle x 2 + y 2 - 2x + 4y + 1 = 0. x 2 + y2 - 22x - 10y + 137 = 0 (18-03-2021/Shift-1)

Let the tangents at two points P and Q on the circle (a) circles have same centre
æ area DAPQ ö (b) circles have no meeting point
intersect at the point A(3, 1). Then 8 × ç ÷ is
è area DBPQ ø (c) circles have only one meeting point
equal to ___ (31-08-2021/Shift-2) (d) circles have two meeting points
CIRCLES 41

66. For the four circles M, N, O and P, following four equations 68. If the area of the triangle formed by the positive x-axis, the
2 2
are given : normal and the tangent to the circle (x – 2) + (y – 3) = 25
at the point (5, 7) is A, then 24A is equal to
2 2
Circle M : x  y  1
(24-02-2021/Shift-2)
2 2 69. If one of the diameters of the circle
Circle N : x  y  2x  0
x 2  y 2  2x  6y  6  0 is a chord of another circle ‘C’.
2 2
Circle O : x  y  2x  2y  1  0 whose center is at (2, 1), then its radius is_______.
(24-02-2021/Shift-1)
Circle P : x 2  y 2  2y  0

If the centre of circle M is joined with centre of the circle 70. Let A 1, 4  and B 1,  5  be two points. Let P be a point
N, further centre of circle N is joined with centre of the
circle O, centre of circle O is joined with the centre of circle on the circle  x  12   y  12  1 such that
P and lastly, centre of circle P is joined with centre of circle
M, then these lines form the sides of a :  PA 2   PB2 have maximum value, then the points, P,,

(18-03-2021/Shift-1) A and B lie on: (26-02-2021/Shift-2)

(a) Rhombus (b) Rectangle (a) an ellipse (b) a hyperbola
(c) Parallelogram (d) Square (c) a straight line (d) a parabola
67. Let a point P be such that its distance from the point (5, 0)
is thrice the distance of P from the point (-5, 0). If the locus
2
of the point P is a circle of radius r, then 4r is equal to
_____. (24-02-2021/Shift-2)
CIRCLES 42

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 8. The equation of the circle passing through (1, 1) and
the points of intersection of x2 + y2 + 13 x – 3y = 0 and
1. A circle and a square have the same perimeter. Then 2x2 + 2y2 + 4x – 7y – 25 = 0 is :
(a) their areas are equal (a) 4x2 + 4y2 – 30x – 10 y = 25
(b) the area of the circle is large (b) 4x2 + 4y2 + 30x – 13 y – 25 = 0
(c) the area of the square is larger (c) 4x2 + 4y2 – 17x – 10 y + 25 = 0
(d) the area of the circle is p times the area of the square (d) none of these
2. The abscissa of two points A and B are the roots of the 9. If the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 2ky + 6 = 0 and
equation x2 + 2ax – b2 = 0 and their ordinates are the roots x2 + y2 + 2ky + k = 0 intersect orthogonally, then k is :
of the equation y2 + 2 py – q2 = 0. The radius of the circle
(a) 2 or –3/2 (b) –2 or –3/2
with AB as a diameter will be-
(c) 2 or 3/2 (d) –2 or 3/2
(a) 2 2 2 2
(b) 2 2
a +b + p +q b +q 10. A rhombus is inscribed in the region common to the two
circles x2 + y2 – 4x – 12 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 4x – 12 = 0 with two
of its vertices on the line joining the centres of the circles.
(c) a 2 + b2 - p2 - q2 (d) a 2 + p2
The area of the rhombus is :
3. The circle described on the line joining the points (0, 1),
(a, b) as diameter cuts the x-axis in points whose abscissae (a) 8 3 sq. units (b) 4 3 sq. units
are roots of the equation :
(c) 16 3 sq. units (d) none of these
(a) x2 + ax + b = 0 (b) x2 – ax + b = 0
(c) x2 + ax – b = 0 (d) x2 – ax – b = 0 11. AB is a diameter of a circle and C is any point on the
circumference of the circle. Then :
4. If the squares of the lengths of the tangents from a point P
to the circles x2 + y2 = a2, x2 + y2 = b2 and x2 + y2 = c2 are in (a) the area of D ABC is maximum when it is isosceles
A.P., then (b) the area of D ABC is minimum when it is isosceles
(a) a, b, c are in GP (b) a, b, c are in AP (c) the perimeter of D ABC is minimum when it is isosceles
2 2 2 2 2 2
(c) a , b , c are in AP (d) a , b , c are in GP (d) none of these
5. The length of the tangent drawn from any point on the 12. Let x and y be the real numbers satisfying the equation
circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + p = 0 to the circle x² – 4x +y² +3 =0. If the maximum and minimum values of
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + q = 0 is : x² + y² are M & m respectively, then the numerical value of
M – m is :
(a) q-p (b) p-q
(a) 221 (b) 8
(c) 15 (d) none of these
(c) q+p (d) none of these
13. From the point A(0, 3) on the circle x² + 4x + (y – 3)² = 0, a
6. The number of common tangents to the circles x2 +y2= 4 chord AB is drawn & extended to a point M such that
and x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y = 24 is : AM = 2AB. The equation of the locus of M is :
(a) 0 (b) 1 (a) x² + 8x + y² = 0 (b) x² + 8x + (y – 3)² = 0
(c) 3 (d) 4 (c) (x – 3)² + 8x + y² = 0 (d) x² + 8x + 8y² = 0
7. Two circles x2 + y2 =
6 and x2 + y2 –
6x + 8 = 0 are given. 14. The circle x² + y² – 6x – 10y + c = 0 does not intersect or
Then the equation of the circle through their points of touch either axis & the point (1, 4) is inside the circle. Then
intersection and the point (1, 1) is : the range of possible values of c is given by :
(a) x2 + y2 – 6x + 4 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 3x + 1 = 0 (a) c > 9 (b) c > 25
(c) x2 + y2 – 4y + 2 = 0 (d) none of these (c) c > 29 (d) 25 < c < 29
CIRCLES 43

15. Two thin rods AB & CD of lengths 2a & 2b move along OX 21. If the radius of the circumcircle of the triangle TPQ, where
& OY respectively, when 'O' is the origin. The equation of PQ is chord of contact corresponding to point T with
respect to circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 11 = 0, is 6 units, then
the locus of the centre of the circle passing through the
minimum distance of T from the director circle of the given
extremities of the two rods is :
circle is :
(a) x2 + y2 = a2 + b2 (b) x2 – y2 = a2 – b2 (a) 6 (b) 12
(c) x2 + y2 = a2 – b2 (d) x2 – y2 = a2 + b2
(c) 6 2 (d) 12 - 4 2
16. If a chord of the circle x2 + y2 = 8 makes equal intercepts of
22. From a point R(5, 8) two tangents RP and RQ are drawn to
length a on the coordinate axes, then-
a given circle S = 0 whose radius is 5. If circumcentre of the
triangle PQR is (2, 3), then the equation of circle
(a) |a| < 8 (b) |a| < 4 2
S = 0 is
(c) |a| < 4 (d) |a| > 4 (a) x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – 20 = 0
17. The equation of a circle which touches x-axis and the line (b) x2 + y2 + x + 2y – 10 = 0
4x –3y +4 =0, its centre lying in the third quadrant and lies (c) x2 + y2 – x – 2y – 20 = 0
on the line x –y –1 =0, is- (d) x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 12 = 0
(a) 9 (x2 +y2) + 6x + 24y + 1 =0 23. If tangent at (1, 2) to the circle c1 : x2 + y2 = 5 intersects the
(b) 9 (x2 +y2) – 6x – 24y + 1 =0 circle c 2 : x 2 + y 2 = 9 at A and B and tangents at
A and B to the second circle meet at point C, then the
(c) 9 (x2 +y2) – 6x + 2y + 1 =0 co-ordinates of C are :
(d) None of these
æ 9 18 ö
18. The value of 'c' for which the set, (a) (4, 5) (b) ç , ÷
è 15 5 ø
{(x, y) | x²+y² +2x < 1} Ç {(x, y)| x–y + c > 0} contains only
one point in common is : æ 9 18 ö
(c) (4, – 5) (d) ç , ÷
(a) (–¥, –1) È [3, ¥) (b) {–1, 3} è5 5 ø
(c) {–3} (d) {–1} 24. If the tangents are drawn from any point on the line
x + y = 3 to the circle x2 + y2 = 9, then the chord of contact
19. A line meets the co-ordinate axes in A & B. A circle is
passes through the point
circumscribed about the triangle OAB. If d1 and d2 are the
(a) (3, 5) (b) (3, 3)
distances of the tangent to the circle at the origin O from
the points A and B respectively, the diameter of the circle (c) (5, 3) (d) none of these
is: 25. If the straight line ax + by = 2, b ¹ 0, touches the circle
x2 + y2 – 2x = 3 and is normal to the circle x2 + y2 – 4y = 6, then
2d1 + d 2 d1 + 2d 2 the values of a and b can be
(a) (b)
2 2 (a) a = 1, b = 2 (b) a = 1, b = –1
(c) a = –4/3, b = 1 (d) None of these
d1d 2 26. The equation of the circle whose radius is 3 and which
(c) d1 + d2 (d) d + d
1 2 touches the circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 12 = 0 internally at the
point (–1, –1) is-
20. If C1 : x2 + y2 = (3 + 2 2 )2 be a circle and PA and PB are pair 2 2
æ 4ö æ 7ö 2
of tangents on C1 where P is any point on the director (a) ç x - ÷ + ç y + ÷ = 3
è 5ø è 5ø
circle of C1, then the radius of smallest circle which touch
C1 externally and also the two tangents PA and PB is 2 2
æ 4ö æ 7ö 2
(b) ç x - ÷ + ç y - ÷ = 3
(a) 2 2 –3 (b) 2 2 –1 è 5ø è 5ø

(c) (x–8)2 + (y–1)2 = 32

(c) 2 2 +1 (d) 1
(d) None of these
CIRCLES 44
27. If the two circles, x2 + y2 + 2g1x + 2f1y = 0 and 34. If a circle passes through the point (a, b) & cuts the circle
x2 + y2 = K2 orthogonally, then the equation of the locus of
x2 + y2 + 2g2x + 2f2y = 0 touch each other then
its centre is :
(a) f1g1 = f2g2 (b) f1 f 2 (a) 2ax + 2by – (a2 + b2 + K2) = 0
=
g1 g 2 (b) 2ax + 2by – (a2 – b2 + K2) = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 3ax – 4by + (a2 + b2 – K2) = 0
(c) f1f2 = g1g2 (d) none of these
(d) x2 + y2 – 2ax – 3by + (a2 – b2 – K2) = 0
28. If r1 and r2 be the radius of smallest and largest circle which
35. The circumference of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 8y – q = 0 is
passes through (5, 6) and touches the circle
bisected by the circle x2 + y2 + 4x + 12y + p = 0, then
(x – 2)2 + y2 = 4, then r1r2 is p + q is equal to :

4 41 (a) 25 (b) 100

(a) (b)
41 4 (c) 10 (d) 48
36. The distance from the centre of the circle x² + y² = 2x to the
5 41 straight line passing through the points of intersection of
(c) (d) the two circle ;
41 6
x² + y² + 5x – 8y + 1 = 0, x² + y² – 3x + 7y – 25 = 0 is
29. The centre of the smallest circle touching the circles
(a) 1 (b) 2
x2 + y2 – 2y – 3 = 0 and x2 + y2 – 8x – 18y + 93 = 0 is :
(c) 3 (d) none of these
(a) (3, 2) (b) (4, 4)
37. The value of 'a' for which the common chord of the circles
(c) (2, 7) (d) (2, 5) C1 : x2 + y2 = 8 and C2 : (x – a)2 + y2 = 8 subtends a right angle
30. The angle of intersection of the two circles at the origin are :
x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y = 0 and x2 + y2 = 4, is– (a) ± 2 (b) ± 2
(a) 30° (b) 60° (c) ± 4 (d) none of these
(c) 90° (d) 45° 38. The length of the common chord of the circles
31. A circle touches a straight line lx + my + n = 0 & cuts the (x – a)2 + y2 = c2 and x2 + (y – b)2 = c2 is-
circle x2 + y2 = 9 orthogonally. The locus of centres of such
(a) c2 + a 2 + b2 (b) 4c 2 + a 2 + b 2
circle is :
(a) (lx + my + n)2 = (l 2 + m2) (x2 + y2 – 9) (c) 4c 2 - a 2 - b 2 (d) c2 - a 2 - b2
2 2 2 2 2
(b) (lx + my – n) = (l + m ) (x + y – 9)
39. A variable circle having fixed radius ‘a’ passes through origin
(c) (lx + my + n)2 = (l 2 + m2) (x2 + y2 + 9) and meets the coordinate axes in point A and B. Locus of
(d) none of these centroid of triangle OAB, ‘O’ being the origin, is

32. Minimum radius of circle which is orthogonal with both (a) 9(x2 + y2) = 4a2 (b) 9(x2 + y2) = a2
(c) 9(x2 + y2) = 2a2 (d) 9(x2 + y2) = 8a2
the circle x2 + y2 –12x + 35 =0 and x2 + y2 + 4x +3 =0 is
40. The triangle PQR is inscribed in the circle x2 + y2 = 25. If Q
(a) 4 (b) 3
and R have coordinates (3, 4) and (–4, 3) respectively,
(c) 15 (d) 1 then ÐQPR is equal to :
(a) p/2 (b) p/3
33. If a circle passes through the point (1, 2) and cuts the circle
(c) p/4 (d) p/6
x2 + y2 = 4 orthogonally, then the locus of its centre is-
41. Let AB be a chord of the circle x2 + y2 = r2 subtending a
(a) x2 + y2 – 2x – 6y – 7 = 0
right angle at the centre. Then the locus of the centroid of
(b) x2 + y2 – 3x – 8y + 1 = 0 the triangle PAB as P moves on the circle is :
(c) 2x + 4y – 9 = 0 (a) a parabola (b) a circle
(d) 2x + 4y – 1 = 0 (c) an ellipse (d) a pair of straight lines.
CIRCLES 45

42. The equation of the circle which is touched by y = x, has its Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]
centre on the positive x-axis & cuts off a chord of length 2
47. If the area of the quadrilateral formed by the tangents from
units along the line 3 y – x = 0 is- the origin to the circle x2 + y2 + 6x – 10y + C = 0 and the radii
corresponding to the points of contact is 15, then a value
(a) x2 + y2 – 4x + 2 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 8x + 8 = 0 of C is
(c) x2 + y2 – 4x + 1 = 0 (d) x2 + y2 – 4y + 2 = 0 (a) 9 (b) 4
2 2
43. Equation of chord of the circle x + y – 3x – 4y – 4 = 0 (c) 5 (d) 25
which passes through the origin such that origin divides 48. Coordinates of the centre of a circle, whose radius is 2 unit
it in the ratio 4 : 1, is and which touches the line pair x2 – y2 – 2x + 1 = 0, are
(a) x = 0 (b) 24x + 7y = 0
(a) (4, 0) (b) 1+ 2 2 ,0
(c) 7x + 24y = 0 (d) 7x – 24y = 0
44. If the circle C1 : x2 + y2 = 16 intersects another circle C2 of (c) (4, 1) (d) 1, 2 2
radius 5 in such a manner that the common chord is of
49. Let x, y be real variable satisfying the
maximum length and has a slope equal to 3/4, then the co-
x2 + y2 + 8x – 10y – 40 = 0. Let a = max
ordinates of the centre of C2 are :

( x + 22 ) + ( y - 3) 2 and b = min ( x + 22 ) + ( y - 3) 2 ,
æ 9 12 ö æ 9 12 ö
(a) ç ± ,± ÷ (b) ç ± ,m ÷
è 5 5ø è 5 5ø then

(a) a + b = 18 (b) a + b = 4 2
æ 12 9 ö æ 12 9 ö
(c) ç ± ,± ÷ (d) ç ± ,m ÷
è 5 5ø è 5 5ø
(c) a – b = 4 2 (d) a . b = 73
45. On the line segment joining (1, 0) and (3, 0) an equilateral 50. The equation of the chords of length 5 and passing through
triangle is drawn having its vertex in the fourth quadrant, the point (3, 4) on the circle 4x2 + 4y2 – 24x – 7y = 0 are
then radical centre of the circle described on its sides as (a) 4x + 3y = 0 (b) 4x – 3y = 0
diameter is (c) 4x + 3y – 24 = 0 (d) 4x + 3y – 12 = 0

æ 1 ö æ 7 ö÷
(a) çç 3,- ÷÷ (b) 3,- 3 51. A circle passes through the point ç 3, and touches
è 3ø ç 2 ÷ø
è
the line pair x2 – y2 – 2x + 1 = 0. The co-ordinates of the
æ 1 ö centre of the circle are :
(c) çç 2,- ÷÷ (d) 2,- 3
è 3ø (a) (4, 0) (b) (5, 0)
(c) (6, 0) (d) (0, 4)
46. Let PQ and RS be tangents at the extremities of the diameter
PR of a circle of radius r. If PS and RQ intersect at a point 52. Point M moved on the circle (x – 4)2 + (y – 8)2 = 20. Then it
X on the circumference of the circle, then 2r equals. broke away from it and moving along a tangent to the
circle, cuts the x–axis at the point (–2, 0). The
PQ + RS co–ordinates of a point on the circle at which the moving
(a) PQ.RS (b) point broke away is
2

æ 3 46 ö æ 2 44 ö
2PQ × RS 2
PQ + RS 2 (a) ç - , ÷ (b) ç - , ÷
(c) (d) è 5 5 ø è 5 5 ø
PQ + RS 2
(c) (6, 4) (d) (3, 5)
CIRCLES 46

53. Consider the circle x2 + y2 – 10x – 6y + 30 = 0. Let O be the 56. A straight line through the vertex P of a triangle PQR,
intersects the side QR at the point S and the circum-circle
centre of the circle and tangent at A(7, 3) and B(5, 1) meet
of the triangle PQR at the point T. If S is not the circumcentre
at C. Let S = 0 represents family of circles passing through
of the triangle, then
A and B, then
1 1 2
(a) area of quadrilateral OACB = 4 (a)  
PS ST QS  SR
(b) the radical axis for the family of circles S=0 is x+y=10

(c) the smallest possible circle of the family S = 0 is 1 1 2

(b)  
2 2
x + y – 12x – 4y + 38 = 0 PS ST QS  SR

(d) the coordinates of point C are (7, 1)

1 1 4
54. Two circles passing through A(1, 2) and B(2, 1) touch the (c)  
PS ST QR
lines 4x + 8y – 7 = 0 at C and D such that ACED is
parallelogram, then 1 1 4
(d)  
PS ST QR
(a) mid point of AE must lie on CD.

(b) mid point of AE must lie on AC. Numerical Value Type Questions

57. The circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 4y + 4 = 0 is inscribed in a triangle

 13 
(c) E must be the point  ,  4  which has two of its sides along the coordinate axes. The
 2 
locus of the circumcentre of the triangle is
x + y – xy + k (x2 + y2)1/2 = 0, then the value of k must be
15 9
(d) E must be the point  ,   58. If the minimum radius of the circle which contains the
 2 2
three circles x2 + y2 – 4y – 5 = 0, x2 + y2 + 12x + 4y + 31 = 0

55. If the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 is inscribed in a triangle  5 

and x2 + y2 + 6x + 12y + 36 = 0 is  3   , then the
whose two sides are axes and one side has negative slope  36 
cutting intercepts a and b on x and y axis, then value of  must be
59. The line Ax + By + C = 0 cuts the circle
1 1 1 1 x2 + y2 + ax + by + c = 0 in P and Q. The lines
(a)  1   2  2
a b a b
A’x + B’y + C’ = 0 cuts the circle x2 + y2 + a’x + b’y + c’=0 in
R and S. If P, Q, R, S are concyclic, then the value of
1 1
(b)   1 is negative
a b a  a b  b c  c 
A B C is
A B C
1 1
(c)  1
a b
60. Circle with radii 3, 4 and 5 touch each other externally. If P
is the point of intersection of tangent to these circles at
their point of contact. And the distance of P from point of
1 1 1 1
(d)  1   2  2 contact is d. Then [d] is (where [ ] is greatest integer
a b a b
function).
CIRCLES 47

Assertion & Reason 65. Assertion : Let S1 : x2 + y2 – 10x – 12y – 39 = 0

S2 : x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 1 = 0
(A) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is a S3 : 2x2 + 2y2 – 20x – 24y + 78 = 0
correct explanation for ASSERTION.
The radical centre of these circles taken pairwise is (–2, –3)
(B) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is not Reason : Point of intersection of three radical axis of three
a correct explanation for ASSERTION. circles taken in pairs is known as radical centre
(C) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is false. (a) A (b) B

(D) If ASSERTION is false, REASON is true. (c) C (d) D

Match the Following
61. Assertion : for two non–intersecting circles, direct
common tangents subtends a right angle at either of point Each question has two columns. Four options are given
of intersection of circles with line segment joining the representing matching of elements from Column-I and
centres of circles. Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option
Reason : If distance between the centres is more than sum corresponding to the correct matching.
of radii, then circles are non–intersecting
66. Match the items of Column I with those of Column II.
(a) A (b) B
Column I Column II
(c) C (d) D (A) Eq uations of the circle 2 2
(P) x + y – 9x –9y + 36 = 0
62. Assertion : Number of common tangents of circumscribing the rectangle
whose sides are x – 3y – 4 = 0,
x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 95 =0 and x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y + 16 =0 is zero.
3x + y – 22 = 0, x – 3y – 14 = 0
Reason : If C1 C2 < |r1 – r2|, then there will be no common
and 3x + y – 62 = 0 is
tangent. (where C1, C2 are the centre and r1, r2 are radii of
circles) (B) Two vertices of an equilateral (Q) 3 (x 2  y2 )  2y  3  0

(a) A (b) B triangle are (–1, 0) and (1, 0)

(c) C (d) D and its third vertex lies above

the x-axis. The equation of its
63. Assertion : The equations of the straight lines joining
circumcircle is
origin to the points of intersection of
(C) The equation of a circle (R) x2 + y2 – 9 = 0
x2 + y2 – 4x – 2y = 4 and x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 is
with origin at centre and
(y – x)2 = 0
passing through the vertices
Reason : y + x = 0 is a common chord of of an equilateral triangle
2 2 2 2
x + y – 4x – 2y = 4 and x + y – 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 whose median is of length
(a) A (b) B 6 units is

(c) C (d) D (D) The vertices of a triangle (S) x2 + y2 – 27x – 3y + 142 = 0

are (6, 0), (0, 6) and (7, 7).
64. Assertion : Two orthogonal circles intersect to generate a
The equation of the incircle
common chord which subtends complimentary angles at
their circumferences. of the triangle is
(T) x2 + y2 – 16 = 0
Reason : Two orthogonal circles intersect to generate a
The correct matching is :
common chord which subtends supplementary angles at
(a) (A–S; B–Q; C–T; D–P)
their centres
(b) (A–Q; B–S; C–T; D–P)
(a) A (b) B
(c) (A–S; B–Q; C–P; D–T)
(c) C (d) D
(d) (A–T; B–Q; C–S; D–P)
CIRCLES 48

67. Column–I Column–II (C) Number of distinct chords of the (R) 32

(A) If ax + by – 5 = 0 is the equation (P) 6
circle 2x ( x - 2 ) + y(2y – 1) = 0;
of the chord of the circle
chords are passing through the
(x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 4, which passes
through (2, 3) and at the greatest æ 1ö
point ç 2 , ÷ and are bisected
distance from the centre of the è 2ø
circle, then |a + b| is equal to on x–axis is
(B) Let O be the origin and P be a (Q) 3 (D) one of the diameters of the circle (S) 36
variable point on the circle circumscribing the rectangle
x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y = 0. If the ABCD is 4y = x + 7. If A and B are
locus of mid–point of OP is the points (–3, 4) and (5, 4) resp-
2 2
x + y + 2gx + 2fy = 0, then the ectively, then the area of the re-
value of (g + f) is equal to ctangle is.
(C) The x–coordinates of the centre (R) 2 The correct matching is :
of the smallest circle which cuts (a) (A – R; B – P; C – S; D –Q)
the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 (b) (A – Q; B – S; C – P; D –R)
and x2 + y2 – 10x + 12y + 52 = 0 (c) (A – P; B – S; C – Q; D –R)
orthogonally, is (d) (A – S; B – Q; C – P; D –R)
(D) If q be the angle between two (S) 1
Using the following passage, solve Q.69 to Q.71
tangents which are drawn to the
Passage – 1
circle x2 + y2 – 6 3 x – 6y + 27
P is a variable point on the line L = 0. Tangents are drawn to
= 0 from the origin, then 2 3 the circle x2 + y2 = 4 from P to touch it at Q and R. The
parallelogram PQSR is completed
tan q equals to
69. If L º 2x + y – 6 = 0, then the locus of circumcentre of DPQR
The correct matching is :
is
(a) (A – R; B – S; C – Q; D – P)
(a) 2x – y = 4 (b) 2x + y = 3
(b) (A – S; B – R; C – Q; D – P)
(c) x – 2y = 4 (d) x + 2y = 3
(c) (A – R; B – S; C – P; D – Q)
70. If P º (6, 8), then the area of DQRS is
(d) (A – P; B – S; C – Q; D – R)
68. Column–I Column–II 6 3/ 2 24 3 / 2
(a) sq. units (b) sq. units
(A) The length of the common chord (P) 1 25 25
of two circles of radii 3 and 4 units
48 6 192 6
which intersect orthogonally is (c) sq. units (d) sq. units
25 25
k/5, then k equals to
71. If P º (3, 4), then coordinate of S is
(B) The circumference of the circle (Q) 24
x 2 + y2 + 4x + 12y + p = 0 is æ 46 63 ö æ 51 68 ö
(a) ç - ,- ÷ (b) ç - ,- ÷
2 2
bisected by the circle x + y – 2x è 25 25 ø è 25 25 ø
+ 8y – q = 0,
æ 46 68 ö æ 68 51 ö
then p + q is equal to : (c) ç - ,- ÷ (d) ç - ,- ÷
è 25 25 ø è 25 25 ø
CIRCLES 49

Using the following passage, solve Q.72 to Q.74 74. The equation of the radical axis of the system of coaxial
circles x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2by + c+ 2l(ax – by + 1) = 0 is
Passage – 2
(a) ax – by + 1 = 0 (b) bx + ay – 1 = 0
A system of circles is said to be coaxial when every pair of the (c) 2(ax + by) + 1 = 0 (d) 2(bx – ay) + 1 = 0
circles has the same radical axis. It follows from this definition
Text
that :
1. The centres of all circles of a coaxial system lie on one 75. A circle passes through three points A, B and C with the
straight line, which is perpendicular to the common radical line segment AC as its diameter. A line passing through A
axis. intersects the chord BC at a point D inside the circle. If
2. Circles passing through two fixed points form a coaxial angles DAB and CAB are a and b respectively and the
system for which the line joining the fixed points is the distance between the point A and the mid point of the line
common radical axis. segment DC is d, prove that the area of the circle is

3. The equation to a coaxial system, of which two members pd 2 cos 2 a

are S1 = 0 and S2 = 0, is S1 + lS2 = 0, l is parameter. If we 2 2
cos a + cos b + 2 cos a cos b cos (b - a)
choose the line of centres as x–axis and the common radical
axis as y–axis, then the simplest form of equation of coaxial 76. C1 and C2 are two concentric circles, the radius of C2 being
circles is x2 + y2 + 2gx + c = 0 ...(1) twice that of C1. From a point P on C2, tangents PA and PB
where c is fixed and g is arbitrary. are drawn to C1. Prove that the centroid of the triangle
PAB lies on C1.
If g = ± c , then the radius g 2 - c vanishes and the circles 77. Show that the line 3x – 4y = 1 touches the circle
x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 1 = 0. Find the co-ordinates of the point
become point circles. The points (± c , 0) are called the limiting of contact.
points of the system of coaxial circles given by (1). 78. Let T1, T2 and be two tangents drawn from (–2, 0) onto the
72. The equation of the circle which belongs to the coaxial circle C : x2 + y2 = 1. Determine the circles touching C and
system of circles for which the limiting points are having T1, T2 as their pair of tangents. Further, find the
(1, –1), (2, 0) and which passes through the origin is equations of all possible common tangents to these circles
(a) x2 + y2 – 4x = 0 (b) x2 + y2 + 4x = 0 when taken two at a time.

(c) x2 + y2 – 4y = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + 4y = 0 79. Consider a curve ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 1 and a point P not on
the curve. A line drawn from the point P intersect the curve
73. If origin be a limiting point of a coaxial system one of
at points Q and R. If the product PQ . PR is independent of
whose member is x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2by + c = 0, then the other
the slope of the line, then show that the curve is a circle.
limiting point is
80. Let C be any circle with centre (0, 2) . Prove that at the
æ ca cb ö æ ca cb ö
(a) çç 2 2
,- 2 ÷
÷ (b) çç 2 , 2 ÷
÷ most two rational points can be there on C.
è a + b a + b2 ø è a + b 2
a + b2 ø
(A rational point is a point both of whose coordinates are
rational numbers.)
æ ab ca ö æ cb ca ö
(c) çç 2 2
, 2 2
÷
÷ (d) çç - 2 2
, 2 ÷
2 ÷
è a +b a +b ø è a +b a +b ø
CIRCLES 50

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 7. Tangents drawn from the point P (1, 8) to the circle
x2 + y2 – 6x – 4y – 11 = 0 touch the circle at the points A and
1. If the tangent at the point P on the circle x2+y2+6x+6y = 2
meets the straight line 5x – 2y + 6 = 0 at a point Q on the B. The equation of the circumcircle of the triangle PAB is
y-axis, then the length of PQ is : (2002) (2009)

(a) 4 (b) 2 5 (a) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y + 19 = 0

(b) x2 + y2 – 4x – 10y + 19 = 0
(c) 5 (d) 3 5
(c) x2 + y2 – 2x + 6y – 29 = 0
2. The centre of circle inscribed in square formed by the lines
x2 – 8x + 12 = 0 and y2 – 14y + 45 = 0, is : (2003) (d) x2 + y2 – 6x – 4y + 19 = 0
(a) (4, 7) (b) (7, 4) 8. The locus of the mid-point of the chord of contact of
(c) (9, 4) (d) (4, 9) tangents drawn from points lying on the straight line
3. If one of the diameters of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x –6y +6 =0 is 4x – 5y = 20 to the circle x2 + y2 = 9 is (2012)
a chord to the circle with centre (2, 1), then the radius of
(a) 20 (x2 + y2) – 36x + 45 y = 0
the circle is : (2004)
(b) 20 (x2 + y2) + 36x – 45 y = 0
(a) 3 (b) 2
(c) 36 (x2 + y2) – 20x + 45 y = 0
(c) 3 (d) 2
4. The locus of the centre of circle which touches (y –1)2 +x2 = 1 (d) 36 (x2 + y2) + 20x – 45 y = 0
externally and also touches x axis is : (2005) 9. A line y = mx + 1 intersect the circle (x – 3)2 + (y + 2)2 = 25
(a) x2 = 4 y  (0, y), y < 0 at points P and Q. If the midpoint of the line segment PQ
(b) x2 = y
3
(c) y = 4x2 has x-coordinate  then which one of the following
5
(d) y2 = 4 x  (0, y), y  R
5. Let ABCD be a quadrilateral with area 18, with side AB options is correct. (2019)
parallel to the side CD and AB = 2CD . Let AD be (a) 6  m  8 (b) 2  m  4
perpendicular to AB and CD. If a circle is drawn inside the
quadrilateral ABCD touching all the sides, then its radius (c) 4  m  6 (d) 3  m  1
is : (2007)
10. Consider a triangle  whose two sides lie on the x-axis
(a) 3 (b) 2
and the line x + y + 1 = 0. If the orthocentre of  is (1, 1),
3
(c) (d) 1 then the equation of the circle passing through the vertices
2
of the triangle  is (2021)
6. Consider the two curves
2 2
C1 : y2 = 4x (a) x  y  3x  y  0
C2 : x2 + y2 – 6x + 1 = 0, then (2008)
2 2
(a) C1 and C2 touch each other only at one point (b) x  y  x  3y  0
(b) C1 and C2 touch each other exactly at two points
2 2
(c) C1 and C2 intersect (but do not touch) at exactly two (c) x  y  2y  1  0
points
2 2
(d) C1 and C2 neither intersect nor touch each other (d) x  y  x  y  0
CIRCLES 51

Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option] Numerical Value Type Questions

11. Circle(s) touching x-axis at a distance 3 from the origin and 15. The centres of two circles C1 and C2 each of unit radius
are at a distance of 6 unit from each other. Let P be the mid
having an intercept of length 2 7 on y-axis is (are) point of the line segment joining the centres of C1 and C2
and C be a circle touching circles C1 and C2 externally. If a
(2013)
common tangents to C1 and C passing through P is also a
(a) x2 + y2 – 6x + 8y + 9 = 0 common tangent to C2 and C, then the radius of the circle
C is ...... (2009)
(b) x2 + y2 – 6x + 7y + 9 = 0
16. For how many values of P, the circle
(c) x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y + 9 = 0
x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – P = 0 and the coordinate axes have
(d) x2 + y2 – 6x – 7y + 9 = 0 exactly three common points ? (2017)
12. A circle S passes through the point (0, 1) and is orthogonal 17. Let the point B be the reflection of the point A(2,3) with
2 2 2 2
to the circles (x – 1) + y = 16 and x + y = 1. Then respect to the line 8x – 6y – 23 = 0. Let G A and G B be
(2014) circles of radii 2 and 1 with centres A and B respectively.
(a) radius of S is 8 Let T be a common tangent to the circles G A and G B
such that both the circles are on the same side of T. If C is
(b) radius of S is 7
the point of intersection of T and the line passing through
(c) centre of S is (–7, 1) A and B, then the length of the line segment AC is…..
(d) centre of S is (–8, 1) (2019)
13. The circle C1 : x2 + y2 = 3, with centre at O, intersects the 18. Let O be the centre of the circle x2 + y 2 = r 2 , where
2
parabola x = 2y at the point P in the first quadrant. Let the
tangent to the circle C1 at P touches other two circles C2 Suppose PQ is a chord of this circle and the
and C3 at R2 and R3, respectively. Suppose C2 and C3 have
equation of the line passing through P and Q is
equal radii 2 3 and centres Q2 and Q3, respectively. If Q2
2 x + 4 y = 5. If the centre of the circumcircle of the triangle
and Q3 lie on the y-axis, then. (2016)
OPQ lies on the line x + 2 y = 4, then the value of r is
(a) Q2Q3 = 12 _____. (2020)
(b) R2R3 = 4 6 Assertion & Reason
(c) area of the triangle OR2R3 is 6 2 (A) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is a
correct explanation for ASSERTION.
(d) area of the triangle PQ2Q3 is 4 2
(B) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is not
14. Let RS be the diameter of the circle x2 + y2 = 1, where S is a correct explanation for ASSERTION.
the point (1, 0). Let P be a variable point (other than R and (C) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is false.
S) on the circle and tangents to the circle at S and P meet (D) If ASSERTION is false, REASON is true.
at the point Q. The normal to the circle at P intersects a
19. Assertion : Tangents are drawn from the point (17, 7) to
line drawn through Q parallel to RS at point E. Then the
the circle x 2 + y2 = 169. The tangents are mutually
locus of E passes through the point(s) (2016) perpendicular.
Reason : The locus of the points from which mutually
æ1 1 ö æ 1 1ö
(a) çè , ÷ (b) çè , ÷ø perpendicular tangents can be drawn to the given circle is
3 3ø 4 2
x2 + y2 = 338. (2007)
(a) A (b) B
æ1 1 ö æ1 1ö
(c) çè 3 , - ÷ (d) çè 4 , - 2 ÷ø (c) C (d) D
3ø
CIRCLES 52

20. Consider 22. Let the circle C1: x2 + y2 = 9 and C2: (x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 16
L1 : 2x + 3y + p – 3 = 0 intersect at the points X and Y. Suppose that another
L2 : 2x + 3y + p + 3 = 0 circle C3: (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2 satisfies the following

where p is a real number and conditions.

C : x2 + y2 – 6x + 10y + 30 = 0 (i) centre of C 3 is collinear with the centres of C 1& C 2,

Assertion : If line L1 is a chord of circle C, then line L2 is (ii) C1& C2 both lie inside C3 and
not always a diameter of circle C. and
(iii) C3 touches C1 at M and C2 at N
Reason : If line L1 is a diameter of circle C, then line L2
Let the line through X and Y intersect C3 at Z and W and
is not a chord of circle C. (2008)
let a common tangent of C1& C3 be a tangent to the
(a) A (b) B
parabola x2 = 8ay
(c) C (d) D
There are some expressions given in the list-I, whose
Match the Following values are given in list-II below :

Each question has two columns. Four options are given List–I List–II
representing matching of elements from Column-I and (I) 2h + k (P) 6
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option length of ZW
(II) (Q) 6
corresponding to the correct matching. length of XY

21. Match the conditions/expressions in Column I with

statement in Column II. (2007) Area of DMZN 5
(III) Area of DZMW (R)
Column I Column II 4

(A) Two intersecting circles (P) have a common tangent

(B) Two mutually external (Q) have a common normal 21

(IV) a (S)
5
circles.

(C) Two circles, one strictly (R) do not have a common

(T) 2 6
inside the other tangent

(D) Two branches of a (S) do not have a common 10

(U)
hyperbola normal 3

The correct matching is :

Which of the following is the only correct combination?
(a) (A-P,Q; B-P,Q; C-Q,R; D-Q,R)
(2019)
(b) (A-Q,R; B-P,Q; C-P,Q; D-Q,R)
(a) (II) - (T) (b) (I) - (S)
(c) (A-P,Q; B-Q,R; C-Q,R; D-P,Q)
(c) (II) - (Q) (d) (I) - (U)
(d) (A-Q,R; B-Q,R; C-P,Q; D-P,Q)
CIRCLES 53

23. Let the circle C1: x2 + y2 = 9 and C2: (x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 16 25. A circle touches the line L and the circle C1 externally such
intersect at the points X and Y. Suppose that another circle that both the circles are on the same side of the line, then
C3: (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2 satisfies the following conditions. the locus of centre of the circle is (2006)
(i) centre of C3 is collinear with the centres of C1& C2, (a) ellipse (b) hyperbola
(ii) C1& C2 both lie inside C3 and (c) parabola (d) parts of straight line
(iii) C3 touches C1 at M and C2 at N 26. A line M through A is drawn parallel to BD. Point S moves
Let the line through X and Y intersect C3 at Z and W and such that its distances from the line BD and the vertex A
let a common tangent of C1& C3 be a tangent to the are equal. If locus of S cuts M at T2 and T3 and AC at T1,
parabola x2 = 8ay then area of DT1 T2 T3 is (2006)
There are some expressions given in the list-I, whose
values are given in list-II below : 1 2
(a) sq unit (b) sq unit
List–I List–II 2 3
(I) 2h + k (P) 6 (c) 1 sq unit (d) 2 sq unit

length of ZW
(II) (Q) 6 Using the following passage, solve Q.27 to Q.29
length of XY
Passage – 2
Area of DMZN 5
(III) Area of DZMW (R)
4 A circle C of radius 1 is inscribed in an equilateral triangle
PQR. The points of contact of C with the sides PQ, QR, RP
21 are D, E, F respectively. The line PQ is given by the equation
(IV) a (S)
5
æ3 3 3ö
(T) 2 6 3 x + y – 6 = 0 and the point D is çç 2 , 2 ÷÷. Further, it is
è ø
10
(U) given that the origin and the centre of C are on the same side
3
of the line PQ.
Which of the following is the only incorrect combination? 27. The equation of circle C is (2008)
(2019)
(a) (IV) - (S) (b) (I) - (P) (a) ( x - 2 3 ) 2 + ( y - 1) 2 = 1

(c) (III) - (R) (d) (IV) - (U)

2
2 æ 1ö
(b) ( x - 2 3 ) + ç y + ÷ = 1
Using the following passage, solve Q.24 to Q.26 è 2ø

Passage – 1
(c) ( x - 3 ) 2 + ( y + 1) 2 = 1
Let ABCD be a square of side length 2 unit. C2 is the circle
through vertices A, B, C, D and C1 is the circle touching all the (d) ( x - 3 ) 2 + ( y - 1) 2 = 1
sides of square ABCD. L is the line through A.
28. Points E and F are given by (2008)
24. If P is a point of C 1 and Q is a point on C 2, then

PA2 + PB 2 + PC 2 + PD 2 æ 3 3ö æ 3 1ö
QA2 + QB 2 + QC 2 + QD 2
is equal to (2006) (a) çç , ÷, ( 3 ,0)
÷ (b) çç , ÷, ( 3 ,0)
÷
è 2 2ø è 2 2ø
(a) 0.75 (b) 1.25
(c) 1 (d) 0.5 æ 3 3ö æ 3 1ö æ3 3ö æ 3 1ö
(c) çç , ÷, ç , ÷
÷ ç 2 2÷ (d) çç , ÷, ç , ÷
÷ ç 2 2÷
è 2 2 øè ø è 2 2 øè ø
CIRCLES 54

29. Equations of the sides QR, RP are (2008) 33. Let P be a point on the circle S with both coordinates
being positive. Let the tangent to S at P intersect the
2 2
(a) y = x + 1, y = - x -1 coordinate axes at the points M and N. Then, the mid-
3 3
point of the line segment MN must lie on the curve
1
(b) y = x, y = 0 2 2 4
3
(a) (x + y)2 = 3xy (b) x 3 + y 3 = 2 3

3 3 (c) x2 + y2 = 2xy (d) x2 + y2 = x2y2

(c) y = x + 1, y = - x -1
2 2
Using the following passage, solve Q.34 and Q.35
(d) y = 3 x, y = 0
Passage – 5
Using the following passage, solve Q.30 and Q.31
Let M = x, y Î R ´ R : x 2 + y 2 £ r 2 ,
Passage – 3

A tangent PT is drawn to the circle x2 + y2 = 4 at the point Where r > 0. Consider the geometric progression

P 3,1 . A straight line L, perpendicular to PT is a tangent to 1

an = n -1
, n = 1, 2, 3...... Let S = 0 and, for n ³ 1, let S
2 0 n
the circle (x – 3)2 + y2 = 1.
30. A common tangent of the two circles is (2012) denote the sum of the first n terms of this progression. For
(a) x = 4 (b) y = 2
n ³ 1, let Cn denote the circle with center Sn -1 , 0 and
(c) x + 3 y = 4 (d) x + 2 2 y = 6
radius an, Dn denote the circle with center Sn -1 , Sn -1
31. A possible equation of L is (2012)
and radius an. (2021)
(a) x - 3 y =1 (b) x + 3 y =1

1025
(c) x - 3 y =- 1 (d) x + 3 y = 5 34. Consider M with = r = . Let k be the number of all
513
Using the following passage, solve Q.32 and Q.33
those circle Cn that are inside M. Let l be the maximum
Passage – 4 possible number of circles among these k circles such that
no two circle intersect. Then
Let S be the circle in the xy-plane defined by the equation
x2 + y2 = 4. (2018) (a) k + 2l = 22 (b) 2k + l = 26

32. Let E1 E2 and F1F2 be the chords of S passing through the (c) 2k + 3l = 34 (d) 3k + 2l = 40
point P0 (1, 1) and parallel to the x-axis and the y-axis,
respectively. Let G1 G2 be the chord of S passing through
2199 - 1 2
P0 and having slope -1. Let the tangents to S at E1 and E2 35. Consider M with r = . Let k be the number
meet at E3, the tangents to S at F1 and F2 meet at F3, and 2198
the tangents to S at G1 and G2 meet at G3. Then, the points
of all those circle Dn that are inside M is
E3, F3, and G3 lie on the curve
(a) x + y = 4 (b) (x - 4)2 + (y - 4)2 = 16 (a) 198 (b) 199

(c) (x - 4)(y - 4) = 4 (d) xy = 4 (c) 200 (d) 201

CIRCLES 55

Using the following passage, solve Q.36 and Q.37 Text

Passage – 6 38. Let 2x2 + y2 – 3xy = 0 be the equation of a pair of tangents

drawn from the origin O to a circle of radius 3 with centre
in the first quadrant. If A is one of the points of contact,
Consider the region R = x, y Î R ´ R : x ³ 0 and
find the length of OA. (2001)
y 2 £ 4 - x . Let F be the family of all circles that are 39. Let C1 and C2 be two circles with C2 lying inside C1. A
circle C lying inside C1 touches C1 internally and C2
contained in R and have centers on the x-axis. Let C be the externally. Identify the locus of the centre of C. (2001)
circle that has largest radius among the circles in F. Let
40. Find the equation of circle touching the line
(a,b) be a point where the circle C meets the curve
2x + 3y + 1 = 0 at the point (1, –1) and is orthogonal to the
y2 = 4 – x. (2021)
circle which has the line segment having end points
36. The radius of the circle C is ------. (0, –1) and (–2, 3) as the diameter. (2004)
37. The value of a is ..... .

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book

CIRCLES

Please share your valuable feedback by

scanning the QR code.
CONIC SECTIONS
 Chapter 11 57

CONIC SECTIONS

(i) Section of a right circular cone by a plane passing

1. CONIC SECTIONS
through its vertex is a pair of straight lines passing
A conic section, or conic is the locus of a point which through the vertex as shown in fig. 2
moves in a plane so that its distance from a fixed point is in
a constant ratio to its perpendicular distance from a fixed
straight line.
• The fixed point is called the Focus.
• The fixed straight line is called the Directrix.
• The constant ratio is called the Eccentricity denoted
by e.
• The line passing through the focus & perpendicular to
the directrix is called the Axis.
• A point of intersection of a conic with its axis is called
a Vertex.

(ii) Section of a right circular cone by a plane parallel

to its base is a circle as shown in the fig. 3.

2. SECTION OF RIGHT CIRCULAR CONE BY

DIFFERENT PLANES
A right circular cone is as shown in the fig. 1

(iii) Section of a right circular cone by a plane parallel

to a generator of the cone is a parabola as shown
in the fig. 4.
CONIC SECTIONS
58

(iv) Section of a right circular cone by a plane neither PARABOLA

parallel to any generator of the cone nor
perpendicular or parallel to the axis of the cone is 5. DEFINITION AND TERMINOLOGY
an ellipse or hyperbola as shown in the fig. 5 & 6. A parabola is the locus of a point, whose distance from a
fixed point (focus) is equal to perpendicular distance from
a fixed straight line (directrix).
PS = PM

3. GENERAL EQUATION OF A CONIC :

FOCAL DIRECTRIX PROPERTY
Four standard forms of the parabola are
The general equation of a conic with focus (p, q) & directrix y² = 4ax ; y² = –4ax ; x² = 4ay ; x² = –4ay
lx + my + n = 0 is obtained using the relation PS2 = e2PM2 For parabola y² = 4ax :
This gives (l² + m²)[(x – p)² + (y – q)²] = e²(lx + my + n)² (i) Vertex is (0, 0) (ii) Focus is (a, 0)
 ax² + 2hxy + by² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 (iii) Axis is y = 0 (iv) Directrix is x + a = 0
Focal Distance : The distance of a point on the parabola
4. DISTINGUISHING VARIOUS CONICS from the focus.
Focal Chord : A chord of the parabola, which passes
The nature of the conic section depends upon the position through the focus.
of the focus S w.r.t. the directrix & also upon the value of Double Ordinate : A chord of the parabola perpendicular
the eccentricity e. Two different cases arise. to the axis of the symmetry.
Latus Rectum : A double ordinate passing through the
Case (I) When The Focus Lies On The Directrix.
focus or a focal chord perpendicular to the axis of parabola
In the case  abc + 2fgh – af 2 – bg2 – ch2 = 0 & the general is called the Latus Rectum (L.R.).
equation of a conic represents a pair of straight lines if : For y² = 4ax.  Length of the latus rectum = 4a
 ends of the latus rectum are
e > 1  h2 > ab, the lines will be real and distinct intersecting
L(a, 2a) & L' (a, –2a).
at S.
NOTES :
e = 1  h2 = ab, the lines will coincident.
(i) Perpendicular distance from focus on directrix = half the
e < 1  h2 < ab, the lines will be imaginary.
latus rectum
Case (II) When The Focus Does Not Lie On Directrix. (ii) Vertex is middle point of the focus & the point of
intersection of directrix & axis.
a parabola : e = 1,   0, h² = ab
(iii) Two parabolas are said to be equal if they have the same
an ellipse : 0 < e < 1;  0, h² < ab latus rectum.
a hyperbola : e > 1;  0, h² > ab (iv) If vertex of parabola y2 = 4ax is shifted to (h, k) without
rotation, then equation of new parabola is
rectangular hyperbola : e > 1 ;  0, h² > ab; a + b = 0
(y – k)2= 4a(x – h)

SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
59

6. PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION 9. TANGENTS TO THE PARABOLA y² = 4ax

The simplest & the best form of representing the (i) y y1 = 2a (x + x1) at the point (x1, y1) ;(T = O, Point form)
co-ordinates of a point on the parabola is (at2, 2at) i.e. the
equations x = at2 & y = 2at together represents the parabola a æ a 2a ö
(ii) y = mx + (m ¹ 0) at ç 2 , ÷ (Slope from)
y2 = 4ax, t being the parameter. m èm mø

(iii) t y = x + at2 at point (at2, 2at).(Parametric form)

7. POSITION OF A POINT RELATIVE TO A PARABOLA
The point (x1 y1) lies outside, on or inside the parabola NOTES :
y2 = 4ax according as the expression y12 – 4ax1 is positive,
zero or negative. Point of intersection of the tangents at the point t1 & t2 is
[at1 t2, a(t1 + t2)].
8. LINE & A PARABOLA

The line y = mx + c meets the parabola y² = 4ax in : 10. NORMALS TO THE PARABOLA y2 = 4ax
• two real points if a > mc
–y1
• two coincident points if a = mc (i) y – y1= (x – x1) at (x1, y1)
2a
• two imaginary points if a < mc
Þ condition of tangency is, c = a/m. (ii) y = mx – 2am – am3 at point (am2, – 2am)

Length of the chord intercepted by the parabola on the (iii) y + tx = 2at + at3 at point (at2, 2at).
line y = mx + c is :
NOTES :
æ 4 ö 2
ç 2 ÷ a(1 + m )(a - mc) (i) If the normals to the parabola y² = 4ax at the point t1
èm ø
meets the parabola again at the point t 2 then
The equation of a chord joining t1 & t2 is
2x – (t1 + t2)y + 2 at1t2 = 0. æ 2ö
t2 = – çç t1 + ÷÷
è t1 ø
NOTES :
(ii) If the normals to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the points t1 &
(i) If t1 and t2 are the ends of a focal chord of the parabola t2 intersect again on the parabola at the point 't3' then
y2 = 4ax then t1t2 = –1.
t1t2 = 2 ; t3 = –(t1 + t2) and the line joining t1 & t2 passes
Hence the co-ordinates at the extremities of a focal chord through a fixed point (–2a, 0).
æ a 2a ö
can be taken as : (at2, 2at) & ç 2 ,- ÷ 11. PAIR OF TANGENTS
èt t ø

(ii) Lenght of focal chord with (at2, 2at) as one of its end The equation to the pair of tangents which can be drawn
2 from any point (x1, y1) to the parabola y2 = 4ax is given by:
æ 1ö
point is a ç t + ÷ SS1 = T2 where :
è tø
S º y2 – 4ax ; S1 = y12 – 4ax1 ; T º y y1 – 2a(x + x1).
(iii) Length of the focal chord making an angle a with the
x-axis is 4 a cosec2a.
CONIC SECTIONS
60

12. DIRECTOR CIRCLE (iv) Any tangent to a parabola & the perpendicular on it from
the focus meet on the tangent at the vertex.
Locus of the point of intersection of the perpendicular (v) Semi latus rectum of the parabola y2 = 4ax, is the harmonic
tangents to a curve is called the director circle. For parabola
mean between segments of any focal chord of the parabola.
y2 = 4ax it's equation is
x + a = 0 which is parabola's own directrix. (vi) The area of the triangle formed by three points on a parabola
is twice the area of the triangle formed by the tangents at
13. CHORD OF CONTACT these points.
(vii) If normal are drawn from a point P(h, k) to the parabola
Equation to the chord of contact of tangents drawn from a
y2 = 4ax then
point P(x1, y1) is yy1 = 2a (x + x1) ; (i.e., T = 0)
k = mh – 2am – am3
NOTES : am3 + m(2a – h) + k = 0.

The area of the triangle formed by the tangents from the point m1 + m2 + m3 = 0;
(x1, y1) & the chord of contact is Where m1, m2 & m3 are the slopes of the three concurrent
(y12 – 4ax1)3/2 / 2a. normals.
* algebraic sum of the slopes of the three concurrent
14. CHORD WITH A GIVEN MIDDLE POINT normals is zero.
* algebraic sum of the ordinates of the three conormal
Equation of the chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax whose
middle point is : (x1 y1) is : points on the parabola is zero

2a * Centroid of the triangle formed by three co-normal

y – y1 = y (x – x1) º T = S1. points lies on the x-axis.
1
* Condition for three real and distinct normals to be
15. IMPORTANT RESULTS drawn from a point P(h, k) is

(i) If the tangent & normal at any point ‘P’ of the parabola 4
h > 2a & k 2 < ( h - 2a ) 3
intersect the axis at T & G then ST = SG = SP where ‘S’ is 27 a
the focus. In other words the tangent and the normal at a
(viii) Length of subnormal is constant for all points on the
point P on the parabola are the bisectors of the angle
parabola & is equal to the semi latus rectum.
between the focal radius SP & the perpendicular from P on
the directrix. From this we conclude that all rays emanating ELLIPSE
from S will become parallel to the axis of the parabola after
reflection. Ellipse is a conic with 0 < e < 1.
(ii) The portion of a tangent to a parabola cut off between the
directrix & the curve subtends a right angle at the focus. 16. STANDARD EQUATION AND DEFINITIONS
(iii) The tangents at the extremities of a focal chord intersect at
Standard equation of an ellipse referred to its principal
right angles on the directrix, and hence a circle on any
axes along the co-ordinate axes is
focal chord as diameter touches the directrix. Also a circle
on any focal radii of a point P (at2, 2at) as diameter touches
x2 y2
the tangent at the vertex and intercepts a chord of length + = 1 where a>b & b2 = a2 (1 – e2).
a2 b2
a 1 + t 2 on a normal at the point P..
CONIC SECTIONS
61

NOTES :

x 2 y2
(i) If the equation of the ellipse is given as + =1
a 2 b2
and nothing is mentioned then the rule is to assume
that a > b.
(ii) If b > a is given, then the y-axis will become major axis
and x-axis will become the minor axis and all other points
and lines will change accordingly.
(iii) If centre of standard ellipse is shifted to (h, k) without
b2
Eccentricity : e = 1 - 2 , (0 < e < 1) x–h
2
y–k
2
a rotation, then new ellipse is + =1
a2 b2
Foci : S º (a e, 0) & S' º (–a e, 0)

a a 17. AUXILIARY CIRCLE/ECCENTRIC ANGLE

Equations of Directrices : x = &x =-
e e
A circle described on major axis as diameter is called the
Major Axis : The line segment A'A in which the foci S'
& S lie is of length 2a & is called the major axis auxiliary circle. Let Q be a point on the auxiliary circle
(a > b) of the ellipse. Point of intersection of major axis x2 + y2 = a2 such that QP produced is perpendicular to
with directrix is called the foot of the directrix (Z). the x-axis then P & Q are called as the Corresponding
Points on the ellipse and the auxiliary circle respectively.
Minor Axis : The y-axis intersects the ellipse in the
points B' º (0, –b) and B º (0, b). The line segment 'q' is called the Eccentric Angle of the point P on the
B'B of length 2b (b < a) is called the minor axis of the ellipse. ellipse (–p < q £ p).

Principal Axis : The major and minor axis together are

called principal axis of the ellipse.
Vertices : A' º (–a, 0) & A º (a, 0).
Focal Chord : A chord which passes through a focus is
called a focal chord.
Double Ordinate : A chord perpendicular to the major
axis is called a double ordinate.
Latus Rectum : The focal chord perpendicular to the
major axis is called the latus rectum.
Length of latus rectum (LL’) :
NOTES :
2b 2 (minor axis)2
= = 2a(1 – e2)
a major axis l(PN ) b Semi major axis
(i) = =
l(QN) a Semi major axis
= 2e (distance from focus to the corresponding directrix).
Centre : (ii) If from each point of a circle perpendiculars are
The point which bisects every chord of the conic drawn drawn upon a fixed diameter then the locus of the
through it is called the centre of the conic. C º (0, 0) points dividing these perpendiculars internally in a
given ratio is an ellipse of which the given circle
x2 y2
the origin is the centre of the ellipse + =1 is the auxiliary circle.
a 2 b2
CONIC SECTIONS
62

18. PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION xx1 yy 1

(b) Point form: + = 1 is tangent to the ellipse
2
a b2
The equation x = a cos  & y = b sin  together represent
at (x1,y1). (Using T = 0)
x 2 y2
the ellipse  1 xcosθ ysinθ
a 2 b2 (c) Parametric form: + = 1 is tangent
a b
Where  is a parameter. Note that if
to the ellipse at the point (a cos , b sin ).
P()  (a cos , b sin ) is on the ellipse then;
Q ()  (a cos , a sin ) is on the auxiliary circle.
NOTES :
19. POSITION OF A POINT W.R.T. AN ELLIPSE
(i) There are two tangents to the ellipse having the same
The point P (x1, y1) lies outside, inside or on the ellipse
m, i.e. there are two tangents parallel to any given
according as ; direction. These tangents touches the ellipse at
x12 y12 extremities of a diameter.
2
 2 –1>0 (outside)
a b (ii) Point of intersection of the tangents at the point  &
x12 y12  is :
2
 2 –1<0 (inside)
a b
x12 y12
 –1=0 (on)     
a2 b2  cos sin 
a 2 ,b 2 
20. LINE AND AN ELLIPSE  cos    cos    
 
 2 2 
x 2 y2
The line y = mx + c meets the ellipse   1 in two
a 2 b2
points real, coincident or imaginary according as c² is (iii) The eccentric angles of point of contact of two parallel
<, = or > a2m2 + b2. tangents differ by .

x 2 y2
Hence y = mx + c is tangent to the ellipse  1
a 2 b2
if c2 = a2m2 + b2.
22. NORMALS
The equation to the chord of the ellipse joining two points
(i) Equation of the normal at (x1, y1) is
with eccentric angles  and  is given by

x α +β y α +β α -β a2 x b2 y
cos + sin = cos - = a2 – b2 = a2e2.
. x1 y1
a 2 b 2 2

21. TANGENTS (ii) Equation of the normal at the point (acos , bsin ) is;
ax sec – by cosec = (a2 – b2).

(a) Slope form: y = mx ± a 2m 2 + b 2 is tangent to (iii) Equation of a normal in terms of its slope 'm' is

the ellipse for all values of m. (a 2 - b 2 )m

y = mx -
a2 + b 2m2

SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
63

(i) PF. PG = b2
23. DIRECTOR CIRCLE
(ii) PF. Pg = a2
Locus of the point of intersection of the tangents which
(iii) PG. Pg = SP. S'P
meet at right angles is called the Director Circle. The
equation to this locus is x2 + y2 = a2 + b2 i.e. a circle (iv) CG. CT = CS2
whose centre is the centre of the ellipse & whose radius (v) locus of the mid point of Gg is another
is the length of the line joining the ends of the major & ellipse having the same eccentricity as
minor axis. that of the original ellipse.
[Where S and S' are the foci of the ellipse and T
NOTES : is the point where tangent at P meet the major
axis]
Pair of tangents, Chord of contact, Chord with a given Middle
* The circle on any focal distance as diameter
point are to be interpreted as they are in Parabola/Circle.
touches the auxiliary circle. Perpendiculars from
the centre upon all chords which join the ends
24. IMPORTANT RESULTS of any perpendicular diameters of the ellipse are
of constant length.
x 2 y2 * If the tangent at the point P of a standard ellipse
Referring to the ellipse  1
a 2 b2 meets the axis in T and t and CY is the
(a) If P be any point on the ellipse with S & S' as perpendicular on it from the centre then :
to foci then l(SP) + l(S'P) = 2a. (i) T t. PY = a2 – b2 and
(b) The tangent & normal at a point P on the ellipse (ii) least value of T t is a + b.
bisect the external and internal angles between
the focal distances of P. This refers to the well HYPERBOLA
known reflection property of the ellipse which
The Hyperbola is a conic whose eccentricity is greater
states that rays from one focus are reflected
through other focus & vice-versa. Hence we than unity (e > 1).(S)
can deduce that the straight lines joining each
focus to the foot of the perpendicular from the 25. STANDARD EQUATION & DEFINITION (S)
other focus upon the tangent at any point P meet
on the normal PG and bisects it where G is the
point where normal at P meets the major axis.
(c) The product of the length's of the perpendicular
segments from the foci on any tangent to the
ellipse is b² and the feet of these perpendiculars
lie on its auxiliary circle and the tangents at these
feet to the auxiliary circle meet on the ordinate
of P and that the locus of their point of
intersection is a similar ellipse as that of the
original one.
(d) The portion of the tangent to an ellipse between
the point of contact & the directrix subtends a x2 y 2
Standard equation of the hyperbola is - =1,
right angle at the corresponding focus. a2 b2
(e) If the normal at any point P on the ellipse with where b2 = a2 (e2 – 1).
centre C meet the major and minor axes in G & 2
g respectively & if CF be perpendicular upon b2  C.A 
Eccentricity (e) : e2 = 1 + 2
= 1+ 
this normal then : a  T.A 

SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
64

(C.A ® Conjugate Axis;

26. RECTANGULAR OR EQUILATERAL HYPERBOLA
T.A ® Transverse Axis)
Foci : S º (ae, 0) & S' º (–ae, 0). The particular kind of hyperbola in which the lengths of
the transverse and conjugate axis are equal is called an
a a Equilateral Hyperbola. Note that the eccentricity of the
Equations of Directrix : x = &x =-
e e
rectangular hyperbola is 2.
Transverse Axis : The line segment A'A of length 2a in
which the foci S' & S both lie is called the transverse axis
27. CONJUGATE HYPERBOLA
of the hyperbola.
Conjugate Axis : The line segment B'B between the Two hyperbolas such that transverse & conjugate axes
two points B' º (0, –b) & B º (0, b) is called as the of one hyperbola are respectively the conjugate & the
conjugate axis of the hyperbola. transverse axes of the other are called Conjuagate
Principal Axes : The transverse & conjugate axis Hyperbolas of each other.
together are called Principal Axes of the hyperbola.
x2 y2 x2 y2
Vertices : A º (a, 0) & A' º (–a, 0) e.g. – =1 & – + = 1 are conjugate
a2 b2 a2 b2
Focal Chord : A chord which passes through a focus is
hyperbolas of each other.
called a focal chord.
Double Ordinate : A chord perpendicular to the transverse
NOTES :
axis is called a double ordinate.
Latus Rectum (l) L : The focal chord perpendicular to (a) If e 1 and e2 are the eccentricities of the hyperbola
the transverse axis is called the latus rectum. and its conjugate then e1–2 + e2–2 = 1.
(b) The foci of a hyperbola and its conjugate are concyclic
2b 2 (C.A.)2 and form the vertices of a square.
l= = = 2a (e2 – 1)
a T.A.
(c) Two hyperbolas are said to be similiar if they have the
same eccentricity.
NOTES : (d) Two similiar hyperbolas are said to be equal if they
have same latus rectum.
(i) l (L.R.) = 2 e (distance from focus to corresponding
directrix). (e) If a hyperbola is equilateral then the conjugate
hyperbola is also equilateral.
(ii) Centre : The point which bisects every chord of the
conic drawn through it is called the centre of the conic.
C º (0, 0) the origin is the centere of the hyperbola 28. AUXILIARY CIRCLE
2 2
x y
- =1 A circle drawn with centre C & T.A. as a diameter is
a 2 b2 called the Auxiliary Circle of the hyperbola. Equation of
(iii) Since the fundamental equation to the hyperbola only the auxiliary circle is x2 + y2 = a2.
differs from that to the ellipse in having –b2 instead Note from the figure that P & Q are called the
of b2 it will be found that many propositions for the "Corresponding Points" on the hyperbola and the
hyperbola are derived from those for the ellipse by auxiliary circle.
simply changing the sign of b2.
In the hyperbola any ordinate of the curve does not meet
(iv) If centre of standard hyperbola is shifted to (h, k) the circle on AA' as diameter in real points. There is
without rotation, then hyperbola equation is therefore no real eccentric angle as in the case of the
2 2 ellipse.
x–h y–k
– =1
a2 b2
CONIC SECTIONS
65

32. TANGENTS

(i) Slope Form : y = mx + a 2 m 2 - b 2 can be taken

x 2 y2
as the tangent to the hyperbola  1
a 2 b2
(ii) Point Form : Equation of tangent to the

x 2 y2
hyperbola   1 at the point (x1 y1) is
a 2 b2

xx1 yy 1
- = 1 (Using T = 0)
29. PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION a2 b 2
(iii) Parametric Form : Equation of the tangent to the
The equation x = a sec  & y = b tan  together represents
x 2 y2
hyperbola   1 at the point (a sec , b tan )
a 2 b2
x 2 y2
the hyperbola   1 where  is a parameter..
a 2 b2 xsecθ ytanθ
- = 1.
a b
Note that if P()  (a sec, b tan ) is on the hyperbola
then ; NOTES :
Q ()  (a cos, a sin) is on the auxiliary circle.
(i) Point of intersection of the tangents at 1 & 2 is :

30. POSITION OF A POINT 'P' W.R.T. A HYPERBOLA 1   2

cos
xa 2 , y  b tan 1   2 
1   2  2 
x12 y12 cos
The quantity S1   –1 is positive, zero or 2
a 2 b2
(ii) If |1 + 2| = , then tangents at these points
negative according as the point (x1, y1) lies inside, on or
(1 & 2) are parallel.
outside the curve.
(iii) There are two parallel tangents having the same slope
m. These tangents touches the hyperbola at the
31. LINE AND A HYPERBOLA extremities of a diameter.

The straight line y = mx + c is a secant, a tangent or

33. NORMALS
x 2 y2
passes outside the hyperbola 2  2  1 according as (i) The equation of the normal to the hyperbola
a b
: c2 > or = or < a2m2 – b2, respectively. x 2 y2
  1 at the point P (x 1 , y1) on it is
a 2 b2
The equation to the chord of the hyperbola joining two
a2 x b2 y
points with eccentric angles  and  is given by + = a2 + b2 = a2e2
x1 y1
x α –β y α+β α+β (ii) The equation of the normal at the point
cos – sin = cos .
a 2 b 2 2 P (a sec , b tan ) on the hyperbola

SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
66

x 2 y2 ax by
35. RECTANGULAR HYPERBOLA (xy = c2)
- 2 = 1 is + = a2 + b2 = a2e2.
2 secθ tanθ
a b
(iii) Equation of a normal in terms of its slope 'm' is It is referred to its asymptotes as axes of co-ordinates.
(a 2 + b2 )m Vertices : (c, c) and (–c, –c) ;
y = mx ± .
a2 - b 2m 2

NOTES :

Equation to the chord of contact, chord with a given middle

point, pair of tangents from an external point is to be
interpreted as in parabola/circle.

34. DIRECTOR CIRCLE Foci : ( 2c, 2c) & (- 2c, - 2c),

The locus of the intersection point of tangents which are Directrices : x + y = ± 2c

at right angles is known as the Director Circle of the
Latus Rectum (l) : l = 2 2 c = T.A. = C.A.
hyperbola. The equation to the director circle is :
Parametric equation x = ct, y = c/t, t Î R – {0}
x2 + y2 = a2 – b2.
Equation of a chord joining the points P(t1) & Q(t2) is
If b2 < a2 this circle is real. x + t1t2y = c(t1 + t2).
If b2 = a2 (rectangular hyperbola) the radius of the circle
x y
is zero and it reduces to a point circle at the origin. In Equation of the tangent at P (x1 y1) is x + y = 2 and
1 1
this case the centre is the only point from which the
tangents at right angles can be drawn to the curve. x
at P(t) is + ty = 2c.
t
If b2 > a2, the radius of the circle is imaginary, so that
Equation of the normal at P(t) is xt3 – yt = c(t4 – 1).
there is no such circle & so no pair of tangents at right
Chord with a given middle point as (h, k) is kx + hy = 2hk.
angle can be drawn to the curve.

36. IMPORTANT RESULTS

NOTES :
(i) The difference of of focal distances of any point
A simple method to find the co-ordinates of the centre of P on hyperbola constant, i.e, |PS – PS’| = 2a
the hyperbola expressed as a general equation of degree 2
should be remembered as : (ii) Locus of the feet of the perpendicular drawn from
Let f(x y) = 0 represents a hyperbola. x2 y2
focus of the hyperbola - = 1 upon any
a 2 b2
¶f ¶f
Find & . Then the point of intersection of tangent is its auxiliary circle i.e.
¶x ¶y x2 + y2 = a2 & the product of the feet of these
perpendiculars is b2.
¶f ¶f (iii) The portion of the tangent between the point of
=0& = 0 gives the centre of the hyperbola.
¶x ¶y contact & the directrix subtends a right angle at
the corresponding focus.
CONIC SECTIONS
67

(iv) The tangent & normal at any point of a

hyperbola bisect the angle between the focal x2 y2
hyperbola + =1
radii. This spell the reflection property of the a2 - k2 k 2 - b2
hyperbola as "An incoming light ray" aimed (a > k > b > 0) are confocal and therefore
towards one focus is reflected from the outer orthogonal.
surface of the hyperbola towards the other focus.
(v) The foci of the hyperbola and the points P and
It follows that if an ellipse and a hyperbola have
Q in which any tangent meets the tangents at
the same foci, they cut at right angles at any of
the vertices are concyclic with PQ as diameter of
their common point.
the circle.
(vi) A rectangular hyperbola circumscribing a triangle
also passes through the orthocentre of this

æ cö
triangle. If çç ct i , ÷÷ i = 1, 2, 3 be the angular
è t i ø

points P, Q, R then orthocentre is

æ -c ö
çç ,-ct1 t 2 t 3 ÷÷.
t t
è 12 3t ø

(vii) If a circle and the rectangular hyperbola xy = c2

meet in the four points, t1, t2, t3 and t4, then
(a) t1 t2 t3 t4 = 1
(b) The centre of the circle through the points t1,
x2
y2 t2, and t3 is :
Note that the ellipse + = 1 & the
a 2 b2
ìï c æ 1 ö cæ 1 1 1 öüï
í çç t1 + t 2 + t 3 + ÷÷, çç + + + t1 + t 2 + t 3 ÷÷ý
ïî 2 è t 1 t 2 t 3 ø 2 è t1 t 2 t 3 øïþ
CONIC SECTIONS 68

SOLVED EXAMPLES

PARABOLA Example - 2

Example - 1 Find the equation of the parabola with its vertex at (3, 2)
and its focus at (5, 2).
Find the equation of the parabola with latus rectum joining
the points (3, 6) and (3, –2) Sol. Let Vertex A (3, 2) and focus is S (5, 2)

-2 - 6
Sol. Slope of (3, 6) and (3, –2) is = ¥ since latus rectum 2-2
3-3 Slope of AS = = 0 (which is parallel to x-axis)
5-3
is perpendicular to axis. Hence axis parallel to x-axis. The
equation of the two possible parabolas will be of the form
2
(y – k) = ± 4a (x – h) ... (1)

Hence axis of parabola parallel to x-axis.

Since latus rectum = (3 - 3) 2 + (6 + 2) 2 = 8 The equation is of the form

2
\ 4a = 8 (y – k) = 4a (x – h)
2
a=2 or (y – 2) = 4a (x – 3)
2
\ From (1), (y – k) = ± 8 (x – h)
as (h, k) is the vertex (3, 2)
Since (3, 6) and (3, –2) lie on the parabola, then
2 a = distance between the focus and the vertex
(6 – k) = ± 8 (3 – h) ... (2)
2
and (–2 – k) = ± 8 (3 – h) ... (3)
= (5 - 3) 2 + (2 - 2) 2
Solving (2) and (3) we get
k=2 =2
From (2) + 16 = 8 (3 – h), Hence the required equation is
\ h=3±2 2
(y – 2) = 8 (x – 3)
\ h = 5, 1
2
or y – 8x – 4y + 28 = 0
Hence values of (h, k) are (5, 2) and (1, 2). The required
parabolas are
2 2
(y – 2) = –8 (x – 5) and (y – 2) = 8 (x – 1)
CONIC SECTIONS 69

Example - 3 Sol. (t2, 2t) -one end of focal chord

Let L1 be the length of the common chord of the curves  1 2 

 2 ,  other end  t1t2  1
x2 + y2 = 9 and y2 = 8x, and L2 be the length of the latus t t 
rectum of y2 = 8x, then: Length of focal chord
(a) L1 > L2 (b) L1 = L2
2 2
 2 1  1
L1 = t  2   4t  
(c) L1 < L2 (d)  3  t   t
L2
2
Ans. (c) 1  1
=t t    4
Sol. For intersection of x2 + y2 = 9 and y2 = 8x t  t
x2 + 8x = 9  (x + 9)(x - 1) = 0 x = - 9 or x = 1
2
x = –9 not possible  1
=t  
Hence, x = 1  t

Now y2 = 8 y = ± 2 2 Example - 6

 
The two points are 1, 2 2 and 1, 2 2   A chord is drawn through the focus of the parabola y2=6x
such that its distance from the vertex of this parabola is
L1 = 2  2 2  4 2
5
, then its slope can be :
L2 = 4a = 8 2
Hence, L2>L1
5 3
(a) (b)
Example - 4 2 2

2 2
For the parabola y2 = 8x point (2, 5) is (c) (d)
5 3
(a) inside the parabola
(b) Focus Ans. (a)
(c) outside the parabola Sol. Let the slope of chord be ‘m’ equation of chord through
(d) On the parabola 3  3
focus ( ,0) is y - 0 = m x 
Ans. (c) 2  2
Sol. For y2 = 8x
3m
25 - 8 (2) > 0 mx - y - =0
2
(2, 5) lies outside parabola
5
distance from (0,0 ) is
Example - 5 2

00 3 m
If (t2, 2t) is one end of a focal chord of the parabola, 5 2
y2 = 4x then the length of the focal chord will be : =
2 m2  1
2
 1  1  2 1  5 3m
(a)  t   (b)  t    t  2   =
 t  t  t  2 2 m2  1
5 (m2 + 1) = 9m2
 1  2 1  5 = 4m2
(c)  t    t  2  (d) none of these
 t  t  5
m =
Ans. (a) 2
CONIC SECTIONS 70

Example - 7 x = X + (–b) and y=Y+0

 x+b=X and y=Y ...(ii)
If the line x + y – 1 = 0 touches the parabola y2 = kx, then the
value of k is from (i), Y2 = 4aX ...(iii)

(a) 4 (b) –4 x y X b Y
and the line   1 reduces to  1
(c) 2 (d) –2  m  m
Ans. (b)
 Xb
 Y = m 1  
a   
Sol. c=
m
 m  b
k  Y =    X + m 1   ...(iv)
   
  k = -4
1 4
1 The line (iv) will touch the parabola (iii), if

 b a
m 1     a
Example - 8     m 
  c  m 
   
Show that line x cos  + y sin  = p touches the parabola
y2 = 4ax if p cos  + a sin2  = 0 and that the point of
m2  b 
contact is (a tan2 , – 2a tan ).  1    a
  
Sol. The given line is
 m2 (l + b) + al 2 = 0
x cos  + y sin  = p
Alternative Method :
 y = – x cot  + p cosec 
Then given line and parabola are
Comparing this line with y = mx + c
 m = – cot  and c = p cosec  x y
 1 ...(i)
since the given line touches the parabola  m
and y2 = 4a (x + b) ...(ii)
a
 c  cm = a respectively.
m
Substituting the value of x from (i),
 (p cosec ) (– cot ) = a
 a sin2  + p cos  = 0  y
i.e., x = l 1   in (ii)
 m
 a 2a 
and point of contact is  2 ,  i.e.
m m    y 
then y2 = 4a 1    b
  m 
 a 2a 
 2
,   (a tan2 , – 2a tan ). 4a
 cot  cot    y2 + y – 4a(l + b) = 0 ...(iii)
m

Example - 9 Since the line (i), touches the parabola (ii) then the roots
of equation (iii) are equal
x y 2
Prove that the line   1 touches the parabola  4a 
 m    – 4.1 {–4a (l + b)} = 0
 m 
y2 = 4a (x + b) if m2 (l + b) + al2 = 0.
Sol. The given parabola is
a 2
y2 = 4a (x + b) ...(i)  + (l + b) = 0
m2
Vertex of this parabola is (–b, 0).
 al2 + m2 (l + b) = 0
Now shifting (0, 0) at (–b, 0) then
 m2 (l + b) + al2 = 0.
CONIC SECTIONS 71

Example - 10 Example - 12

If y1, y2 are the ordinates of two points P and Q on the Two tangents are drawn from a point (-2, -1) to the curve,
parabola and y3 is the ordinate of the point of intersection y2 = 4x. If  is the angle between them, then | tan  | is
of tangents at P and Q, then equal to :
(a) y1, y2, y3 are in A.P. (b) y1, y3, y2 are in A.P.
1 1
(c) y1, y2, y3 are in G.P. (d) y1, y3, y2 are in G.P. (a) (b)
3 3
Ans. (b)
(c) 3 (d) 3
Sol. Let y1= 2at1, y2 = 2at2.then y3 = a ( t1 + t2)
Ans. (d)
2y3 = 2at1 + 2at2 = y1 + y2
Sol. Let the equation of tangent to the parabola y = 4x be
y1, y3 ,y2 AP
1
y=mx+
Example - 11 m
this tangent passes through (–2,–1)
(a) Find the equation of the tangents drawn to
y2 + 12x = 0 from the point (3, 8). 1
- 1 = - 2m +
(b) Find the equation of tangents to the parabola m
y2 = 4x + 5 which is parallel to the line y = 2x + 7. 2m2 - m - 1 = 0
Sol. (a) y2 + 12x = 0  y2 = – 12x. Let m1 and m2 be the root of this equation where
 a = – 3. m1 and m2 are slopes of two tangents drawn from (-2,-1) to
the curve y2=4x.
3  a
Let tangent be y = mx –
m
.  y  mx  m  1 1
  Now, m1 + m2 = and m1 m2 =
2 2

3 Given ‘’ is the angle between these tangents,

Since tangent passes through (3, 8), 8 = 3m –
m
m 2  m1  m1  m2 2  4m1m2
 3m2 – 8m – 3 = 0  (m – 3) (3m + 1) = 0 tan = 1  m m

1 2 1  m1m 2
1
 m = 3, m = –  Tangent are y = 3x – 1
3
2
 1  1
x   4 
2 2
and y=– + 9. tan 
3  1
1 
2
(b) Any line || to given is y = 2x + .
If it is tangent to the parabola then it will meet it in two
coincident points.
1
Eliminating x, we get : y2 – 5 = 2 (y – )  2
4 3
 y2 – 2y + 2 – 5 = 0. Roots are equal. = 1 =  2 =3
2
2
 b2 – 4ac = 0  4 – 4(2 – 5) = 0

 3  y  2x  3
Now tan   3  3
CONIC SECTIONS 72

Example - 13
a 1/ 3
Þ y=– x – a2/3 b1/3
Find the equation of common tangent to the circle b1/ 3
x2 + y2 = 8 and parabola y2 = 16x.
Þ a1/3 x + b1/3 y + a2/3 b2/3 = 0
Sol. Let ty = x + at2 (where a = 4) be a tangent to parabola which
also touches circle. Example - 15
Þ ty = x + 4t2 and x2 + y2 = 8
Show that the locus of a point, such that two of the three
have only one common solution.
normals drawn from it to the parabola y2 = 4ax are
Þ (ty – 4t2)2 + y2 = 8 perpendicular is y2 = a (x – 3a).
has equal roots as a quadratic in y. Sol. Let P º (x1, y1) be the point from where normals AP, BP, CP
Þ (1 + t2) y2 – 8t3y + 16t4 – 8 = 0 has equal roots. are drawn to y2 = 4ax.
Let y = mx – 2am – am3 be one of these normals.
Þ 64t6 = 64t6 + 64t4 – 32 – 32t2 éëb 2 = 4ac ùû
P lies on it Þ y1 = mx1 – 2am – am3.
Þ t2 + 1 – 2t4 = 0
Slopes m1, m2, m3 of AP, BP, CP are roots of the cubic
Þ t2 = 1, – 1/2
y1 = mx1 – 2am – am2.
Þ t=±1
Þ am3 + (2a – x1) m + y1 = 0 Þ m1 + m2 + m3 = 0
Þ the common tangents are
2a - x1
y = x + 4 and y = – x – 4. Þ m1m2 + m2m3 + m3m1 =
a
Example - 14

Find the equation of the common tangents to the parabola

y2 = 4ax and x2 = 4by.
Sol. The equation of any tangent in terms of slope (m) to the
parabola y2 = 4ax is

a
y = mx + ...(i)
m y1
Þ m1m2m3 = –
a
If this line is also tangent to the parabola x2 = 4ay then (i)
meets x2 = 4by in two coincident points. As two of the three normals are perpendicular, we take m1m2
Substituting the value of y from (i) in x2 = 4by we get = – 1. (i.e. we assume AP perpendicular BP)
To get the locus, we have to eliminate m1, m2, m3,
æ a ö 4ab
x2 = 4b ç mx + ÷ Þ x2 – 4bmx – =0 2a - x1
è m ø m m1m2 + m2m3 + m3m1 =
a
The roots of this quadratic are equal provided “B2 = 4AC”
2a - x1
æ - 4ab ö Þ –1 + m3 (–m3) =
i.e., (–4bm)2 = 4.1. ç ÷ a
è m ø
2
Þ 16b2m3 + 16ab = 0, m ¹ 0 æ + y1 ö 2a - x 1
Þ –1– ç ÷ =
Þ m3 = – a/b \ m = – a1/3/b1/3 è a ø a
Substituting the value of m in (i) the required equation is [using m1m2m3 = – y1/a and m1m2 = – 1]

a1/ 3 ab1/ 3 Þ a + y1 = – 2a2 + ax1

2 2
y=- x -
b1/ 3 a1/ 3 Þ y12 = a (x1 – 3a)
Þ y2 = a (x – 3a) is the required locus.
CONIC SECTIONS 73

Example - 16 Example - 17

Show that the locus of the middle points of normal chords

Find the locus of the mid points of the chords of the
of the parabola y2 = 4ax is
parabola y2 = 4ax which subtend a right angle at the vertex
y4 – 2a (x – 2a) y2 + 8a4 = 0.
of the parabola.

Sol. Let P (h, k) be mid point of a chord QR of the parabola y2

= 4ax, then equation of chord QR is
Sol.
T = S1

Þ yk – 2a (x + h) = k2 – 4ah

Þ yk – 2ax = k2 – 2ah ...(i)

Equation of the normal chord at any point (at2, 2at) of the
parabola y2 = 4ax is
y + tx = 2at + at3 ...(i)
But if M (x1, y1) be its middle point, its equation must be
also
T = S1
yy1 – 2a (x + x1) = y12 - 4ax1
Þ yy1 – 2ax = y12 – 2ax1 ...(ii)
As Equations (i) and (ii) are identical. Comparing them
If A is the vertex of the parabola. For combined equation of
1 t 2at + at 3
AQ and AR, Making homogenous of y2 = 4ax with the help = = 2
y1 - 2a y1 - 2ax1
of (i)

\ y2 = 4 ax . 1 From first two relations t = –

2a
...(iii)
y1

æ yk - 2ax ö From last two relations

\ y2 = 4ax ç 2 ÷
è k - 2ah ø
t 2at + at 3
= 2
Þ y2 (k2 – 2ah) – 4akxy + 8a2x2 = 0 - 2a y1 - 2ax 1

Since ÐQAR = 90°.

y12 - 2ax1
Þ = 2a + at2
\ Co–efficient of x2 + Co–efficient of y2 = 0 - 2a

Þ k2 – 2ah + 8a2 = 0 2
y12 - 2ax1 æ - 2a ö
çç ÷÷ [from equation (iii)]
Hence the locus is P (h, k) is y2 – 2ax + 8a2 = 0. Þ = 2a + a
- 2a è y1 ø

y12 - 2ax 1 2ay12 + 4a 3

Þ =
- 2a y12

Þ y 4 - 2a x - 2a y 2 + 8a 4 = 0
CONIC SECTIONS 74

Example - 18
ELLIPSE
Find the locus of the point of intersection of the tangents
Example - 19
to the parabola y2 = 4ax which include an angle of 45°.

Find the equation of an ellipse whose focus is (–1, 1),

1
eccentricity is and the directrix is x – y + 3 = 0
2

Sol. Let P (x, y) be any point on the ellipse whose focus is

S (–1, 1) and the directrix is x – y + 3 = 0. Draw PM
Sol.
perpendicular from P (x, y) on the directrix x – y + 3 = 0.
Then by definition

P  (at12, 2 at1) and Q  (at22, 2at2). T  (x1, y1)

 x1 = a t1t2 ...(i) and y1 = a (t1 + t2) ... (ii)

m1  m 2
As PTQ = 45°, tan 45° =
1  m1m 2

1 1

t1 t 2 t t  1 1
=  2 1  As m1  and m2  
1 1  t1t 2  t1 t2 
1
t1 t 2

SP = ePM
 (t2 – t1)2 = (1 +t1 t2)2 
2 2
(SP) = e (PM)
2

 (t2 + t1)2 – 4 t1t2 = (1 + t1t2)2 ...(iii)

2
Replace values of t1 + t2 and t1 t2 from (i) and (ii) in (iii) to get 1  x  y  3
 (x  1) 2  (y  1)2   
4 2 
2
y12 x1  x 1  2 2 2 2
2
4  1    8 (x + y + 2x – 2y + 2)= x + y + 9 – 2xy + 6x – 6y
a a  a 
2 2
 7x + 7y + 2xy + 10x – 10y + 7 = 0
 Required locus  y2 – 4ax = (x + a)2 which is the required equation of the ellipse.
CONIC SECTIONS 75

Example - 20
x2 y2
Sol. Let + =1 (a > b)
If the angle between the straight lines joining foci and the a2 b2
x2 y2
end of minor axis of the ellipse + = 1 is 90°, find its Given 2b = 8 ...(i)
a2 b2
eccentricity. and 2ae = 6 ...(ii)

x2 y2 b 4
Sol. The equation of the ellipse is + =1. By (i) and (ii) we have =
a2 b2 ae 3

The ends of minor axis are B (0, b) and B’ (0, –b). If the
eccentricity of the ellipse is e, then the foci are S (ae, 0) b2 16 2
Þ 2
= e
and S’ (–ae, 0). a 9

16 2
Þ 1– e2 = e (\ b2 = a2 (1–e2) as a > b)
9

3
Þe=
5

Example - 22

A focus of an ellipse is at the origin. The directrix is the

line x = 4 and the eccentricity is 1/2. Then the length of the
b-0 b
\ Slope of BS is m1 = =- semi–major axis is
0 - ae ae
(a) 5/3 (b) 8/3
b-0 b
and Slope of BS’ is m2 = = (c) 2/3 (d) 4/3
0 + ae ae
Ans. (b)
\ The angle between BS and BS’ is 90°,
Sol. Obviously the major axis is along the x-axis
b b
\ m1m2 = – 1 Þ - ´ = -1 The distance between the focus and the corresponding
ae ae
Þ b 2 = a 2 e2 a
directrix = - ae =4
Þ a2 (1 – e2) = a2e2 Þ 1– e2 = e2 e

1
Þ 2e2 = 1 \e = . a æ a ö
2 Þ - ae =4 ç notethat > ae ÷
e è e ø

Example - 21
æ1 ö æ 1ö
In an ellipse, the distance between its focii is 6 and minor Þ a ç - e ÷ =4Þ a ç 2 - ÷ =4
èe ø è 2ø
axis is 8. Then its eccentricity is
(a) 3/5 (b) 1/2
3 8
Þ a. = 4 \a =
(c) 4/5 (d) 1/ 5 2 3

Ans. (a)
CONIC SECTIONS 76

Example - 23 i.e., (0, –6)

Find the lengths and equations of the focal radii drawn \ Equation of SP is
2 2
from the point (4 3, 5) on the ellipse 25x + 16y = 1600 6-5
y-5 = (x - 4 3)
Sol. The equation of the ellipse is 0-4 3
2 2
25x + 16y = 1600
-4 3y + 20 3 = x - 4 3
x 2 y2
or + =1
64 100 or x + 4 3 y - 24 3 = 0

and equation of S’ P is

-6 - 5
\ y -5 = (x - 4 3)
0-4 3

Þ -4 3y + 20 3 = -11x + 44 3

or 11x - 4 3y - 24 3 = 0

Example - 24

If P = (x, y), F1 = (3, 0), F2 = (–3, 0)

Here b > a
and 16x2 + 25y2 = 400, then PF1 + PF2 equals
2 2
a = 64, b = 100
(a) 8 (b) 6
2 2 2
a = b (1 – e )
(c) 10 (d) 12
2
\ 64 = 100 (1 – e )
Ans. (c)
Þ e = 3/5
Sol. Given, 16x2+25y2 = 400 [given]
Let P(x1 , y1 ) º (4 3,5)
x 2 y2
Þ + =1
be a point on the ellipse then SP and S’P are the focal radii 25 16
\ SP = b – ey1 and S’P = b + ey1
Here, a2 = 25, b2 = 16

3 3 But b2 = a2 (1–e2)
\ SP = 10 - ´ 5 and S¢P = 10 + ´ 5
5 5
16
Þ SP = 7 and S’P = 13 Þ16 = 25 (1–e2) Þ = 1–e2
25
Also S is (0, be)
16 9 3
æ 3ö Þ e2 = 1– = Þe=
i.e., 25 25 5
ç 0,10 ´ ÷ i.e., (0,6)
è 5 ø
Now, foci of the ellipse are (± ae,0) = (± 3, 0)
and S’ is (0, –be)
Now, PF1 + PF2 = Major axis = 2a

æ 3ö = 2 × 5 = 10
i.e., ç 0, - 10 ´ ÷
è 5ø
CONIC SECTIONS 77

Example - 25 Example - 26

The eccentric angles of the extremities of latus rectum of

x2 y2
x 2 y2 The line x = at2 meets the ellipse + = 1 in the real
the ellipse + = 1 is a2 b2
a 2 b2
points if -
-1 æ ± ae ö æ ± be ö
(a) tan ç ÷ (b) tan -1 ç ÷ (a) | t | < 2 (b) | t | £ 1
è b ø è b ø
(c) | t | > 1 (d) None of these
-1 æ ± b ö -1 æ ± a ö
(c) tan ç ÷ (d) tan ç ÷ Ans. (b)
è ae ø è be ø
Sol. Solving these 2 equations simultaneously
Ans. (c)
b2t4 + y2 – b2 = 0 Þ y2 = b2 –b2 t4
Sol. Latus rectum is perpendicular to the major axis and passes
through the focus. For real ‘y’: b2 – b2 t4 ³ 0
X - co - ordinate of latus rectum = ae Þ t4 £1 Þ t2 £1 Þ | t | £ 1

x2 y2
Equation of ellipse: + =1 Example - 27
a 2 b2

Putting the value x = ae we get: For what value of l does the line y = x + l touches the

2
ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 144.
2
ae y
+ =1 Sol. Equation of ellipse is 9x2 + 16y2 = 144
a2 b2

y2 x2 y2
Þ e2 + =1 Þ + =1
b2 16 9

y2
Þ = 1 - e2 x2 y2
b2 Comparing this with + =1
a2 b2

y2 b2 b2
Þ = Þ y = ± then we get a 2 = 16 and b 2 = 9 and comparing the line
b2 a2 a
y = x + l with y = mx + c

æ b2 ö æ b2 ö \ m = 1 and c = l
Extremities are ç ae, ÷ and ç ae, - ÷
è a ø è a ø
If the line y = x + l touches the ellipse

9x2 + 16y2 = 144, then

b2
b sin q = ± , a cos q = ae
a c2 = a2m2 + b2

Dividing, Þ l2 = 16 × 12 + 9

b Þ l2 = 25
tan q = ±
ae \ l=±5
CONIC SECTIONS 78

Example - 28 Example - 29

x2 y2 x2 y2
A tangent to an ellipse + = 1 touches it at a point P If the normal at a point P(q) to the ellipse + =1
a2 b2 14 5
intersect it again at Q (2q). Show that cos q = – 2/3.
in the first quadrant and meets the axes in A and B
respectively. If P divides AB is 3 : 1, find the equation of Sol. The equation of normal at P(q) is :
tangent. ax by
- = a2 – b2
Sol. Let the coordinates of the point P º (a cosq, b sinq) cos q sin q
Þ the equation of the tangent at P is : As Q º (a cos 2q, b sin 2q) lies on it, we can have :

x cos q y sin q a b
+ =1 ...(i) (a cos 2q) – (b sin 2q) = a2 – b2
a b cos q sin q

Þ The coordinates of the points A and B are : (2 cos 2 q - 1)

Þ a2 – 2b2 cosq = a2 – b2
cos q
æ a ö æ b ö
Aº ç ,0 ÷ and B º ç 0, ÷ Put a2 = 14, b2 = 5 in the above equation to get :
è cos q ø è sin q ø
14(2 cos2q – 1) – 10 cos2q = 9 cosq
Þ 18cos2q– 9cosq – 14 = 0
Þ (6 cos q – 7) (3 cos q + 2) = 0
Þ cosq = 7/6 (reject) or cosq = – 2/3
Hence cosq = – 2/3.
Example - 30

Prove that in general four normals can be drawn to an

ellipse from any point and the sum of the eccentric angles
of the feet of these normal is equal to an odd multiple of
two right angles.

ax by
Sol. Equation of Normal = - = a2 – b2
cos q sin q

ah bk
As it passes through (h, k) º - = a2 – b2
By section formula, the coordinates of P are cos q sin q

æ a 3b ö 1- t2 2t q
ç , ÷ º (a cos q, b sin q) Replace cosq = , sinq = 2
, where t = tan
2
è 4 cos q 4 sin q ø 1+ t 1+ t 2
Þ bk t4 + 2 (ah + a2 – b2) t3 + 2 (ah – a2 + b2) t – bk = 0
a 3b
Þ = a cos q and = b sin q æq ö
4 cos q 4 sin q It roots are tan ç r ÷ , r = 1, 2, 3, 4
è2ø
1 3
Þ cos q = ± and sin q = ± æ q1 q 2 q 3 q 4 ö S1 - S3 p
2 2 tan ç + + + ÷=
1 - S + S = ¥ = tan
è 2 2 2 2 ø 2 4 2
Þ q = 60°
For equation of tangent, replace the value of q in (i) æ bk ö
ç as S 2 = 0, S 4 = - = -1÷
è bk ø
x 3y
Þ The equation of tangent is : + = 2. q1 + q 2 + q 3 + q 4 p
a b \ = np +
2 2
Þ q1 + q2 + q3 + q4 = (2n+ 1)p
CONIC SECTIONS 79

Example - 31 Example - 32

Product of the perpendiculars from the foci upon any A stair-case of length l rests against a vertical wall and a
floor of a room. Let P be a point on the stair-case, nearer to
x 2 y2 its end on the wall, that divides its length in the ratio 1 : 2.
tangent to the ellipse + = 1 is
a 2 b2 If the stair-case begins to slide on the floor, then the locus
of P is:
(a) b (b) a
1
(a) an ellipse of eccentricity
(c) a2 (d) b2 2

Ans. (d)
3
(b) an ellipse of eccentricity
Sol. We can assume an arbitrary tangent to this ellipse to be 2

l
y = mx + a 2 m2 + b 2 ... (1) (c) a circle of radius
2

The perpendicular distances of the two foci, F 1(ae, 0) and

3
F2(–ae, 0) from the line given by (1) are (d) a circle of radius l
2

Ans. (b)
mae + a 2 m2 + b 2 Sol. Let b be the height and a be the length intercepted by the
d1 =
1 + m2 staircase. By section formula, we can write the coordinates
of P as:

æ a 2b ö
-mae + a 2 m2 + b 2 ç , ÷
d2 = è3 3 ø
1 + m2
Now, the length of the staircase is constant

We thus have, Hence, a2 + b2 = l2

Let P be (x,y)

a 2 m 2 + b2 - a 2 m2 e 2 2
d1d 2 = æ 3y ö é 3y ù
1 + m2 Hence, (3x)2+ ç ÷ = l2 êQ a = 3x and b = 2 ú
è 2 ø ë û

a 2 m2 1 - e2 + b 2 x2 y2
Þ + =1
= 2 l2 4l 2
1+ m 9 9

This represents the equation of an ellipse,

2 2 2
m b +b
= 1
1 + m2 1–e2 =
4

= b2
3
Hence, e =
2
CONIC SECTIONS 80

Example - 33 Example - 34

Show that the locus of the foot of the perpendicular drawn Find the locus of a point from which the two tangents to
the ellipse are inclined at an angle a.
x2 y2 Sol. Equation of tangent of slope m is
from the centre of the ellipse + = 1 on any tangent
a2 b2
y = mx + a 2m 2 + b2 ...(i)
is (x2 + y2)2 = a2 x2 + b2 y2.

Sol.

Point P º (x1, y1) lies on (i)

Þ y1 = mx1 + a 2m 2 + b2

Let the tangent be y = mx + a 2m 2 + b2 . Þ m2 ( x12 - a 2 ) – 2x1y1 m + ( y12 - b 2 ) = 0

Draw CM perpendicular to tangent and let M º (x1, y1). Let roots be m1 and m2

M lies on tangent, 2 x 1 y1
Þ m1 + m2 =
x 12 - a 2
Þ y1 = mx1 + a 2m2 + b2 ...(i)

Slope (CM) = – 1/m y12 - b 2

and m1 m2 =
x12 - a 2
y1 1 x1
Þ =- Þ m=– y ...(ii)
x1 m 1 m1 - m 2
tan a =
1 + m1m 2
Replace the value of m from (ii) into (i) and take square to
get : Þ tan2 a (1 + m1 m2)2 = (m1 + m2)2 –4 m1 m2 ...(ii)
Using (ii),
(x12 + y12 ) 2 = a 2 x12 + b2 y12
2
æ y 2 - b2 ö 4x12 y12 y12 - b 2
Hence the required locus is : tan2 a çç1 + 12 ÷÷ = 2 – 4
2
( x1 - a 2 ) 2 x12 - a 2
(x2 + y2)2 = a2 x2 + b2 y2. è x1 - a ø

Þ Locus is tan2 a (x2 + y2 – a2 – b2)2 = 4 [x2b2 + a2y2 – a2b2]

CONIC SECTIONS 81

Example - 35 Example - 37

A tangent to the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 4 meets the ellipse Obtain the equation of a hyperbola with co-ordinate axes
x2 + 2y2 = 6 at P and Q. Prove that the tangents at P and Q
of the ellipse x2 + 2y2 = 6 are at right angles. as principal axes given that the distances of one of its

Sol. Chord of contact of vertices from the focii are 9 and 1 units.

Sol. Let equation of hyperbola is

x 2 y2 hx ky
  1 is  1 ...(i)
6 3 6 3
x 2 y2
Equation of any tangent to  1 ... (1)
a 2 b2

x 2 y2 x
  1 is cos  + y sin  = 1. ...(ii) If vertices are A (a, 0) and A’ (–a, 0) and foci are S (ae, 0)
4 1 2
and S’ (–ae, 0)
Compare (i) and (ii), eliminate  and get locus of (h, k)
i.e. x2 + y2 = 9 (i.e. a2 + b2) Given l (S’A) = 9 and l (SA) = 1
i.e. director circle of 2nd ellipse.  a + ae = 9 and ae – a = 1

HYPERBOLA or a (1 + e) = 9 and a (e – 1) = 1

Example - 36 a(1  e) 9
 
a(e  1) 1
Find the eccentricity of the hyperbola whose latus rectum
is half of its transverse axis.
Sol. Let the equation of hyperbola be 5
 1  e  9e  9  e 
4
x 2 y2
 1
a 2 b2  a (1 + e) = 9

2b 2
Then transverse axis = 2a and latus-rectum =  5
a  a 1    9
 4
2b 2 1
According to question  (2a)
a 2  a=4
2 2
 2b = a
2 2 2
 2a (e – 1) = a  25 
b 2  a 2 (e 2  1)  16   1

2
2e – 2 = 1  16 

3 2
 e2   b =9
2
From (1) equation of hyperbola is
3
 e
2 x 2 y2
 1
16 9
3
Hence the required eccentricity is .
2
CONIC SECTIONS 82

Example - 38 Foci : The co–ordinates of foci are (0, ± be)

\ X = 0, Y = ± be
Show that the equation 7y2 – 9x2 + 54x – 28y – 116 = 0
represents a hyperbola. Find the co–ordinates of the 4
centre, length of transverse and conjugate axes, Þ x – 3 = 0, y – 2 = ± 3 × .
3
eccentricity, latus rectum, co–ordinates of foci and
vertices, equations of the directrices of the hyperbola.
Þ 3, 6 and 3, –2
Sol. We have 7y2 – 9x2 + 54x – 28y – 116 = 0
Vertices : The co–ordinates of vertices are (0, ± b).
Þ 7 (y2 – 4y) – 9 (x2 – 6x) – 116 = 0
Þ X = 0, Y = ± b
Þ 7 (y2 – 4y + 4) – 9 (x2 – 6x + 9) = 116 + 28 – 81
Þ x – 3 = 0, y – 2 = ± 3
Þ 7 (y – 2)2 – 9 (x – 3)2 = 63
Þ (3, 2 ± 3)
2 2
( y - 2) ( x - 3) Þ vertices are (3, 5) and (3, –1)
Þ - =1
9 7 Equation of directrices :
The equation of directrices are
Y2 X2
Þ - = 1 [where X = x – 3 and Y = y – 2]
9 7 3
Y=±
4/3
This equation represents conjugate hyperbola. Comparing
it with
9
Þ y–2=
4
Y2 X2 2 2
2
- 2
= 1 we get b = 9 and a = 7
b a
9
Þ y = 2±
4
\ b = 3 and a = 7.

Centre : X = 0, Y = 0. 1 17
Þ y =– ,y =
i.e., x – 3 = 0, y – 2 = 0 \ Centre is (3, 2) 4 4

Length of transverse axis :

Example - 39
Length of transverse axis = 2b = 6.
Length of conjugate axis : If 5x2 + ly2 = 20 represents a rectangular hyperbola, then l=
(a) 5 (b) – 5
Length of conjugate axis = 2a = 2 7 .
(c) 4 (d) –4
Eccentricity : The eccentricity e is given by
Ans. (b)

a2 7 4 Sol. For a rectangular hyperbola, equation is of the type

e = 1+ 2
= 1+ =
b 9 3 x2 – y2 = a2
So, 5x2 + ly2 = 20
Length of latus rectum :

l y2
2a 2 Þ x2 + =4
The length of latus rectum = . 5
b

2(7) 14 l
= . Þ = -1
= 5
3 3
Þl=–5
CONIC SECTIONS 83

Example - 40

For what value of c does the line y = 2x + c touches the

hyperbola 16x2 – 9y2 = 144 ?
Sol. Equation of hyperbola is

x 2 y2
16x2 – 9y2 = 144 Þ - =1
9 16

x2 y2
comparing this with - = 1 , we get a2 = 9, b2 = 16.
a2 b2
and comparing this line y = 2x + c with y = mx + c.
\ m = 2 and c
If the line y = 2x + c touches the hyperbola
16x2 – 9y2 = 144 then c2 = a2m2 – b2
Þ c2 = 9 (2)2 – 16 = 36 – 16 = 20

\ c = ± 2 5.
CONIC SECTIONS 84

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Identifying the conic 9. The length of the latus-rectum of the parabola
x = ay2 + by + c is
1. The name of the conic represented by the equation
x2 + y2 – 2xy + 20x + 10 = 0 is a a
(a) (b)
(a) a hyperbola (b) an ellipse 4 3
(c) a parabola (d) circle
1 1
2. The name of the curve described parametrically by the (c) (d)
a 4a
equations x = t2 + t + 1, y = t2 – t + 1 is
(a) a circle (b) an ellipse 10. Vertex, focus, latus rectum, length of the latus rectum and

(c) a hyperbola (d) a parabola equation of directrix of the parabola y2 = 4x + 4y are

3. The equation lx2 + 4xy + y2 + lx + 3y + 2 = 0 represents a (a) (1, 2), (0, 2), y = 0, 4, x = –2
parabola, if l is (b) (–1, 2), (0, 2), x = 0, 4, x = –2

(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) (–1, 2), (1, 2), x = 0, 4, x = 2

(d) (–1, 2), (0, 2), y = 0, 2, y = –2
(c) 4 (d) 5
11. If the vertex = (2, 0) and the extremities of the latus rectum
Standard parabola & their equations
are (3, 2) and (3, –2), then the equation of the parabola is

4. The equation of the parabola whose focus is (–1, 1) and (a) y2 = 2x – 4 (b) x2 = 2y – 8
directrix is 4x + 3y – 24 = 0 is (c) y2 = 4x – 8 (d) none of these
2 2
(a) 9x + 16y – 24xy + 242x + 94y – 526 = 0 12. If focus of a parabola is (2, 0) and one extremity of latus
2 2
(b) 16x + 9y – 24xy + 242x + 94y – 526 = 0 rectum is (2, 2), then its equation is
(c) 2x2 – 23y2 + 7xy + 32x + 17y + 40 = 0 (a) y2 = 4 (3 – x) (b) y2 = 4x – 4
(d) none of these (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these
5. The equation of the directrix of the parabola y2 = 12 x is – 13. Equation of parabola which has its axis along x-axis and
(a) x + 3= 0 (b) y + 3 = 0 which passes through the points (3, 2) and (–2, –1) is
(c) x – 3 = 0 (d) y – 3 = 0 (a) 5y2 = 3x + 11 (b) y2 = 3x – 1
6. The equation of the latus rectum of the parabola (c) y2 = x + 3 (d) none of these
2
x = –12y is–
14. The equation of the parabola whose axis is parallel to
(a) y = 3 (b) x = 3 y-axis and which passes through the points (0, 4), (1, 9)
(c) y = –3 (d) x = –3
and (–2, 6) is given by
7. The coordinates of an end-point of the latus-rectum of the
(a) 2y2 + 3y – x + 4 = 0 (b) 3x2 + 2x + y – 4 = 0
parabola (y–1)2 = 4(x+1) are
(c) 2x2 + 3x – y + 4 = 0 (d) none of the above
(a) (0, –3) (b) (0, –1)
(c) (0, 1) (d) (1, 3) 15. The equation of the parabola having its axis parallel to
x-axis and which passes through the points (1, 2), (–1,3)
8. Coordinates of the focus of the parabola
and (–2, 1) is
x2 – 4x – 8y – 4 = 0 are
(a) 5y2 + 2x – 21y + 20 = 0 (b) 5y2 – 2x – 21y + 20 = 0
(a) (0, 2) (b) (2, 1)
(c) 5x2 – 2x – 21y – 20 = 0 (d) none of the above
(c) (1, 2) (d) (–2, –1)
CONIC SECTIONS 85

16. The locus of the vertex of the family of parabolas 23. The equation of the tangent to the parabola y2 = 4ax at
point (a/t2, 2a/t) is
a 3x 2 a 2 x (a) ty = xt2 + a (b) ty = x + at2
y= + – 2a is
3 2
(c) y = tx + at2 (d) y = tx + (a/t2)
24. The equations of common tangents to y2 = 4ax and
105 3
(a) xy = (b) xy = (x + a)2 + y2 = a2 are
64 4
æ x ö æ a ö
35 64 (a) y = ç +a÷ (b) y = ± ç 3x + ÷
(c) xy = (d) xy = è 3 ø è 3ø
16 105

17. Let P be the point (1, 0) and Q a point on the locus æ x ö

(c) y = ± ç + 3 a÷ (d) none of these
y2 = 8x. The locus of mid point of PQ is è 3 ø
(a) x2 – 4y + 2 = 0 (b) x2 + 4y + 2 = 0
25. Two common tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 2a2 and
(c) y2 + 4x + 2 = 0 (d) y2 – 4x + 2 = 0 parabola y2 = 8ax are
Parametric form of a parabola (a) x = ± (y + 2a) (b) y = ± (x + 2a)
(c) x = ± (y + a) (d) y = ± (x + a)
18. The parametric equation of the curve (y – 2)2 = 12 (x – 4)
26. The slope of the line touching both the parabolas y2 = 4x
are–
and x2 = –32y is :
(a) 6t, 3t2 (b) 2 + 3t, 4 + t2
(c) 4 + 3t2, 2 + 6t (d) None of these 2 1
(a) (b)
3 2
19. The parametric equation of a parabola is x = t2 + 1,
y = 2t + 1. The Cartesian equation of its directrix is
3 1
(a) x = 0 (b) x + 1 = 0 (c) (d)
2 8
(c) y = 0 (d) none of these
Standard ellipse & their equations
20. Any point on the parabola whose focus is (0, 1) and the
directrix is x + 2 = 0 is given by 27. The equation to the ellipse, whose focus is the point
(a) (t2 + 1, 2t–1) (b) (t2 + 1, 2t + 1) (–1, 1), whose directrix is the straight line x – y + 3 = 0, and
(c) (t2, 2t) (d) (t2 – 1, 2t + 1) 1
whose eccentricity is is
2
Various forms of tangents in parabola
(a) 7x2 + 2xy + 7y2 + 10x – 10y + 7 = 0
21. The focus of the parabola is (1, 1) and the tangent at the (b) x2 + 2xy + 10x – 10y + 3 = 0
vertex has the equation x + y = 1. Then which of the (c) 3x2 + xy + 10x – 10y + 3 = 0
following is incorrect (d) None of these
(a) equation of the parabola is (x – y)2 = 2 (x + y – 1)
x2 y2
(b) equation of the parabola is (x – y)2 = 4 (x + y – 1) 28. The equation + = 1 represents an ellipse, if
10 - a 4 - a
æ1 1ö (a) a < 4 (b) a > 4
(c) the co-ordinates of the vertex are ç , ÷
è2 2ø (c) 4 < a < 10 (d) a > 10
29. A line of fixed length a + b moves so that its ends are
(d) length of the latus rectum is 2 2 always on two fixed perpendicular straight lines; then
22. The tangent to the parabola y2 = 16x, which is perpendicular the locus of a point, which divides this line into
to a line y – 3x – 1 = 0 is portions of length a and b, is a/an
(a) 3y + x + 36 = 0 (b) 3y – x – 36 = 0 (a) ellipse (b) parabola
(c) x + y – 36 = 0 (d) x – y + 36 = 0 (c) straight line (d) none of these
CONIC SECTIONS 86

30. The equation of the latus rectum of the ellipse 38. If P is a moving point in the xy–plane in such a way that
9x2 + 4y2 –18x – 8y – 23 = 0 are perimeter of triangle PQR is 16

(a) y = ± 5 (b) y = - 5 {where Q º (3, 5 ), R º (7, 3 5 )} then maximum area

of triangle PQR is
(c) y = 1 ± 5 (d) x = -1 ± 5 (a) 6 sq. unit (b) 12 sq. unit
31. An ellipse has its centre at (1, –1) and semi major axis equal (c) 18 sq. unit (d) 9 sq. unit
to 8. If this ellipse passes through the point (1, 3), its
Parametric form of a ellipse
eccentricity is equal to

(a) 1/ 2 (b) 1/2 39. The curve represented by x = 2 (cos t + sin t),
y = 5 (cos t – sin t) is
(c) 3/2 (d) none of these (a) a circle (b) a parabola
32. The equation of the ellipse which passes through origin (c) an ellipse (d) a hyperbola
and has its foci at the points (1, 0) and (3, 0) is -
x 2 y2
(a) 3x2 + 4y2 = x (b) 3x2 + y2 = 12x 40. Parametric equation of the ellipse + = 1 is
16 9
(c) x2 + 4y2 = 12x (d) 3x2 + 4y2 = 12x
(a) x = 4 cos q, y = 3 sin q
33. If the latus rectum of an ellipse is half of its minor axis, its
eccentricity is (b) x = 3 cos q, y = 3 sin q

(a) 3/4 (b) 1/4 (c) x = 4 cos q, y = 4 sin q

(d) x = 3 cos q, y = 4 sin q
(c) 1/2 (d) 3/2
41. The parametric representation of a point on the ellipse
34. The length of the latus rectum of an ellipse is one third of
the major axis, its eccentricity would be 1
whose foci are (–1,0) and (7, 0) and eccentricity is
2
(a) 2/3 (b) (2 / 3)
(a) (3 + 8cos q, 4 3 sin q) (b) (8cos q, 4 3 sin q)
(c) 1/ 3 (d) 1/ 2
(c) (3 + 4 3 cos q, 8sin q) (d) none of these
35. Equation of the ellipse whose foci are (4, 0) and (–4, 0) and
e = 1/3 is
Position of line wrt ellipse
(a) x2 /9 + y2/8 = 16 (b) x2/8 + y2/9 = 16
(c) x2/9 + y2/8 = 32 (d) none of these x2 y 2
42. The ellipse + = 1 and the straight line y = mx + c
36. The eccentricity of an ellipse, with its centre at the origin, a2 b2
is 1/2. If one of the directrices is x = 4, then the equation of
intersect in real points only, if
the ellipse is
(a) a 2m2 < c 2 – b 2 (b) a2m2 > c 2 + b 2
(a) 4x2 + 3y2 = 12 (b) 3x2 + 4y2 = 12
(c) a 2m2 ³ c2 – b 2 (d) c ³ b
(c) x2 + y2 = 1 (d) 4x2 + 3y2 = 1
37. Equation of ellipse whose minor axis is equal to the distance x 2 y2
43. The line y = 2t2 intersects the ellipse + = 1 in real
between the foci and whose latus rectum is 10, is given by 9 4
(take origin as centre and major axis along x-axis) points, if
2 2 2 2
(a) 2x + y = 100 (b) x + 2y = 100 (a) | t | £ 1 (b) | t | < 2
2 2
(c) 2x + y = 50 (d) none of these (c) | t | > 1 (d) | t | ³ 1
CONIC SECTIONS 87

44. The number of values of c such that the straight line 49. A circle of radius r is concentric with an ellipse
x2
y = 4x + c touches the curve + y 2 = 1 is x 2 y2
4 + = 1. If common tangent is inclined to the
a 2 b2
(a) 0 (b) 1
2
(c) 2 (d) infinite major axis at an angle of q , then tan q equals-

Various forms of tangents in ellipse

r 2 - b2 r 2 - b2
(a) (b)
45. The equation of the tangents to the ellipse 4x2 + 3y2 = 5 a 2 - b2 a2 - r2
which are parallel to the line y = 3x + 7 are
r 2 - b2 r2 - a2
155 155 (c) (d)
(a) y = 3x ± (b) y = 3x ± r2 - a2 b2 - r 2
3 12
50. The locus of the foot of perpendicular drawn from the
95 centre of the ellipse x2 + 3y2 = 6 on any tangent to it is :
(c) y = 3x ± (d) none of these
12
(a) (x2 + y2)2 = 6x2 – 2y2 (b) (x2 – y2)2 = 6x2 + 2y2

x 2 y2 (c) (x2 – y2)2 = 6x2 – 2y2 (d) (x2 + y2)2 = 6x2 + 2y2
46. Equation of tangents to the ellipse + = 1, which are
9 4
Hyperbola & its standard equation
perpendicular to the line 3x + 4y = 7, are
51. Find the equation of the hyperbola whose directrix is
(a) 4x - 3y = ± 6 5 (b) 4x - 3y = ± 12
2x + y = 1, focus (1, 2) and eccentricity 3 .
(c) 4x - 3y = ± 2 (d) 4x – 3y = ± 1
(a) 7x2 – 2y2 + 12xy – 2x + 14y – 22 = 0

x2 y2 (b) 7x2 – 2y2 + 2xy – 2x + 14y – 22 = 0

47. The points on the ellipse + = 1 , such that the
a 2 b2 (c) 7x2 – 2y2 + xy – 14x + 2y – 22 = 0
tangent at that point makes equal angles with
(d) none of the above
coordinate axes is
52. If latus rectum of the hyperbola is half of its transverse
é a2 b2 ù axis, then its eccentricity is
(a) ê ± , ± ú
ë a2 + b2 a 2 + b2 û
(a) 3/2 (b) 3/2
é b2 a2 ù
(b) ê ± 2 2
,± ú (c) (3/ 2) (d) none of these
ë a +b a 2 + b2 û

x2 y2
é 1 1 ù 53. If hyperbola - = 1 passes through the focus of
(c) ê ± 2 ,± ú b2 a 2
ë a + b2 a 2 + b2 û

(d) None of these x 2 y2

ellipse + = 1 then eccentricity of hyperbola is -
48. The minimum area of a triangle formed by any tangent to a 2 b2

x 2 y2
the ellipse + = 1 and the co-ordinate axes is: 2
16 81 (a) 2 (b)
3
(a) 12 (b) 18
(c) 26 (d) 36 (c) 3 (d) None of these.
CONIC SECTIONS 88

54. The equation 16x2 – 3y2 – 32x + 12y – 44 = 0 represents 60. The eccentricity of the conjugate hyperbola of the
a hyperbola hyperbola x2 – 3y2 = 1 is

(a) the length of whose transverse axis is 4 3 2

(a) 2 (b)
3
(b) the length of whose conjugate axis is 4
(c) whose centre is (–1, 2) 4
(c) 4 (d)
3
19
(d) whose eccentricity is Various forms of tangents in hyperbola
3

55. The locus of the point of intersection of the lines 61. The equations of the tangents to the hyperbola
x 2 – 4y 2 = 36 which are perpendicular to the line
3 x - y - 4 3k = 0 and 3kx + ky - 4 3 = 0 for x – y + 4 = 0 are
different values of k is-
(a) y = -x ± 3 3 (b) y = –x ± 2
(a) Ellipse (b) Parabola
(c) Circle (d) Hyperbola (c) y = -x ± 5 (d) none of these

62. The tangent at an extremity (in the first quadrant) of latus

x 2 y2
56. The two conics bx2 = y and 2 - 2 = 1 intersect iff - x 2 y2
a b rectum of the hyperbola - = 1, meets x-axis and y-
4 5
1 1 1 axis at A and B respectively. Then (OA)2–(OB)2, where O
(a) - £a£ (b) a < - is the origin, equals :
2 2 2

20 16
1 (a) - (b)
9 9
(c) a > (d) a < b
2
4
57. The foci of a hyperbola coincide with the foci of the ellipse (c) 4 (d) -
3
x2/25 + y2/9 = 1. If eccentricity of the hyperbola is 2, then its
equation is : 63. Equation of a common tangents to the curves y2 = 8x
and xy = -1 is
(a) x2 – 3y2 – 12 = 0 (b) 3x2 – y2 – 12 = 0
(a) 3y = 9x + 2 (b) y = 2x + 1
(c) x2 – y2 – 4 = 0 (d) none of these
(c) 2y = x + 8 (d) y = x + 2
Conjugate hyperbolas
Numerical Value Type Questions
58. One of the focus of the hyperbola
64. If the parabola y2 = 4ax passes through the point (–3, 2),
2 2
3(y – 1) – 4 ( x – 2) = 12 is
k
and the length of its latus rectum is . Then the value of
(a) (0, 7) (b) (2, 1 + 7) 3
k is
(c) (0, 1 - 7) (d) (0, - 7)
65. A double ordinate of the parabola y2 = 8px is of length 16p. If
59. The eccentricity of the conic represented by the angle subtended by it at the vertex of the parabola is

x2 – y2 – 4x + 4y + 16 = 0 is p
, then the value of k is
k
(a) 1 (b) 2
66. Given the two ends of the latus rectum, the maximum
(c) 2 (d) 1/2 number of parabolas that can be drawn, is
CONIC SECTIONS 89

67. The point on y2 = 4ax nearest to the focus has its abscissa 75. The number of real tangents that can be drawn to the
equal to ellipse 3x 2 + 5y2 = 32 passing through (3, 5) is
68. If the latus rectum of a parabola whose focal chord is PSQ 76. If the angle between pair of tangents drawn to the ellipse
k æ k ö
such that SP = 3 and SQ = 2 is given by . Then the value 3x2 + 2y2 = 5 from the point (1, 2) is tan -1 ç ÷ . Then k
5 è 5ø
of k is equals

2 æ 1ö x2 y2
69. If y = 2x –3 is a tangent to the parabola y = 4a ç x - ÷ , + = 1 and the hyperbola
è 3ø 77. If the foci of the elipse
25 b 2
k
and a is equal to - , then the value of k is x2 y2 1
3 - = coincide, then the value of b 2 is
144 81 25
70. If P (t2, 2t) t Î [0, 2] is an arbitrary point on parabola
78. If the eccentricity of the hyperbola whose conjugate axis
y2 = 4x. Q is foot of perpendicular from focus S on the
tangent at P, then maximum area of DPQS is 2
is equal to half the distance between the foci, is . Then
k
71. The angle between the tangents drawn to the parabola
y2 = 12x from the point (–3, 2) in degrees is the value of k is
72. The angle between the tangents drawn from the point 79. If e 1 and e 2 are the eccentricities of a hyperbola
(1, 4) to the parabola y2 = 4x in degree is 3x2 – 3y2 = 25 and its conjugate, then e12 + e22 equals
73. If the centre of the ellipse 8x2 + 6y2 – 16x + 12y + 13 = 0 is
80. If e and e1 are the eccentricities of the hyperbolas xy = c2
(a, b), then 2a + b equals
and x2 – y2 = a2, then (e + e1)2 is equal to
x2 y2
74. S and T are the foci of the ellipse + = 1 and B is
a 2 b2
an end of the minor axis. If STB is an equilateral triangle,
1
and the eccentricity of the ellipse is . Then the value
k
of k is
CONIC SECTIONS 90

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. Let O be the vertex and Q be any point on the parabola, 6. The eccentricity of the hyperbola whose length of the latus
x2 = 8y. If the point P divides the line segment OQ rectum is equal to 8 and the length of its conjugate axis is
internally in the ratio 1 : 3, then the locus of P is: (2015)
equal to half of the distance between its foci, is :
(a) y2 = 2x (b) x2 = 2y
(2016)
(c) x2 = y (d) y2 = x
2. The area (in sq. units) of the quadrilateral formed by the 4 2
tangents at the end points of the latus rectum to the ellipse (a) (b)
3 3
2 2
x y
+ = 1, is: (2015)
9 5 4
(c) 3 (d)
3
27
(a) (b) 27
2 7. Let a and b respectively be the semi-transverse and
semi-conjugate axes of a hyperbola whose eccentricity
27
(c) (d) 18 satisfies the equation 9e2 –18e + 5 = 0. If S(5, 0) is a focus
4
and 5x = 9 is the corresponding directrix of this hyperbola,
3. If the tangent to the conic, y – 6 = x2 at (2, 10) touches the then a2 – b 2 is equal to : (2016/Online Set–1)
circle, x2 + y2 +8x –2y= k (for some fixed k) at a point (a, b);
then (a, b) is : (2015/Online Set–1) (a) 7 (b) –7
(c) 5 (d) –5
æ 7 6ö æ 6 10 ö
(a) ç - , ÷ (b) ç - , ÷ 8. A hyperbola whose transverse axis is along the major axis of
è 17 17 ø è 17 17 ø
x2 y2
æ 4 1ö æ 8 2ö the conic, + = 4 and has vertices at the foci of this
(c) ç - , ÷ (d) ç - , ÷ 3 4
è 17 17 ø è 17 17 ø
3
4. Let PQ be a double ordinate of the parabola, y 2 = - 4x , conic. If the eccentricity of the hyperbola is , then which
2
where P lies in the second quadrant, if R divides PQ in the
ratio 2 : 1 then the locus of R is: (2015/Online Set–2) of the following points does NOT lie on it?
(2016/Online Set–2)
(a) 3y 2 = - 2x (b) 3y 2 = 2x
(a) (0, 2) (b) ( 5, 2 2)
(c) 9y 2 = 4x (d) 9y 2 = - 4x

5. Let P be the point on the parabola, y2 = 8x which is at a (c) ( 10, 2 3) (d) (5, 2 3)
minimum distance from the centre C of the circle,
2 9. The eccentricity of an ellipse whose centre is at the origin
x2 + y + 6 = 1 . Then the equation of the circle, passing
through C and having its centre at P is : (2016) 1
is . If one of its directrices is x = –4, then the equation
2
(a) x 2 + y 2 - x + 4 y - 12 = 0

x æ 3ö
(b) x 2 + y 2 - + 2 y - 24 = 0 of the normal to it at ç1, ÷ is: (2017)
4 è 2ø

(c) x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 9 y + 18 = 0 (a) 2y – x = 2 (b) 4x – 2y = 1

(d) x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 8 y + 12 = 0 (c) 4x + 2y = 7 (d) x + 2y = 4

CONIC SECTIONS 91

15. If y = mx + c is the normal at a point on the parabola

10. A hyperbola passes through the point P( 2, 3) and
y2 = 8x whose focal distance is 8 units, then |c| is equal to:
has foci at (±2, 0). Then the tangent to this hyperbola at P
also passes through the point: (2017) (2017/Online Set–2)

(a) 2 3 (b) 8 3
(a) 3 2, 2 3 (b) 2 2,3 3
(c) 10 3 (d) 16 3
(c) 3, 2 (d) - 2, - 3
16. If the tangent at (1, 7) to the curve x 2 = y - 6 touches
11. The locus of the point of intersection of the straight lines,
the circle x 2 + y 2 + 16x + 12y + c = 0 then the value of c
tx – 2y – 3t = 0
is : (2018)
x – 2ty + 3 = 0 (t Î R) , is : (2017/Online Set–1) (a) 95 (b) 195
(c) 185 (d) 85
2
(a) an ellipse with eccentricity 17. Tangents are drawn to the hyperbola 4x 2 - y 2 = 36 at
5
the points P and Q. If these tangents intersect at the point
(b) an ellipse with the length of major axis 6
T (0, 3) then the area (in sq. units) of DPTQ is : (2018)
(c) a hyperbola with eccentricity 5
(a) 36 5 (b) 45 5
(d) a hyperbola with the length of conjugate axis 3
(c) 54 3 (d) 60 3
12. If the common tangents to the parabola x2 = 4y and the
circle, x2 + y2 = 4 intersect at the point P, then the distance 18. Tangent and normal are drawn at P (16, 16) on the parabola
of P from the origin, is : (2017/Online Set–1) y2 = 16x, which intersect the axis of the parabola at A and
B, respectively. If C is the centre of the circle through the
(a) 2 +1 (b) 2 3 + 2 2 points P, A and B and ÐCPB = q, then a value of tan q is:
(2018)
(c) 2 2 +1 (d) 3 + 2 2
4 1
(a) (b)
13. Consider an ellipse, whose centre is at the origin and its 3 2
3 (c) 2 (d) 3
major axis is along the x-axis. If its eccentricity is and
5 19. Two parabolas with a common vertex and with axes along
the distance between its foci is 6, then the area (in sq. x-axis and y-axis, respectively, intersect each other in the
units) of the quadrilateral inscribed in the ellipse, with the first quadrant. If the length of the latus rectum of each
vertices as the vertices of the ellipse, is : parabola is 3, then the equation of the common tangent
to the two parabolas is : (2018/Online Set–1)
(2017/Online Set–1)
(a) 4( x + y)+ 3 = 0 (b) 3( x + y)+ 4 = 0
(a) 8 (b) 32
(c) 8(2 x + y)+ 3 = 0 (d) x + 2 y + 3 = 0
(c) 80 (d) 40
20. If the tangents drawn to the hyperbola 4y2= x2 + 1 intersect
14. The eccentricity of an ellipse having centre at the origin, the co-ordinate axes at the distinct points A and B, then
axes along the co-ordinate axes and passing through the the locus of the mid point of AB is :
points (4, –1) and (–2, 2) is : (2017/Online Set–2)
(2018/Online Set–1)
1 2 (a) x2 - 4 y2 + 16 x2y2 = 0
(a) (b)
2 5 (b) x2 - 4y2 - 16 x2y2 = 0
(c) 4x2 - y2 + 16 x2y2 = 0
3 3 (d) 4x2 - y2 - 16 x2y2 = 0
(c) (d)
2 4
CONIC SECTIONS 92

21. If b is one of the angle between the normals to the ellipse, 26. If the length of the latus rectum of an ellipse is 4 units and
the distance between a focus and its nearest vertex on
x2 + 3y2 = 9 at the points 3cos q , 3 sinq and 3
the major axis is units, then its eccentricity is :
2
æ pö 2 cot b (2018/Online Set–3)
-3 sinq , 3 cos q ;q Î ç 0, ÷ ; then is equal to:
è 2ø sin 2q
1 1
(2018/Online Set–1) (a) (b)
2 3

2 1 2 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
3 3 3 9
27. If the eccentricity of the standard hyperbola passing
3 through the point (4, 6) is 2, then the equation of the
(c) 2 (d)
4 tangent to the hyperbola at (4, 6) is :
22. Tangents drawn from the point (-8, 0) to the parabola y2 = (8-04-2019/Shift-2)
8x touch the parabola at P and Q. If F is the focus of the (a) x – 2y + 8 = 0 (b) 2x – 3y + 10 = 0
parabola, then the area of the triangle PFQ (in sq. units) is (c) 2x – y – 2 = 0 (d) 3x – 2y = 0
equal to : (2018/Online Set–2)
28. In an ellipse, with centre at the origin, if the difference of
(a) 24 (b) 32 the lengths of major axis and minor axis is 10 and one of
(c) 48 (d) 64
the foci is at 0,5 3 , then the length of its latus rectum
2 2
23. A normal to the hyperbola, 4x -9y = 36 meets the co-
is: (8-04-2019/Shift-2)
ordinate axes x and y at A and B, respectively. If the
parallelogram OABP (O being the origin) is formed, then (a) 10 (b) 5
the locus of P is : (2018/Online Set–2) (c) 8 (d) 6
(a) 4x2 + 9y2 = 121 (b) 9x2 + 4y2 = 169 29. The tangent to the parabola y2 = 4x at the point where it
intersects the circle x2 + y2 = 5 in the first quadrant, passes
(c) 4x2 - 9y2 = 121 (d) 9x2 - 4y2 = 169
through the point : (8-04-2019/Shift-2)
24. The locus of the point of intersection of the lines,
æ 1 4ö æ1 3ö
2 x - y + 4 2 k = 0 and 2 kx + ky - 4 2 = 0 (k is any (a) ç - , ÷ (b) ç , ÷
è 3 3ø è4 4ø
non-zero real parameter), is : (2018/Online Set–3)
æ3 7ö æ 1 1ö
1 (c) ç , ÷ (d) ç - , ÷
(a) an ellipse whose eccentricity is . è4 4ø è 4 2ø
3
30. If one end of a focal chord of the parabola,
(b) an ellipse with length of its major axis 8 2 y 2 = 16 x is at 1, 4 , then the length of this focal chord is:

(c) a hyperbola whose eccentricity is 3 (9-04-2019/Shift-1)

(a) 25 (b) 22
(d) a hyperbola with length of its transverse axis 8 2
(c) 24 (d) 20
2
25. Let P be a point on the parabola, x = 4y. If the distance of
P from the centre of the circle, x2+y2+6x+8=0 is minimum, 31. If the line y = mx + 7 3 is normal to the hyperbola
then the equation of the tangent to the parabola at P, is : x2 y 2 2
- = 1 then a value of m is , then k is
(2018/Online Set–3) 24 18 k
(a) x + 4y - 2 = 0 (b) x - y + 3 = 0 (9-04-2019/Shift-1)
(c) x + y + 1 = 0 (d) x + 2y = 0
CONIC SECTIONS 93

32. The area (in sq. units) of the smaller of the two circles that 37. The tangent and normal to the ellipse 3 x 2 + 5 y 2 = 32 at
touch the parabola, y 2 = 4 x at the point (1, 2) and the x-
the point P 2, 2 meet the x-axis at Q and R, respec-
axis is: (9-04-2019/Shift-2)
tively. Then the area (in sq. units) of the triangle PQR is:

(a) 8p 2 - 2 (b) 4p 2 - 2 (10-4-2019/Shift-2)

34 14
(a) (b)
(c) 4p 3 + 2 (d) 8p 3 - 2 2 15 3

33. If the tangent to the parabola y 2 = x at a point 16 68

(c) (d)
3 15
a, b , b > 0 is also a tangent to the
38. If the line ax + y = c. touches both the curves
ellipse, x 2 + 2 y 2 = 1, then a is equal to: 2
x 2 + y 2 = 1 and y = 4 2 x, then c is equal to
(9-04-2019/Shift-2) (10-4-2019/Shift-2)
(a) 2 - 1 (b) 2 2 - 1
1
(a) 2 (b)
(c) 2 2 + 1 (d) 2 +1 2

34. If a directrix of a hyperbola centred at the origin and 1

(c) (d) 2
2
passing through the point 4, - 2 3 is 5 x = 4 5 and its
39. Let P be the point of intersection of the common tangents
eccentricity is e, then: (10-04-2019/Shift-1) to the parabola y2 = 12x and hyperbola 8x2 – y2 = 8. If S and
S’ denote the foci of the hyperbola where S lies on the
(a) 4e4 - 24e2 + 27 = 0
positive x-axis then P divides SS2 in a ratio:
(b) 4e4 - 12e2 - 27 = 0 (12-04-2019/Shift-1)
40. An ellipse, with foci at (0, 2) and (0, - 2) and minor axis of
(c) 4e 4 - 24e 2 + 35 = 0 length 4, passes through which of the following points?
(12-04-2019/Shift-2)
(d) 4e 4 + 8e 2 - 35 = 0
(a) 2, 2 (b) 2, 2
x2 y 2
35. If the line x – 2y = 12 is tangent to the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 at
a b
(c) 2, 2 2 (d) 1, 2 2
æ -9 ö 41. The equation of a common tangent to the curves, y2 = 16x
the point ç 3, ÷ then the length of the latus rectum of
è 2 ø and xy = -4, is______. (12-04-2019/Shift-2)
the ellipse is: (10-04-2019/Shift-1) (a) x - y + 4 = 0 (b) x + y + 4 = 0
36. If 5 x + 9 = 0 is the directrix of the hyperbola
(c) x - 2 y + 16 = 0 (d) 2 x - y + 2 = 0
2 2
16 x - 9 y = 144 , then its corresponding focus is: 42. The tangents to the curve y = (x - 2)2 -1 at its points of
(10-4-2019/Shift-2) intersection with the line x - y = 3, intersect at the point :
(12-04-2019/Shift-2)
æ 5 ö
(a) 5, 0 (b) ç - , 0 ÷ æ5 ö æ 5 ö
è 3 ø (a) ç , 1÷ (b) ç - , - 1÷
è2 ø è 2 ø
æ5 ö
(c) ç , 0 ÷ (d) -5, 0 æ5 ö æ 5 ö
è3 ø (c) ç , - 1÷ (d) ç - , 1÷
è2 ø è 2 ø
CONIC SECTIONS 94

43. Axis of a parabola lies along x-axis. If its vertex and focus
48. The length of the chord of the parabola x 2 = 4 y having
are at distance 2 and 4 respectively from the origin, on the
positive x-axis then which of the following points does equation x - 2 y + 4 2 = 0 is: (10-01-2019/Shift-2)
not lie on it? (9-01-2019/Shift-1)
(a) 3 2 (b) 2 11
(a) 5, 2 6 (b) 8, 6
(c) 8 2 (d) 6 3
(c) 6, 4 2 (d) 4, - 4
ì y2 x2 ü
p 49. Let S = í x, y Î R 2 : - = 1ý , where r ¹ ±1
44. Let 0 < q < . If the eccentricity of the hyperbola î 1+ r 1- r þ
2
then S represents: (10-01-2019/Shift-2)
x2 y2
- = 1 is greater than 2, then the length of its
cos 2 q sin 2 q 2
(a) a hyperbola whose eccentricity is when
latus rectum lies in the interval: (9-01-2019/Shift-1) 1- r

(a) (3, ¥ ) (b) (3/2, 2] 0<r<1

(c) (2, 3] (d) (1, 3/2]
2
45. A hyperbola has its centre at the origin, passes through (b) an ellipse whose eccentricity is when r > 1
the point ( 4, 2) and has transverse axis of length 4 along r +1
the x-axis. Then the eccentricity of the hyperbola is :
(9-01-2019/Shift-2) 2
(c) a hyperbola whose eccentricity is , when
r +1
3
(a) (b) 3
2 0<r<1

2 1
(c) 2 (d) (d) an ellipse whose eccentricity is , when r > 1
3 r +1

46. Let A (4, –4) and B (9, 6) be points on the parabola,

50. If tangents are drawn to the ellipse x 2 + 2 y 2 = 2 at all
y2 = 4x. Let C be chosen on the arc AOB of the parabola,
where O is the origin, such that the area of DACB is points on the ellipse other than its four vertices then the
maximum. Then, the area (in sq. units) of DACB, is: mid points of the tangents intercepted between the
(9-01-2019/Shift-2) coordinate axes lie on the curve :
(11-01-2019/Shift-1)
1 1
(a) 31 (b) 30
4 2
1 1 x2 y 2
(a) 4 x 2 + 2 y 2 = 1 (b) + =1
3 4 2
(c) 32 (d) 31
4
1 1 x2 y 2
(c) 2 x 2 + 4 y 2 = 1
47. The equation of a tangent to the hyperbola + =1
(d)
2 4
4 x 2 - 5 y 2 = 20 parallel to the line x - y = 2 is:

(10-1-2019/Shift-1) 51. Equation of a common tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4 x

(a) x - y + 1 = 0 (b) x - y + 7 = 0 and the hyperbola xy = 2 is : (11-01-2019/Shift-1)

(c) x - y + 9 = 0 (d) x - y - 3 = 0 (a) x + y + l = 0 (b) x – 2y + 4 = 0

(c) x + 2y + 4 = 0 (d) 4x + 2y + 1 = 0
CONIC SECTIONS 95

52. If a hyperbola has length of its conjugate axis equal to 5

57. The equation of a tangent to the parabola, x 2  8 y which
and the distance between its foci is 13, then the
eccentricity of the hyperbola is : (11-01-2019/Shift-2) makes an angle with the positive direction of x-axis, is
(12-01-2019/Shift-2)
13
(a) (b) 2
12 (a) y  x tan   2cot  (b) y  x tan   2cot 

13 13 (c) x  y cot   2 tan  (d) x  y cot   2 tan 

(c) (d)
6 8
58. Let S and S’ be the foci of an ellipse and B be any one of
53. If the area of the triangle whose one vertex is at the vertex the extremities of its minor axis. If S’ BS is a right angled
of the parabola, y  4  x  a
2 2
0 and the other two triangle with right angle at B and area (S’BS) = 8 sq.
units, then the length of a latus rectum of the ellipse is
vertices are the points of intersection of the parabola and
y-axis, is 250 sq. units, then a value of’ ‘a’ is : (12-01-2019/Shift-2)
(11-01-2019/Shift-2) (a) 4 (b) 2 2
1

(a) 5 5 (b) 5(2 3 ) (c) 4 2 (d) 2

1 59. A line parallel to the straight line 2x – y  0 is tangent

(c) (10 3 ) (d) 5

54. Let the length of the latus rectum of an ellipse with its x 2 y2
to the hyperbola   1 at the point (x1 , y1 ). Then
major axis along x-axis and centre at the origin, be 8. If the 4 2
distance between the foci of this ellipse is equal to the
length of its minor axis, then which one of the following x12  5y12 is equal to : (2-9-2020/Shift-1)
points lies on it ? (11-01-2019/Shift-2)
(a) 6 (b) 10


(a) 4 2, 2 2  
(b) 4 3, 2 2  (c) 8 (d) 5
60. The area (in sq. units) of an equilateral triangle inscribed

(c) 4 3, 2 3  
(d) 4 2, 2 3  in the parabola y2 = 8x, with one of its vertices on the
vertex of this parabola, is : (2-09-2020/Shift-2)
55. If the vertices of a hyperbola be at (-2, 0) and (2, 0) and
one of its foci be at (-3, 0), then which one of the following (a) 128 3 (b) 192 3
points does not lie on this hyperbola?
(12-01-2019/Shift-1) (c) 64 3 (d) 256 3

(a) (6, 2 10) (b) (2 6,5)  

61. For some    0,  , if the eccentricity of the
 2
(c) (4, 15) (d) (6,5 2)

56. The tangent to the curve y = x2 - 5x + 5, parallel to the line hyperbola x 2  y 2 sec 2   10 is 5 times the eccentricity
2y = 4x +1, also passes through the point :
of the ellipse, x 2 sec 2   y 2  5, then the length of the
(12-01-2019/Shift-2)
latus rectum of the ellipse, is : (2-09-2020/Shift-2)
7 1 1 
(a)  ,  (b)  ,  7 
2 4 8  4 5 2 5
(a) (b)
3 3
 1  1 7
(c)   , 7 (d)  , 
 8  4 2 (c) 2 6 (d) 30
CONIC SECTIONS 96

62.
2
Let P be a point on the parabola, y = 12 x and N be the 65. Let the latusractum of the parabola y 2 = 4 x be the

foot of the perpendicular drawn from P on the axis of the common chord to the circles C1 and C2 each of them
parabola. A line is now drawn through the mid-point M of
having radius 2 5. Then, the distance between the
PN, parallel to its axis which meets the parabola at Q. If
centres of the circles C1 and C2 is :
4
the y-intercept of the line NQ is , then : (3-09-2020/Shift-2)
3

(3-09-2020/Shift-1) (a) 8 (b) 8 5

(c) 4 5 (d) 12
1
(a) PN = 4 (b) MQ =
3 66. If the tangent to the curve, y = ex at a point (c, ec) and the
normal to the parabola, y2 = 4x at the point (1, 2) intersect
1 at the same point on the x-axis, then the value of c is
(c) PN = 3 (d) MQ = ……… . (3-09-2020/Shift-2)
4

63. A hyperbola having the transverse axis of length 2 has x2 y2

67. Let P (3, 3) be a point on the hyperbola, - = 1 . If
a2 b2
the same foci as that of the ellipse 3 x 2 + 4 y 2 = 12, then
the normal to it at P intersects the x-axis at (9, 0) and e is
this hyperbola does not pass through which of the its eccentricity, then the ordered pair (a2, e2) is equal to :
following points ? (3-09-2020/Shift-1)
(4-09-2020/Shift-1)

æ 3 1 ö æ 1 ö æ9 ö
(a) çç 2 , ÷ (b) ç1, - ÷ (a) (9,3) (b) ç , 2 ÷
è 2 ÷ø è 2ø è2 ø

æ 3 ö
æ9 ö æ3 ö
æ 1 ö (c) ç ,3 ÷ (d) ç , 2 ÷
(c) ç , 0÷ (d) çç - 2 , 1 ÷÷ è2 ø è2 ø
è 2 ø è ø

x2 y2
64. Let e1 and e2 be the eccentricities of the ellipse, 68. Let + = 1(a > b) be a given ellipse, length of whose
a2 b2

x2 y2 x2 y 2 latus rectum is 10. If its eccentricity is the maximum value

+ 2 = 1 (b < 5) and the hyperbola, - =1
25 b 16 b 2 5
of the function, f(t ) = + t - t 2 then a2 + b2 is equal to
12
respectively satisfying e1e2 = 1. If a and b are the
(4-09-2020/Shift-1)
distances between the foci of the ellipse and the foci of
(a) 135 (b) 116
the hyperbola respectively, then the ordered pair (a, b )
(c) 126 (d) 145
is equal to : (3-09-2020/Shift-2)
69. Let x=4 be a directrix to an ellipse whose centre is at the
æ 24 ö
(a) (8, 12) (b) ççç , 10÷÷÷ origin and its eccentricity is
1
. If P(1,b), b> 0 is a point on
è5 ø 2
this ellipse, then the equation of the normal to it at P is:
æ 20 ö
(c) ççç , 12÷÷÷
(4-9-2020/Shift-2)
(d) (8, 10)
è3 ø (a) 8x – 2y = 5 (b) 4x – 2y = 1
(c) 7x – 4y = 1 (d) 4x – 3y = 2
CONIC SECTIONS 97

70. If the common tangent to the parabolas, y2 = 4x and 76. If the normal at an end of a latus rectum of an ellipse
x2 = 4y also touches the circle, x2 + y2 = c2, then c is equal
passes through an extremity of the minor axis, then the
to: (5-09-2020/Shift-1)
eccentricity e of the ellipse satisfies:
1 1 (6-09-2020/Shift-2)
(a) (b)
2 4
(a) e 4 + 2e2 - 1 = 0 (b) e2 + 2e - 1 = 0
1 1
(c) (d)
2 2 2 (c) e4 + e2 - 1 = 0 (d) e2 + e - 1 = 0
71. If the point P on the curve, 4x2+5y2=20 is fathest from the 77. If the distance between the foci of an ellipse is 6 and the
point Q(0,– 4), then PQ2 is equal to:
distance between its directrices is 12, then the length of
(5-09-2020/Shift-1)
its latus rectum is (7-01-2020/Shift-1)
(a)48 (b)29
(c)21 (d)36 (a) 2 3 (b) 3

72. If the co-ordinates of two points A and B are ( 7, 0) and

3
(c) (d) 3 2
(- 7, 0) respectively and P is any point on the conic, 2

9x 2 + 16y 2 = 144, then PA + PB is equal to :

78. If y = mx + 4 is a tangent to both the parabolas, y 2 = 4 x
(5-09-2020/Shift-1)
and x 2 = 2by , then b is equal to
(a) 6 (b) 16
(c) 9 (d) 8 (7-01-2020/Shift-1)
73. If the line y = mx + c is a common tangent to the hyperbola
(a) -64 (b) 128
2 2
x y (c) -128 (d) -32
- = 1 and the circle x2 + y2 = 36, then which one of
100 64
the following is true? (5-09-2020/Shift-2) x2 y2
79. If 3x + 4y = 12 2 is a tangent to the ellipse + = 1,
(a) 4c2 = 369 (b) c2 = 369 a2 9
(c) 8m + 5 = 0 (d) 5m = 4
for some a Î R then the distance between the foci of the
74. Let L1 be a tangent to the parabola y2 = 4 (x + 1) and L2 be
a tangent to the parabola y2= 8 (x + 2) such that L1 and L2 ellipse is : (7-01-2020/Shift-2)
intersect at right angles. Then L1 and L2 meet on the
straight line: (6-09-2020/Shift-1) (a) 2 5 (b) 2 7

(a) x + 2y = 0 (b) x + 2 = 0
(c) 2 2 (d) 4
(c) 2x + 1 = 0 (d) x + 3 = 0
75. Which of the following points lies on the locus of the 80. The locus of a point which divides the line segment
foot of perpendicular drawn upon any tangent to the joining the point (0, – 1) and a point on the

x2 y 2 parabola, x 2 = 4y , internally in the ratio 1 : 2, is :

ellipse, + = 1 from any of its foci?
4 2
(8-01-2020/Shift-1)
(6-09-2020/Shift-1)

(a) (-1, 3) (b) (-2, 3) (a) 9x 2 - 12y = 8 (b) 4x 2 - 3y = 2

(c) (-1, 2) (d) (1, 2) (c) x 2 - 3y = 2 (d) 9x 2 - 3y = 2

CONIC SECTIONS 98

81. Let the line y = mx and the ellipse 2x2 + y2 = 1 intersect a 86. If one end of focal chord AB of the parabola y 2 = 8x is at
point P in the first quadrant. If the normal to this ellipse at
æ1 ö
æ 1 ö A ç , -2 ÷ , then the equation of tangent to it at B is
P meets the co-ordinate axes at (0, b) and ç - ,0 ÷ , è2 ø
è 3 2 ø
(9-1-2020/Shift-2)
then b is equal to: (8-01-2020/Shift-1)
(a) x + 2 y + 8 = 0 (b) 2 x - y - 24 = 0
2 2 (c) x - 2 y + 8 = 0 (d) 2 x + y - 24 = 0
(a) (b)
3 3
87. Let y = mx + c, m > 0 be the focal chord of y 2 = -64x,
2 2 2 2
(c) (d) which is tangent to x + 10 + y 2 = 4. Then, the value of
3 3

82. If a hyperbola passes through the point P(10, 16) and it 4 2 m + c is equal to ____. (20-07-2021/Shift-1)
has vertices at (±6, 0), then the equation of the normal at
88. Let P be a variable point on the parabola y = 4x 2 + 1 .
P is: (8-01-2020/Shift-2)
Then the locus of the mid-point of the point P and the
(a) 3x + 4 y = 94 (b) x + 2 y = 42 foot of the perpendicular drawn from the point P to the
line y = x is ? (20-07-2021/Shift-2)
(c) 2 x + 5 y = 100 (d) x + 3 y = 58
2
83. Let a line y = mx(m > 0) intersect the parabola,y2 = x at a (a) 3x - y + x - 3y + 2 = 0
point P, other than the origin. Let the tangent to it at P
2
meet the x axis at the point Q. If area (DOPQ) = 4 sq. units, (b) 2 x - 3y + 3x - y + 2 = 0
then m is equal to______. (8-01-2020/Shift-2)
2
84. If e1 and e2 are the eccentricities of the ellipse (c) 2 3x - y + x - 3y + 2 = 0

x2 y2 x2 y 2 (d) 3x - y
2
+ 2 x - 3y + 2 = 0
+ = 1 and the hyperbola - = 1 respectively
18 4 9 4
89. If the point on the curve y 2 = 6x, nearest to the point
2 2
and (e1 , e2 ) is a point on the ellipse, 15 x + 3 y = k Then
k is equal to: (9-01-2020/Shift-1) æ 3ö
ç 3, ÷ is a, b , then 2 a + b is equal to ______ ?
è 2ø
(a) 14 (b) 15
(c) 17 (d) 16 (20-07-2021/Shift-2)

85. The length of minor axis (along y-axis) of an ellipse of the 90. The locus of the centroid of the triangle formed by any
point P on the hyperbola
4
standard form is . If this ellipse touches the line 16x 2 - 9y 2 + 32x + 36y - 164 = 0, and its foci is ?
3
(25-07-2021/Shift-1)
x + 6 y = 8, then its eccentricity is : (9-1-2020/Shift-2)
(a) 9x 2 - 16y 2 + 36x + 32y - 36 = 0
1 5 1 11
(a) (b) (b) 16x 2 - 9y 2 + 32x + 36y - 36 = 0
2 3 2 3

(c) 16x 2 - 6y 2 + 32x + 36y - 144 = 0

5 1 11
(c) (d)
6 3 3 (d) 9x 2 - 16y 2 + 36x + 32y - 144 = 0
CONIC SECTIONS 99

91. Let a parabola P be such that its vertex and focus lie on x 2 y2
the positive x-axis at a distance 2 and 4 units from the 95. Let E1 : + = 1,a > b. Let E 2 be another ellipse such
a 2 b2
origin, respectively. If tangents arte drawn O(0, 0) be the
parabola P which mets P at S and R, then the area (in sq. that it touches the end points of major axis of E1 and the

units of DSOR is equal to ? (25-07-2021/Shift-1) foci E 2 are the end points of minor axis of E1 . If E1 . and
E 2 have same eccentricities, then its value is :
(a) 16 2 (b) 32
(22-07-2021/Shift-2)

(c) 16 (d) 8 2 -1 + 3 -1 + 6
(a) (b)
92. A ray of light through (2,1) is reflected at a point P on the 2 2
y – axis and then passes through the point (5,3). If this
-1 + 5 -1 + 8
reflected ray is the directrix of an ellipse with eccentricity (c) (d)
2 2
1
and the distance of the nearer focus from this directrix 96. If a tangent to the ellipse x 2 + 4y 2 = 4 meets the tangents
3
at the extremities of its major axis at B and C, then the
circle with BC as diameter passes through the point
8
is , then the equation of the other directrix can be : (25-07-2021/Shift-2)
53
(a) (–1, 1) (b) (1, 1)

(27-07-2021/Shift-1) 3, 0 2, 0
(c) (d)
(a) 2x - 7y - 39 = 0 or 2x - 7y - 7 = 0
æ1 3ö
97. Consider the parabola with vertex ç , ÷ and the directrix
(b) 11x + 7y + 8 = 0 or 11x + y - 15 = 0 è2 4ø

1
(c) 2x - 7y + 29 = 0 or 2x - 7y - 7 = 0 y= . Let P be the point where the parabola meets the
2
(d) 11x - 7y - 8 = 0 or 11x + 7y + 15 = 0 1
line x = - . If the normal to parabola at P intersects the
2
93. Let E be an ellipse whose axes are parallel to the
2
parabola at the point Q, then PQ is equal to
co-ordinates axes, having its centre at (3, –4), one focus at
(4, – 4) and one vertex at (5, –4). If mx - y = 4, m > 0 is a (01-09-2021/Shift-2)

tangent to the ellipse E , then the value of 5m2 is equal to 25 75

(a) (b)
2 8
(27-07-2021/Shift-2)
15 125
(c) (d)
94. Let a line L : 2x + y = k, k > 0 be a tangent to the 2 16
98. The locus of the midpoints of the chords of the hyperbola
hyperbola x 2 - y 2 = 3. If L is also a tangent to the
x 2 - y 2 = 4, which touch the parabola y 2 = 8x is:
parabola y 2 = ax, then a is equal to : (26-08-2021/Shift-2)

(22-07-2021/Shift-2) (a) x 3 x - 2 = y 2 (b) x 2 x - 2 = y 3

(a) 24 (b) –12

(c) y 2 x - 2 = x 3 (d) y3 x - 2 = x 2
(c) –24 (d) 12
CONIC SECTIONS 100

104. If two tangents drawn from a point P to the parabola

99. The point P -2 6, 3 lies on the hyperbola
y 2 = 16 x - 3 are at right angles, then the locus of point
x 2 y2 5 P is : (27-08-2021/Shift-2)
2
- 2 = 1 having eccentricity . If the tangent and
a b 2 (a) x + 3 = 0 (b) x + 2 = 0
normal at P to the hyperbola intersect its conjugate axis at
(c) x + 4 = 0 (d) x + 1 = 0
the points Q and R respectively, then QR is equal to:
(26-08-2021/Shift-2) 105. Let A 2 sec q, tan q and B 2 sec f, tan f , where

(a) 6 3 (b) 4 3 p
q+f = , be two points on the hyperbola x 2 - 2y 2 = 2.
2
(c) 6 (d) 3 6
100. If the minimum area of the triangle formed by a tangent to If a, b is the point of the intersection of the normals to
2
x 2 y2 the hyperbola at A and B, then 2b is equal to _____.
the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 and the coordinate axis is kab ,
b 4a
(27-08-2021/Shift-2)
then k is equal to ______. (27-08-2021/Shift-1)
106. The line 12x cos q + 5y sin q = 60 is tangent to which of
101. A tangent and a normal are drawn at the point P 2, – 4 the following curves ? (31-08-2021/Shift-1)

on the parabola y 2 = 8x, which meet the directrix of the (a) 25x 2 + 12y 2 = 3600 (b) 144x 2 + 25y 2 = 3600

parabola at the points A and B respectively. If Q a, b (c) x 2 + y 2 = 169 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 60

is a point such that AQBP is a square, then 2a + b is 107. The length of the latus rectum of a parabola, whose vertex
equal to: (27-08-2021/Shift-1) and focus are on the positive x-axis at a distance R and S

(a) –16 (b) –20 > R respectively from the origin, is ?

(c) –18 (d) –12 (31-08-2021/Shift-1)

(a) 4 S + R (b) 2 S + R
x 2 y2
102. On the ellipse + = 1 let P be a point in the second
8 4
(c) 2 S - R (d) 4 S - R
quadrant such that the tangent at P to the ellipse is
108. The locus of mid-points of the line segments joining
perpendicular to the line x + 2y = 0. Let S and S¢ be the
foci of the ellipse and e be its eccentricity. If A is the area x 2 y2
(–3, –5) and the points on the ellipse + = 1 is:
2
4 9
of the triangle SPS¢ then, the value of 5 - e . A is:
(31-08-2021/Shift-2)
(26-08-2021/Shift-1)
(a) 36x 2 + 16y 2 + 90x + 56y + 145 = 0
(a) 24 (b) 6
(c) 14 (d) 12 (b) 36x 2 + 16y 2 + 108x + 80y + 145 = 0
103. If a line along a chord of the circle
(c) 36x 2 + 16y 2 + 72x + 32y + 145 = 0
4x 2 + 4y 2 + 120x + 675 = 0, passes through the point
(d) 9x 2 + 4y 2 + 18x + 8y + 145 = 0
2
(–30, 0) and is tangent to the parabola y = 30x, then
109. A tangent line L is drawn at the point (2, –4) on the parabola
the length of this chord is: (26-08-2021/Shift-1)
y 2 = 8x . If the line L is also tangent to the circle
(a) 5 (b) 3 5
x 2 + y 2 = a , then ‘ a ’ is equal to _______________.
(c) 7 (d) 5 3 (31-08-2021/Shift-2)
CONIC SECTIONS 101

110. Let C be the locus of the mirror image of a point on the 115. Consider a hyperbola H : x 2 - 2y 2 = 4. Let the tangent
parabola y2 = 4x with respect to the line y = x. Then the
equation of tangent to C at P(2,1) is : at a point P (4, 6) meet the x-axis at Q and latus rectum
(16-03-2021/Shift-2) at R (x1 , y1 ), x1 > 0. If F is a focus of H which is nearer
(a) x – y = 1 (b) 2x + y = 5 to the point P, then the area of DQFR is equal to.
(c) x + 2y = 4 (d) x + 3y = 5 (18-03-2021/Shift-2)

x 2 y2 7
111. If the points of intersections of the ellipse + =1 (a) 4 6 - 1 (b) -2
16 b 2 6
and the circle x2 + y2 = 4b, b > 4 lie on the curve y2 = 3x2,
then b is equal to (16-03-2021/Shift-2) (c) 4 6 (d) 6 -1
(a) 10 (b) 5
116. A square ABCD has all its vertices on the curve x 2 y 2 = 1.
(c) 12 (d) 6 The midpoints of its sides also lie on the same curve.
112. The locus of the midpoints of the chord of the circle Then, the square of area of ABCD is .................. .
x 2 + y 2 = 25 which is tangent to the hyperbola (18-03-2021/Shift-1)
117. For which of the following curves, the line
x 2 y2
- = 1 is (16-03-2021/Shift-1) x + 3y = 2 3 is the tangent at the point
9 16
(24-02-2021/Shift-2)
2
(a) x 2 + y 2 - 9x 2 - 16y 2 = 0
(a) 2x 2 - 18y 2 = 9 (b) x 2 + 9y 2 = 9
2
(b) x 2 + y 2 - 9x 2 + 16y 2 = 0 2 1
(c) y = x (d) x 2 + y 2 = 7
6 3
2
(c) x 2 + y 2 - 16x 2 + 9y 2 = 0
118. The locus of the mid-point of the line segment joining the
2 focus of the parabola y 2 = 4ax to a moving point of the
(d) x 2 + y 2 - 9x 2 + 144y 2 = 0
parabola, is another parabola whose directrix is
113. If the three normals drawn to the parabola y 2 = 2x pass (24-02-2021/Shift-1)

through the point a, 0 a ¹ 0 , then ‘ a ’ must be greater a

(a) x = (b) x = 0
2
than (16-03-2021/Shift-1)

1 a
(a) - (b) -1 (c) x = - (d) x = a
2 2

119. If the curve x 2 + 2y 2 = 2 intersects the line x + y = 1 at

1
(c) (d) 1 two points P and Q , then the angle subtended by the
2
line segment PQ at the origin is :
114. Let L be a tangent line to the parabola y2 = 4x - 20 at
(25-02-2021/Shift-2)
2 2
x y
(6, 2). If L is also a tangent to the ellipse + = 1, then p æ1ö p æ1ö
2 b (a) + tan -1 ç ÷ (b) + tan -1 ç ÷
2 è 3ø 2 è4ø
the value of b is equal to : (17-03-2021/Shift-2)
(a) 16 (b) 20 p æ1ö p æ1ö
(c) - tan -1 ç ÷ (d) - tan -1 ç ÷
(c) 11 (d) 14 2 è4ø 2 è3ø
CONIC SECTIONS 102

120. A hyperbola passes through the foci of the ellipse 123. The locus of the point of intersection of the lines

x 2 y2 3 kx + ky - 4 3 = 0 and 3x - y - 4 3 k = 0 is a
+ = 1 and its transverse and conjugate axes
25 16
conic, whose eccentricity is _____.
coincide with major and minor axes of the ellipse,
(25-02-2021/Shift-1)
respectively. If the product of their eccentricities is one,
then the equation of the hyperbola is: 124. Let L be a common tangent line to the curves
2 2
(25-02-2021/Shift-2) 4x 2 + 9y 2 = 36 and 2x + 2y = 31.

x 2 y2 Then the square of the slope of the line L is ________.

(a) - =1 (b) x 2 - y 2 = 9
9 16 (26-02-2021/Shift-2)

125. Let the tangent to the parabola S : y 2 = 2x at the point

x 2 y2 x 2 y2
(c) - =1 (d) - =1
9 25 9 4 P 2, 2 meet the x - axis at Q and normal at it meet the

2
parabola S at the point R. Then the area (in sq. units) of
121. A line is common tangent to the circle x - 3 + y 2 = 9
the triangle PQR is equal to: (26-02-2021/Shift-2)
and y 2 = 4x. If the two points of contact a, b and 25
(a) 25 (b)
c, d are distinct and lie in the first quadrant, then 2

2 a + c is equal to: (25-02-2021/Shift-2) 15 35

(c) (d)
2 2
122. A tangent is drawn to the parabola y 2 = 6x which is
perpendicular to the line 2x + y = 1 . Which of the
following points does NOT lie on it?
(25-02-2021/Shift-1)
(a) (0, 3) (b) (4, 5)
(c) (-6, 0) (d) (5, 4)
CONIC SECTIONS 103

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 7. Length of the focal chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax at a
distance p from the vertex is
1. If the line x + my + am2 = 0 touches the parabola
y2 = 4ax, then the point of contact is 2a 2 a3
(a) (b) 2
p p
æ a - 2a ö
(a) (am2, –2am) (b) ç 2 , ÷
èm m ø
4a 3 p3
(c) (–am2, –2am) (d) The line does not touch (c) 2 (d)
p a
2. A hyperbola has centre ' C ' and one focus at P 6,8 . If
8. From the focus of the parabola, y2 = 8x as centre, a circle
its two directrices are 3 x + 4 y + 10 = 0 and is described so that a common chord of the curves is
equidistant from the vertex & focus of the parabola. The
3 x + 4 y - 10 = 0 then CP =
equation of the circle is :
(a) 14 (b) 8
(a) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 9 (b) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 6
(c) 10 (d) 6
(c) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 4 (d) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 18
3. The equation
9. A circle is described whose centre is the vertex and whose
2 2 diameter is three–quarters of the latus rectum of the
x y
- = 1, |r| < 1 represents parabola y2 = 4ax. If PQ is the common chord of the circle
1- r 1+ r
and the parabola and L1 L2 is the latus rectum, then the
(a) an ellipse (b) a hyperbola area of the trapezium PL1 L2Q is
(c) a circle (d) None of these
(a) 3 2 a2 (b) 2 2 a2
4. The equation 9x2 – 16y2 – 18x + 32y – 151 = 0 represents a
hyperbola - æ 2+ 2 ö 2
(a) The length of the transverse axis is 4 (c) 4 a2 (d) çç ÷÷ a
è 2 ø
(b) Length of latus rectum is 9
10. The condition that the line, x. cosq + y. sin q =p touches
21 11 the parabola, y2 = 4a (x + a) is :
(c) Equation of directrix is x = and x = -
5 5
(a) a – p cos q = 0 (b) a + p cos q = 0
(d) None of these (c) a cos q – p = 0 (d) a cos q + p = 0
5. The length of the side of an equilateral triangle inscribed 11. If the distance of 2 points P and Q on parabola y2 = 4ax
in the parabola, y2 = 4x so that one of its angular point is from the focus are 4 and 9 respectively, then the distance
at the vertex is : of the point of intersection of tangents at P and Q from the
(a) 8 3 (b) 6 3 focus is
(a) 8 (b) 6
(c) 4 3 (d) 2 3 (c) 5 (d) 13
6. The points (s) on the parabola y2 = 4x which are closest 12. AB, AC are tangents to a parabola y2 = 4ax. p1, p2 and
to the circle : p3 are the lengths of the perpendiculars from A, B and C
x2 + y2 – 24y + 128 = 0 is/are respectively to any tangent to the curve expect at points
B and C, then p2, p1, p3 are in :
(a) (0, 0) (b) (2, 2 2 )
(a) A.P. (b) G.P.
(c) (4, 4) (d) none of these (c) H.P. (d) none of these
CONIC SECTIONS 104

13. From an external point P, pair of tangent lines are drawn 21. The normal chord at a point 't' on the parabola
to the parabola, y2 = 4x. If q1 and q2 are the inclinations y2 = 4ax subtends a right angle at the vertex. Then t² is
of these tangents with the axis of x such that, equal to :
p (a) 3 (b) 1
q1 + q 2 = , then the locus of P is :
4 (c) 4 (d) 2
(a) x – y + 1 = 0 (b) x + y – 1 = 0 22. If the normals at two points P, Q of the parabola,
(c) x – y – 1 = 0 (d) x + y + 1 = 0 y2 = 4x intersect at a third point R on the parabola, then
14. The equation of common tangent to the parabola, the product of the ordinates of P & Q is :

y2 = 2x and x2 = 16y is : (a) 4 (b) 6

Ax + By + C = 0, where A, B, C Î N, such that their sum (c) 16 (d) 8

is least then A = ____ , B = ____ , C = _____ : 23. If P, Q, R are three co-normal points on the parabola
(a) 1, 2, 2 (b) 2, 2, 1 y2 = 4ax then the centroid of the triangle PQR always
lies on :
(c) 2, 1, 2 (d) none of these
15. If the straight line x + y = 1 is a normal to the parabola (a) the x-axis
x2 = ay, then the value of a is (b) the y-axis
(a) 4/3 (b) 1/2 (c) the line y = x
(c) 3/4 (d) 1/4 (d) the directrix of the parabola
16. Which of the following lines, is a normal to the parabola
y2 = 16 x 24. Tangents are drawn to y 2 = 4 a x from a variable point P

(a) y = x – 11 cos q – 3 cos 3 q moving on x + a = 0, then the locus of foot of perpendicular

(b) y = x – 11 cos q – cos 3 q drawn from P on the chord of contact of P is
(c) y = (x – 11) cos q + cos 3 q (a) y = 0 (b) x - a 2
+ y2 = a2
(d) y = (x – 11) cos q – cos 3 q
2
17. The equation of the other normal to the parabola (c) x - a + y2 = 0 (d) y x - a = 0
y2 = 4ax which passes through the intersection of those at
(4a, –4a) & (9a, –6a) is : 25. A ray of light travels along a line y = 4 and strikes the
surface of a curve y2 = 4(x + y) then equation of the line
(a) 5x – y + 115a = 0 (b) 5x + y – 135a = 0
along reflected ray travel is
(c) 5x – y – 115a = 0 (d) 5x + y + 115 = 0
(a) x = 0 (b) x = 2
18. If two normals to a parabola y2 = 4ax intersect at right
(c) x + y = 4 (d) 2x + y = 4
angles then the chord joining their feet passes through
a fixed point whose co-ordinates are : 26. The circles on focal radii of a parabola as diameter touch
(a) (–2a, 0) (b) (a, 0) (a) the tangent at the vertex (b) the axis
(c) (2a, 0) (d) none of these (c) the directrix (d) none of these
19. If the normal to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the point 27. If M is the foot of the perpendicular from a point P of a
(at2, 2at) cuts the parabola again at (aT2, 2aT), then parabola y2 = 4ax to its directrix and SPM is an equilateral
(a) – 2 £ T £ 2 (b) T Î (–¥, –8) È (8, ¥) triangle, where S is the focus, then SP is equal to :
2
(c) T < 8 (d) T2 ³ 8 (a) a (b) 2a
20. A normal is drawn to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the point (c) 3a (d) 4a

(2a, –2 2 a) then the length of the normal chord, is 28. The locus of the middle points of the focal chords of the
parabola, y2 = 4x is :
(a) 4 2a (b) 6 2 a (a) y2 = x – 1 (b) y2 = 2(x – 1)
(c) 4 3 a (d) 6 3 a (c) y2 = 2(1 – x) (d) none of these
CONIC SECTIONS 105

29. The locus of the foot of the perpendiculars drawn from 35. If a + b = 3p then the chord joining the points a and b for
the vertex on a variable tangent to the parabola y2 = 4ax
x2 y2
is : the hyperbola - = 1 passes through
a2 b 2
(a) x (x2 + y2) + ay2 = 0 (b) y (x2 + y2) + ax2 = 0
(a) focus
(c) x (x2 – y2) + ay2 = 0 (d) none of these
(b) centre
30. The eccentricity of the conic
(c) one of the end points of the transverse axis
4(2y – x – 3) 2 – 9 (2x + y – 1) 2 = 80 is
(d) one of the end points of the conugates axis

3 13 36. The locus of the mid point of the chords of the circle
(a) (b)
13 3 x 2 + y 2 = a2, which are tangent to the hyperbola

(c) 13 (d) 3 x2 y2
- = 1 is
a2 b2
x 2 y2 (a) x2 + y2 = a2 – b2
31. The distance of a point on the ellipse + = 1 from
6 2
(b) (x2 + y2)2 = a2 – b2
the centre is 2. The eccentric angle of the point is (c) (x2 + y2)2 = a2x2 – b2y2

p (d) (x2 + y2)2 = a2 + b2

(a) ± (b) ± p
2 37. The area of a triangle formed by the lines x – y = 0, x + y = 0 and
any tangent to the hyperbola x2 – y2 = a2 is
p 3p p (a) a2 (b) 2a2
(c) , (d) ±
2 4 4
(c) 3a2 (d) 4a2
38. The equation of the common tangents to the parabola
a2
32. If tan q1 tan q2 = – , then the chord joining two point y2 = 8x and the hyperbola 3x2 – y2 = 3 is-
b2
(a) 2x ± y + 1 = 0 (b) x ± y + 1 = 0

x2 y2 (c) x ± 2y + 1 = 0 (d) x ± y + 2 = 0
q1 and q2 on the ellipse 2
+ 2
= 1 will subtend a right
a b 39. The triangle PQR of area 'A' is inscribed in the parabola
y2 = 4ax such that the P lies at the vertex of the parabola
angle at
and the base QR is a focal chord. The modulus of the
(a) Focus (b) Centre difference of the ordinates of the points Q and R is :
(c) End of the major axes (d) End of minor axes
A A
33. The equation of tangents to the ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 144 (a) (b)
2a a
which pass through the point (2, 3)
(a) y = 3 (b) x + y = 2 2A 4A
(c) (d)
a a
(c) x – y = 3 (d) y = 3; x + y = 5
34. An ellipse with major axis 4 and minor axis 2 touches both 40. The ends of a line segment are P (1, 3) and Q (1, 1). R is a
the coordinate axis, then locus of its centre is point on the line segment PQ such that PR : QR = 1 : l. If R
is an interior point of a parabola y2 = 4x, then
(a) x 2 - y 2 = 5 (b) x 2 .y 2 = 5
3
(a) l Î (0, 1) (b) l Î æç – , 1 ö÷
2 è 5 ø
x
(c) + y2 = 5 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 5
4
æ1 3ö
(c) l Î ç , ÷ (d) none of these
è2 5ø
CONIC SECTIONS 106

41. Through the vertex O of the parabola y2 = 4ax two chords 47. From the point (15, 12) three normals are drawn to the
OP & OQ are drawn and the circles on OP & OQ as diameter parabola y2 = 4x, then centroid of triangle formed by three
intersect in R. If q1 , q2 & f are the angles made with the co–normal points is
axis by the tangents at P & Q on the parabola & by OR
16
then cot q1 + cot q2 is equal to (a) æç , 0 ö÷ (b) (4, 0)
è3 ø
(a) –2 tan f (b) – 2 tan (p – f)
(c) 0 (d) 2 cot f
æ 26 ö
42. T is a point on the tangent to a parabola y2 = 4ax at its (c) ç , 0 ÷ (d) (6, 0)
è 3 ø
point P. TL and TN are the perpendiculars on the focal
radius SP and the directrix of the parabola respectively. 48. Normals at three points P, Q, R at the parabola y2 = 4ax
Then : meet in a point A and S be its focus, if |SP|. |SQ| . |SR| =
(a) SL = 2 (TN) (b) 3(SL) = 2 (TN) l(SA)2, then l is equal to
(c) SL = TN (d) 2 (SL) = 3 (TN) (a) a3 (b) a2
43. Two tangents to the parabola y2 = 4ax make angle a1 (c) a (d) 1
and a2 with the x-axis. The locus of their point of 49. A tangent to the parabola x2 + 4ay = 0 cuts the parabola
cot a1 x2 = 4by at A and B the locus of the mid point of AB is :
intersection if = 2 is :
cot a 2 (a) (a + 2b) x2 = 4 b2y (b) (b + 2a) x2 = 4 b2y
(c) (a + 2b) y2 = 4 b2x (d) (b + 2x) x2 = 4 a2y
(a) 2y2 = 9 ax (b) 4y2 = 9 ax
50. Tangent are drawn from the points o n the line
(c) y2 = 9 ax (d) none of these
x – y – 5 = 0 to x2 + 4y2 = 4, then all the chords of
44. If A & B are points on the parabola y2 = 4ax with vertex O
contact pass through a fixed point, whose coordinates
such that OA perpendicular to OB & having lengths
are
4/ 3 4 /3
1 r r
2
r1 & r2 respectively, then the value of 2/3 2/3
is æ4 1ö æ4 1ö
r
1 +r2 (a) ç , - ÷ (b) ç , ÷
è5 5ø è5 5ø
(a) 16a2 (b) a2
(c) 4a (d) None of these æ 4 1ö
(c) ç - , ÷ (d) None of these
è 5 5ø
45. The two parabola y2 = 4ax and y2 = 4c (x –b) cannot have a
common normal, other than the axis unless, if 51. Let P(a secq, b tanq) and Q (a sec f, b tan f), where

a –b b p x 2 y2
(a) >2 (b) a – c > 2 q+f= , be two points on the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 If
b 2 a b
(h, k) is the point of the intersection of the normals at P
b and Q, then k is equal to
(c) a + b > 2 (d) None of these

46. If the normals drawn from any point to the parabola a 2 + b2 æ a 2 + b2 ö

(a) (b) - çç ÷
÷
y2 = 4ax cut the line x = 2a in points whose ordinates are in a è a ø
arithmetic progression, then tangents of the angles which
the normals makes with the axis, are
a 2 + b2 æ a 2 + b2 ö
(a) in A.P. (b) in G.P. (c) (d) - çç ÷
÷
b è b ø
(c) in H.P. (d) None of these
CONIC SECTIONS 107

Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option] 58. Consider a circle with its centre lying on the focus of the
parabola, y2 = 2 px (p > 0) such that it touches the directrix
52. Let V be the vertex and L be the latus rectum of the parabola of the parabola. Then a point of intersection of the circle
x2 = 2y + 4x – 4. Then the equation of the parabola whose & the parabola is :
vertex is at V, latus rectum is L/2 and axis is perpendicular
to the axis of the given parabola. æp ö æp ö
(a) y2 = x – 2 (b) y2 = x – 4 (a) ç , p ÷ (b) ç ,-p ÷
è2 ø è2 ø
(c) y2 = 2 – x (d) y2 = 4 – x
53. If equation of tangent at P, Q and vertex A of a parabola are æ p ö æ p ö
(c) ç - , p ÷ (d) ç - ,-p ÷
3x + 4y – 7 = 0, 2x + 3y – 10 = 0 and x – y = 0 respectively, è 2 ø è 2 ø
then
(a) focus is (4, 5) x2 y2
59. If P is a point of the ellipse + = 1, whose foci are S
a 2 b2
(b) length of latus rectum is 2 2
and S’. Let ÐPSS’ = a and ÐPS’S= b, then
(c) axis is x + y – 9 = 0
(a) PS + PS’ = 2a, if a > b
9 9
(d) vertex is æç , ö÷ (b) PS + PS’ = 2b, if a < b
è2 2ø
a b 1- e
54. The locus of the mid point of the focal radii of a variable (c) tan tan =
2 2 1+ e
point moving on the parabola, y2 = 4ax is a parabola whose
(a) Latus rectum is half the latus rectum of the original
a b a2 - b2
parabola (d) tan tan = [ a - a 2 - b 2 ] when a > b
2 2 b2
(b) Vertex is (a/2, 0)
(c) Directrix is y–axis 60. If the chord through the points whose eccentric angles
(d) Focus has the co–ordinates (a, 0) x2 y2
are q & f on the ellipse, + = 1 passes through a
55. The equation, 3x2 + 4y2 – 18x + 16y + 43 = c. a 2 b2
(a) cannot represent a real pair of straight lines for any focus, then the value of tan (q/2) tan (f/2) is :
value of c
(b) represents an ellipse, if c > 0 e +1 e -1
(a) (b)
e -1 e +1
(c) represents empty set, if c < 0
(d) a point, if c = 0 1+ e 1- e
56. If (5, 12) and (24, 7) are the foci of a conic passing through (c) (d)
1- e 1+ e
the origin then the eccentricity of conic is
Numerical Value Type Questions
(a) 386 / 12 (b) 386 / 13
61. The equation to the parabola whose axis parallel to the y-
(c) 386 / 25 (d) 386 / 38
axis and which passes through the points (0, 4), (1, 9) and
(4, 5). If latus rectum of parabola is l, then the value of
x2 y2
57. If foci of - = 1 coincide with the foci of 361l must be
a2 b2
62. The distance between the focus and directrix of the conic
x2 y2
+ = 1 and eccentricity of the hyperbola is 2, then 2
25 9 3x - y = 48 x + 3y is :

(a) a2 + b2 = 16 63. The locus of a point that divides a chord of slope 2 of the
(b) there is no director circle to the hyperbola parabola y2 = 4x internally in the ratio 1 : 2 is a parabola. If
(c) centre of the director circle is (0, 0) the vertex of parabola is (l, m), then the value of 729 (l +
m)2 must be
(d) length of latus rectum of the hyperbola = 12
CONIC SECTIONS 108

2 2
71. Assertion : In a triangle ABC, if base BC is fixed and
64. Tangents are drawn to the ellipse x  y  1 at ends of perimeter of the triangle is constant, then vertex A moves
9 5 on an ellipse.
latus rectum. If the area of quadrilateral formed is  sq unit, Reason : If sum of distances of a point ‘P’ from two fixed
then the value of must be points is constant then locus of ‘P’ is a real ellipse.
65. If the product of slopes of tangents drawn from point (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
x2
P(9, k) to ellipse  y 2  1 is equal to 2. Then the 72. Assertion : Feet of perpendiculars drawn from foci of an
9
ellipse 4x 2 + y2 = 16 on the line 2 3 x + y = 8 lie on the
value of k2 is
circle x2 + y2 = 16.
x 2 y2 Reason : If perpendicular are drawn from foci of an ellipse
66. If common tangent of x 2  y 2  r 2 and   1 forms to its any tangent then feet of these perpendiculars lie on
16 9
director circle of the ellipse.
a square then find its area.
(a) A (b) B
67. If a circle cuts a rectangular hyperbola xy = c2 in A, B, C (c) C (d) D
and D and the parameters of these four points be t1, t2, t3
and t4 respectively, then the value of 16t1t2t3t4 must be Match the Following

Assertion & Reason Each question has two columns. Four options are given
representing matching of elements from Column-I and
(A) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is a Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
correct explanation for ASSERTION. to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option
corresponding to the correct matching.
(B) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is not
a correct explanation for ASSERTION. 73. Column – I Column – II
(C) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is false. (A) Area of a triangle formed by the (P) 8
(D) If ASSERTION is false, REASON is true. tangents drawn from a point
(–2, 2) to the parabola y2 = 4(x + y)
68. Assertion : If straight line x = 8 meets the parabola y2 = 8x
at P & Q then PQ substends a right angle at the origin. and their corresponding chord
of contact is
Reason : Double ordinate equal to twice of latus rectum of
a parabola subtands a right angle at the vertex. (B) Length of the latus rectum of (Q) 4 3
(a) A (b) B the conic 25{(x – 2)2 + (y – 3)2} =
(c) C (d) D (3x + 4y – 6)2 is
69. Assertion : The perpendicular bisector of the line segment (C) If focal distance of a point on (R) 4
joining the point (–a, 2 at) and (a, 0) is tangent to the parabola the parabola y = x2 – 4 is 25/4
y2 = 4ax, where t  R and points are of the form
Reason : Number of parabolas with a given point as vertex
(± a , b) then value of a + b is
and length of latus rectum equal to 4, is 2.
(a) A (b) B (D) Length of side of an equilateral (S) 24/5
(c) C (d) D triangle inscribed in a parabola
y2 – 2x – 2y – 3 = 0 whose one
70. Assertion : Circumcircle of a triangle formed by the lines x
= 0, x + y + 1 = 0 & x – y + 1 = 0 also passes through the angular point is vertex of the
point (1, 0) parabola, is
Reason : Circumcircle of a triangle formed by three tangents The correct matching is :
of a parabola passes through its focus. (a) (A–R;B–S; C–P; D–Q)
(a) A (b) B (b) (A–S;B–R; C–P; D–Q)
(c) C (d) D (c) (A–Q;B–S; C–P; D–R)
(d) (A–P;B–S; C–P; D–Q)
CONIC SECTIONS 109

74. Column – I Column – II 76. The length of smallest focal chord of this curve C is :
(A) If the mid point of a chord of (P) 6 1 1
(a) (b)
2 2 12a 4a
x y
the ellipse + = 1 is
16 25 1 1
(c) (d)
(0, 3), then length of the 16a 8a
77. The curve C is symmetric about the line :
4k
chord is , then k is
5 3 3
(a) y = – (b) y =
(B) If the line y = x + l touches (Q) 8 2 2
the ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 144, 3 3
(c) x = – (d) x =
then the sum of values of l is 2 2
(C) If the distance between a (R) 0
Using the following passage, solve Q.78 to Q.80
focus and corresponding
directix of an ellipse be 8 Passage – 2

and the eccentricity be 1/2, If P is a variable point and F1 and F2 are two fixed points such
then length of the minor that |PF1 – PF2| = 2a. Then the locus of the point P is a
hyperbola, with points F1 and F2 as the two focii (F1F2 > 2a). If
k
axis is , then 2k is x2 y2
3 - = 1 is a hyperbola, then its conjugate hyperbola is
a 2 b2
(D) Sum of distances of a (S) 16
x2 y2
point on the ellipse - = -1. Let P(x, y) is a variable point such that
a2 b2
x2 y2
+ = 1 from the foci | ( x - 1) 2 + ( y - 2) 2 - ( x - 5)2 + ( y - 5)2 | = 3.
9 16
78. If the locus of the point P represents a hyperbola of
The correct matching is : eccentricity e, then the eccentricity e’ of the corresponding
(a) (A–Q; B–Q; C–P; D–S) conjugate hyperbola is :
(b) (A–Q; B–R; C–S; D–Q) 5 4
(c) (A–S; B–R; C–Q; D–P) (a) (b)
3 3
(d) (A–P; B–Q; C–R; D–S)
5 3
Using the following passage, solve Q.75 to Q.77 (c) (d)
4 7
Passage – 1 79. Locus of intersection of two perpendicular tangents to
the given hyperbola is
If the locus of the circumcentre of a variable triangle having
2
sides y–axis, y = 2 and lx + my = 1, where (l,m) lies on the 7 55
(a) (x – 3)2 + æç y - ö÷ =
parabola y2 = 4ax is a curve C, then è 2ø 4
75. Coordinates of the vertex of this curve C is
2
7 25
(b) (x – 3)2 + æç y - ö÷ =
3 æ 3ö
(a) æç 2a, ö÷ (b) ç -2a, - ÷ è 2 ø 4
è 2ø è 2ø
2
æ 7ö 7
æ 3ö æ 3ö (c) (x – 3)2 + ç y - ÷ =
(c) ç -2a, ÷ (d) ç -2a, - ÷ è 2ø 4
è 2ø è 2ø
(d) none of these
CONIC SECTIONS 110

83. Let ABC be an equilateral triangle inscribed in the circle

æ 7ö
80. If origin is shifted to point ç 3, ÷ and the axes are rotated x2 + y2 = a2. Suppose perpendiculars from A, B, C to the
è 2ø
through an angle q in clockwise sense so that equation of x2 y2
major axis of the ellipse + = 1, (a > b) meets the
given of given hyperbola changes to the standard form a2 b2
ellipse respectively at P, Q, R so that P, Q, R lie on the same
x2 y2
- = 1, then q is : side of the major axis as A, B, C respectively. Prove that,
a 2 b2
the normals to the ellipse drawn at the points P, Q and R
are concurrent.
æ4ö æ3ö
(a) tan–1 ç ÷ (b) tan–1 ç ÷ 84. Let C1 and C2 be, respectively, the parabola x2 = y – 1 and
è3ø è4ø
y2 = x – 1. Let P be any point on C1 and Q be any point on
C2. Let P1 and Q1 be the reflections of P and Q, respectively,
æ5ö æ 3ö
(c) tan–1 ç ÷ (d) tan–1 ç ÷ with respect to the line y = x. Prove that P1 lies on C2, Q1
è 3ø è5ø lies on C1 and PQ ³ min {PP1, QQ1}. Hence or otherwise,
determine points P0 and Q0 on the parabolas C1 and C2
Text
respectivley such the P 0Q0 £ PQ for all pairs of points
81. Through the vertex O of parabola y2 = 4x, chords OP and (P, Q) with P on C1 and Q on C2.
OQ are drawn at right angles to one another. Show that for
all positions of P, PQ cuts the axis of the parabola at a fixed x2 y2
85. Let P be a point on the ellipse + = 1, 0 < b < a. Let
point. Also find the locus of the middle point of PQ. a2 b2
82. If for an ellipse, focus is (0, 0), corresponding directrix is the line parallel to y–axis passing through P meet the circle
x2 + y2 = a2 at the point Q such that P and Q are on the
1 same side of x–axis. For two positive real numbers r and s,
x + y - 1 = 0 and eccentricity is . Then find the vertex
3 find the locus of the point R on PQ such that PR : RQ = r : s
between this focus and directrix as P varies over the ellipse.
CONIC SECTIONS 111

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 8. The focal chord to y2 = 16x is tangent to (x – 6)2 + y2 = 2,
then the possible values of the slope of this chord, are
1. If x + y = k is normal to y2 = 12x, then k is (2000)
(2003)
(a) 3 (b) 9
(a) {–1, 1} (b) {–2, 2}
(c) –9 (d) –3
2. If the line x – 1 = 0 is the directrix of the parabola (c) {–2, 1/2} (d) {2, –1/2}

y2 – kx + 8 = 0, then one of the values of k is (2000)

x2 y2
(a) 1/8 (b) 8 9. For hyperbola - = 1, which of the
cos 2 a sin 2 a
(c) 4 (d) 1/4
following remains constant with change in ‘a’ ? (2003)
3. The equation of the common tangent touching the circle
(x – 3)2 + y2 = 9 and the parabola y2 = 4x above the (a) abscissae of vertices (b) abscissae of foci
x–axis is (2001) (c) eccentricity (d) directrix

(a) 3 y = 3x + 1 (b) 3 y = – (x + 3) 10. If the line 2x + 6 y = 2 touches the hyperbola

(c) 3 y=x+3 (d) 3 y = – (3x + 1) x2 – 2y2 = 4, then the point of contact is (2004)

4. The equation of the directrix of the parabola (a) (-2, 6 ) (b) (-5, 2 6 )
y2 + 4y + 4x + 2 = 0 is (2001)
(a) x = – 1 (b) x = 1 æ1 1 ö
(c) çç , ÷÷ (d) (4,- 6 )
(c) x = – 3/2 (d) x = 3/2 è2 6 ø
5. The locus of the mid point of the line segment joining the
focus to a moving point on the parabola y2 = 4ax is another 11. Axis of a parabola is y = x and vertex and focus are at a
parabola with directrix (2002)
distance 2 and 2 2 respectively from the origin. Then
(a) x = – a (b) x = – a/2 equation of the parabola is (2006)
(c) x = 0 (d) x = a/2
(a) (x – y)2 = 8 (x + y – 2)
6. The equation of the common tangent to the curves
(b) (x + y)2 = 2 (x + y – 2)
y2 = 8x and xy = – 1 is (2002)
(a) 3y = 9x + 2 (b) y = 2x + 1 (c) (x – y)2 = 4 (x + y – 2)

(c) 2y = x + 8 (d) y = x + 2 (d) (x + y)2 = 2 (x – y + 2)

x2 x 2 y2
7. Tangent is drawn to ellipse + y2 = 1 at 12. If e1 is the eccentricity of the ellipse + = 1 and e2 is
27 16 25
the eccentricity of the hyperbola passing through the foci
( 3 3 cosq, sinq) (where q Î(0, p/2)).
of the ellipse and e1e2 = 1, then equation of the hyperbola
Then, the value of q such that the sum of intercepts on is (2006)
axes made by this tangent is minimum, is (2003)

p p x 2 y2 x 2 y2
(a) - =1 (b) - = -1
(a) (b) 9 16 16 9
3 6

p p x 2 y2
(c) (d) (c) - =1 (d) None of these
8 4 9 25
CONIC SECTIONS 112

13. A hyperbola, having the transverse axis of length 2sin ,

is confocal with the ellipse 3x2 + 4y2 = 12. Then its equation x 2 y2
18. Let P (6, 3) be a point on the hyperbola   1 . If the
is (2007) a 2 b2
(a) x2cosec2 – y2sec2 = 1 normal at the point P intersects the x-axis at (9, 0), then the
(b) x2sec2 – y2 cosec2 = 1 eccentricity of the hyperbola is (2011)

(c) x2sin2 – y2 cos2 = 1

(a) 5 (b) 3
(d) x2 cos2 – y2 sin2 = 1 2 2
14. Consider a branch of the hyperbola
(c) 2 (d) 3
x 2 – 2y2 – 2 2 x  4 2 y – 6 = 0
19. The common tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 2 and the
with vertex at the point A. Let B be one of the end points parabola y2 = 8x touch the circle at the points P, Q and the
of its latus rectum. If C is the focus of the hyperbola nearest
parabola at the points R, S. Then the area of the
to the point A, then the area of the triangle ABC is
quadrilateral PQRS is (2014)
(2008)
(a) 3 (b) 6
2 3 (c) 9 (d) 15
(a) 1 – sq unit (b) – 1 sq unit
3 2 20. If a chord, which is not a tangent, of the parabola y2 = 16x
has the equation 2x + y = p, and midpoint (h, k), then
2 3 which of the following is(are) possible value(s) of p, h
(c) 1 + sq unit (d) + 1 sq unit
3 2 and k ? (2017)
15. The line passing through the extremity A of the major axis (a) p = 2, h = 3, k = – 4
and extremity B of the minor axis of the ellipse (b) p = 5, h = 4, k = –3
x2 + 9y2 = 9 meets its auxiliary circle at the point M. Then
the area of the triangle with vertices at A, M and the origin (c) p = –1, h = 1, k = –3
O is (2009) (d) p = –2, h = 2, k = –4

31 29 21. Let a, b and  be positive numbers. Suppose P is an end

(a) (b)
10 10 point of the latus rectum of the parabola y 2  4 x, and

21 27 x2 y2
(c) (d) suppose the ellipse   1 passes through the point
10 10 a 2 b2
16. The normal at a point P on the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 16 meets P. If the tangents to the parabola and the ellipse at the
the x–axis at Q. If M is the mid point of the line segment point P are perpendicular to each other, then the
PQ, then the locus of M intersects the latus rectum of the
eccentricity of the ellipse is (2020)
given ellipse at the points (2009)
1 1
 3 5 2  3 5 19  (a) (b)
(a)   ,  (b)   , 2 2
 2 7   2 4 

1 2
(c) (d)
 1  4 3  3 5
(c)   2 3 ,   (d)   2 3 , 
 7
 7 
Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]
17. Let (x, y) be any point on the parabola y2 = 4x. Let P be the
point that divides the line segment from (0, 0) to 22. Equation of common tangent of y = x2, y = – x2 + 4x – 4 is
(x, y) in the ratio 1 : 3. Then, the locus of P is (2011) (2006)
(a) x2 = y (b) y2 = 2x (a) y = 4 (x – 1) (b) y = 0
(c) y2 = x (d) x2 = 2y (c) y = – 4 (x – 1) (d) y = – 30x – 50
CONIC SECTIONS 113

23. Let P(x1, y1) and Q(x2, y2), y1 < 0, y2 < 0, be the end points
x 2 y2
of the latus rectum of the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 4. The equation 28. Let the eccentricity of the hyperbola - = 1 be
a 2 b2
of parabola with latus rectum PQ are (2008)
reciprocal to that of the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 4. If the hyperbola
(a) x 2 + 2 3y = 3 + 3 passes through a focus of the ellipse, then (2011)

(b) x 2 - 2 3 y = 3 + 3 x 2 y2
(a) the equation of the hyperbola is - =1
3 2
(c) x 2 + 2 3y = 3 - 3
(b) a focus of the hyperbola is (2, 0)

(d) x 2 - 2 3 y = 3 - 3
5
(c) the eccentricity of the hyperbola is
24. The tangent PT and the normal PN to the parabola 3
y2 = 4ax at a point P on it meet its axis at points T and N,
(d) the equation of the hyperbola is x2 – 3y2 = 3
respectively. The locus of the centroid of the triangle PTN
is a parabola whose (2009) 29. Let P and Q be distinct points on the parabola y2 = 2x
such that a circle with PQ as diameter passes through the
æ 2a ö vertex O of the parabola. If P lies in the first quadrant and
(a) vertex is ç ,0 ÷ (b) directrix is x = 0
è 3 ø the area of the triangle DOPQ is 3 2, then which of the
following is (are) the coordinates of P ? (2015)
2a
(c) latus rectum is (d) focus is (a, 0)
3 (a) 4, 2 2 (b) 9,3 2

25. An ellipse intersects the hyperbola 2x 2 – 2y 2 = 1

æ1 1 ö
orthogonally. The eccentricity of the ellipse is reciprocal (c) ç , ÷ (d) 1, 2
è4 2ø
to that of the hyperbola. If the axes of the ellipse are along
the coordinate axes, then (2009) 30. Let E1 and E2 be two ellipses whose centres are at the
(a) Equation of ellipse is x2 + 2y2 = 2 origin. The major axes of E1 and E2 lie along the x-axis and
the y-axis, respectively. Let S be the circle x2 + (y - 1)2 = 2.
(b) The foci of ellipse are (± 1, 0)
The straight line x + y = 3 touches the curves S, E1 and E2
(c) Equation of ellipse is x2 + 2y2 = 4
2 2
(d) The foci of ellipse are (± 2 , 0) at P, Q and R respectively. Support that PQ = PR = .
3
26. Let A and B be two distinct points on the parabola If e1 and e2 are the eccentricities of E1 and E2, respectively,
y2 = 4x. If the axis of the parabola touches a circle of radius then the correct expression(s) is (are) (2015)
r having AB as its diameter, then the slope of the line
joining A and B can be (2010) 2 2 43
(a) e1 + e 2 =
40
1 1
(a) - (b)
r r 7
(b) e1e 2 =
2 10
2
(c) 2 (d) -
r r
2 2 5
(c) e1 - e 2 =
27. y2
Let L be a normal to the parabola = 4x. If L passes 8
through the point (9, 6), then L is given by (2011)
(a) y – x + 3 = 0 (b) y + 3x – 33 = 0 3
(d) e1e 2 =
(c) y + x – 15 = 0 (d) y – 2x + 12 = 0 4
CONIC SECTIONS 114

31. Consider the hyperbola H : x2 – y2 = 1 and a circle S with (c) The area of the region bounded by the ellipse between
centre N(x2, 0). Suppose that H and S touch each other at
1 p-2
a point P(x1, y1) with x1 > 1 and y1 > 0. The common tangent the lines x= and x = 1 is
to H and S at P intersects the x-axis at point M. If (l, m) is 2 4 2
the centroid of the triangle PMN, then the correct (d) The area of the region bounded by the ellipse between
expression(s) is (are) : (2015)
1 p-2
dl 1 the lines x= and x=1 is
(a) dx = 1 - 3x 2 for x1 > 1 2 16 2
1 1
34. Define the collections {E1, E2, E3…………..} of ellipses and
dm x1 {R1, R2, R3…………..} of rectangles as follows:
(b) dx = for x1 > 1
1 3 x12 -1
x2 y2
E1 : + = 1;
9 4
dl 1
(c) dx = 1 + 3x 2 for x1 > 1 R1: rectangle of largest area with sides parallel to the axes,
1 1
inscribed in E1:
dm 1
(d) = for y1 > 0 x2 y 2
dy1 3 En: ellipse + = 1 of largest area inscribed in Rn–1,
an2 bn2
32. Let P be the point on the parabola y2 = 4x which is at the
n>1
shortest distance from the center S of the circle x2 + y2 – 4x
– 16y + 64 = 0. Let Q be the point on the circle dividing the Rn: rectangle of largest area, with sides parallel to the
line segment SP internally. Then (2016) axes, inscribed in En, n >1
Then which of the following options is/are correct ?
(a) SP = 2 5
(2019)
(b) SQ : QP = 5 +1 : 2 (a) The eccentricities of E18 and E19 are NOT equal
(c) the x-intercept of the normal to the parabola at P is 6 1
(b) The length of latus rectum of E9 is
1 6
(d) the slope of the tangent to the circle at Q is
2 N

33. Consider two straight lines, each of which is tangent to (c) å (area of R ) < 24 , for each positive integer N
n -1
n

1
both the circle x 2 + y 2 = and the parabola y2 = 4x. Let
2 5
(d) The distance of a focus from the centre in E9 is
these lines intersect at the point Q. Consider the ellipse 32
whose center is at the origin O(0,0) and whose semi-major
35. Let a and b be positive real numbers such that a >1 and
axis is OQ. If the length of the minor axis of this ellipse is
b < a. Let P be a point in the first quadrant that lies on the
2, then which of the following statement(s) is (are)
x2 y2
TRUE? (2018) hyperbola - = 1. Suppose the tangent to the
a 2 b2
1 hyperbola at P passes through the point (1,0), and
(a) For the ellipse, the eccentricity is and the length
2 suppose the normal to the hyperbola at P cuts off equal
intercepts on the coordinate axes. Let D denote the area
of the latus rectum is 1
of the triangle formed by the tangent at P, the normal
1 at P and the x-axis. If e denotes the eccentricity of the
(b) For the ellipse, the eccentricity is and the length of hyperbola, then which of the following statements is/are
2
TRUE? (2020)
1
the latus rectum is (a) 1 < e < 2 (b)
2 2 <e < 2

(c) D = a 4 (d) D = b 4
CONIC SECTIONS 115

36. Let denote the parabola y2 = 8x. Let P = (–2, 4) and let Q
and Q’ be two distinct points on E such that the line PQ x 2 y2
42. Let E be the ellipse + = 1 . For any three distinct
and PQ’ are tangents to E. Let F be the focus of E. Then 16 9
which of the following statements is (are) TRUE?
(2021) points P,Q and Q’on E, let M(P, Q) be the mid-point of the

(a) The triangle PFQ is a right-angled triangle line segment joining P and Q, and M(P,Q’) be the mid-

(b) The triangle QPQ’ is a right-angled triangle point of the line segment joining P and Q’. Then the
maximum possible value of the distance between M(P, Q)
(c) The distance between P and F is 5 2
and M(P, Q’), as P, Q and Q’ vary on E, is _____. (2021)
(d) F lies on the line joining Q and Q’
Match the Following
Numerical Value Type Questions

Each question has two columns. Four options are given

x 2 y2
37. The line 2x + y = 1 is tangent to the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 . representing matching of elements from Column-I and
a b
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
If this line passes through the point of intersection of the
nearest directrix and the x-axis, then the eccentricity of the to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option
hyperbola is..... (2010) corresponding to the correct matching.
38. Consider the parabola y2 = 8x. Let D1 be the area of the
triangle formed by the end points of its latus–rectum and x2 y2
43. Let H : - = 1, where a > b > 0, be a hyperbola in
1 a2 b2
the point P æç , 2 ö÷ on the parabola and D2 be the area of
è2 ø
the xy-plane whose conjugate axis LM subtends an angle
the triangle formed by drawing tangents at P and at the
of 60° at one of its vertices N. Let the area of the triangle
D
end points of the latus–rectum. Then 1 is.... (2011)
D2 LMN be 4 3 . (2018)

39. If the normal of the parabola y2 = 4x drawn at the end (A) The length of the conjugate axis of H is (P) 8
points of its latus rectum are tangents to the circle
(x - 3)2 + (y + 2)2 = r2, then the value of r2 is (2015) 4
(B) The eccentricity of H is (Q)
40. 2
Let the curve C be the mirror image of the parabola y = 4x 3
with respect to the line x + y + 4 = 0. If A and B are the
points of intersection of C with the line y = -5, then the
distance between A and B is (2015) 2
(C) The distance between the foci of H is (R)
3
x 2 y2
41. Suppose that the foci of the ellipse + =1 are (f1, 0)
9 5 (D) The length of the latus rectum of H is (S) 4
and (f2, 0) where f1 > 0 and f2 < 0. Let P1 and P2 be two
The correct matching is :
parabolas with a common vertex at (0, 0) and with foci at
(f1, 0) and (2f2, 0), respectively. Let T1 be a tangent to P1 (a) (A-S, B-R, C-P, D-Q )
which passes through (2f2, 0) and T2 be a tangent to P2
which passes through (f1, 0). If m1 is the slope of T1 and m2 (b) (A-Q, B-P, C-Q, D-S )

æ 1 (c) (A-S, B-Q, C-Q, D-P )

2ö
is the slope of T2, then the value of ç m 2 + m 2 ÷ is
è 1 ø (d) (A-Q, B-S, C-Q, D-P )

(2015)
CONIC SECTIONS 116

Using the following passage, solve Q.44 and Q.45 Using the following passage, solve Q.48 to Q.50

Passage – 1 Passage – 3

x 2 y2 Columns 1, 2 and 3 contain conics, equations of tangents to the

The circle x2 + y2 – 8x = 0 and hyperbola - =1
9 4 conics and points of contact, respectively.

intersect at the points A and B. (2010) Column 1 Column 2 Column 3

44. Equation of a common tangent with positive slope to the
æ a 2a ö
circle as well as to the hyperbola is (I) x2 + y2 = a2 (i) my = m2x + a (P) ç , ÷
è m2 m ø

(a) 2x - 5 y - 20 = 0 (b) 2x - 5 y + 4 = 0
æ -ma a ö
(II) x2 + a2y2 = a2 (ii) y = mx + a m2 + 1 (Q) çç , ÷÷
(c) 3x – 4y + 8 = 0 (d) 4x – 3y + 4 = 0 2
è m +1 m2 + 1 ø

45. Equation of the circle with AB as its diameter is

(a) x2 + y2 – 12x + 24 = 0 (III) y2 = 4ax (iii) y = mx + a 2 m2 - 1 (R) çç
æ -a 2 m
,
1 ö
÷
2 2 ÷
è a m +1 a 2m2 + 1 ø
(b) x2 + y2 + 12x + 24 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 + 24x – 12 = 0 æ -a 2 m -1 ö
(IV) x2 –a2y2 = a2 (iv) y = mx + a 2m2 + 1 (S) ç
ç 2 2
, ÷
÷
è a m -1 a 2 m2 - 1 ø
(d) x2 + y2 –24x – 12 = 0

(2017)
Using the following passage, solve Q.46 and Q.47

Passage – 2 æ 1ö
48. The tangent to a suitable conic (Column 1) at ç 3, ÷ is
è 2ø
Let F1(x1, 0) and F2(x2, 0), for x1 < 0 and x2 > 0, be the foci

x 2 y2
found to be 3x + 2y = 4, then which of the following
of the ellipse + = 1. Suppose a parabola having
9 8
options is the only CORRECT combination ?
vertex at the origin and focus at F2 intersects the ellipse
(a) (IV) (iii) (S) (b) (II) (iii) (R)
at point M in the first quadrant and at point N in the
fourth quadrant. (2016) (c) (IV) (iv) (S) (d) (II) (iv) (R)

46. The orthocentre of the triangle F1MN is 49. If a tangent to a suitable conic (Column 1) is found to be
y = x + 8 and its point of contact is (8, 16), then which of
æ 9 ö æ2 ö the following options is the only CORRECT combination?
(a) ç - ,0 ÷ (b) ç ,0 ÷
è 10 ø è3 ø
(a) (III) (i) (P) (b) (I) (ii) (Q)

æ 9 ö æ2 ö (c) (II) (iv) (R) (d) (III) (ii) (Q)

(c) ç ,0 ÷ (d) ç , 6 ÷
è 10 ø è3 ø
50. For a = 2, if a tangent is drawn to suitable conic
47. If the tangents to the ellipse at M and N meet at R and the
normal to the parabola at M meets the x-axis at Q, then the (Column 1) at the point of contact (–1, 1), then which of
ratio of area of the triangle MQR to area of the quadrilateral the following options is the only CORRECT combination
MF1NF2 is for obtaining its equation?
(a) 3 : 4 (b) 4 : 5 (a) (II) (ii) (Q) (b) (I) (i) (P)
(c) 5 : 8 (d) 2 : 3 (c) (I) (ii) (Q) (d) (III) (i) (P)
CONIC SECTIONS 117

Text 54. Find the equation of the common tangent in 1st quadrant

51. Prove that, in an ellipse, the perpendicular from a focus x 2 y2

to the circle x2 + y2 = 16 and the ellipse + = 1. Also
upon any tangent and the line joining the centre of the 25 4
ellipse of the point of contact meet on the corresponding find the length of the intercept of the tangent between the
directrix. (2002) coordinate axes. (2005)
52. Normals are drawn from the point P with slopes m1, m2, m3 55. Tangents are drawn from any point on the hyperbola
to the parabola y2 = 4x. If locus of P with m1m2 = a is a part
of the parabola itself, then find a. (2003) x 2 y2
- = 1 to the circle x2 + y2 = 9. Find the locus of mid
53. At any point P on the parabola y2 – 2y – 4x + 5 = 0 a 9 4
tangent is drawn which meets the directrix at Q. Find the point of the chord of contact. (2005)
locus of point R, which divides QP externally in the ratio
1
: 1. (2004)
2

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book

CONIC SECTIONS

Please share your valuable feedback by

scanning the QR code.
BINOMIAL THEOREM
 Chapter 12 119

BINOMIAL THEOREM

1. BINOMIAL THEOREM 3. NUMERICALLY GREATEST TERM

If a, b Î R and n Î N, then The term with greatest numerical/absolute value in the

expansion of (a + b)n can be found in following way
(a + b)n = nC0 anb0 + nC1 an–1 b1 + nC2 an–2b2 +...+ nCn a0bn
n +1
(i) Find the value of
REMARKS : a
1+
b
1. If the index of the binomial is n then the expansion
contains n + 1 terms. (ii) If it equals an integer, say m, then tm and tm+1 are
numerically greatest terms.
2. In each term, the sum of indices of a and b is always n.
(iii) If it is not an integer, then tm+1 is numerically greatest
3. Coefficients of the terms in binomial expansion
equidistant from both the ends are equal. n +1
term (where m is the integral part of ).
a
4. (a–b)n = nC0anb0 – nC1an–1 b 1 + nC2an–2b 2– ...+ (–1)n 1+
b
n
C0a0bn.
Also middle terms in binomial expansions have the greatest
binomial coefficients. (nC0, nC1, nC2 ........ nCn are called Binomial
2. GENERAL TERM AND MIDDLE TERMS IN
Coefficients).
EXPANSION OF (a + b)n
4. BINOMIAL COEFFICIENTS
tr+1 = nCr an–r br
tr+1 is called a general term for all r Î W and 0 £ r £ n. Using The coefficients nC0, nC1, nC2,..., nCn in the expansion of (a+b)n
this formula we can find any term of the expansion. are called the binomial coefficients and denoted by C0, C1,
C2, ....., Cn respectively
MIDDLE TERM (S) : Now
(1 + x)n = nC0x0 + nC1x1 + nC2x2 + ... + nCnxn ..... (i)
1. In (a + b)n if n is even then the number of terms in the
Put x = 1.
expansion is odd. Therefore there is only one middle
(1 + 1)n = nC0 + nC1 + nC2 + ... + nCn

æn+2ö
th \ 2n = nC0 + nC1 + nC2 +...+ nCn
term and it is ç ÷ term.
\ n
C0 + nC1 + nC2 +...+ nCn = 2n
è 2 ø
\ C0 + C1 + C2 +...+ Cn = 2n
n
2. In (a + b) , if n is odd then the number of terms in the \ The sum of all binomial coefficients is 2n.
expansion is even. Therefore there are two middle Put x = –1, in equation (i),

th th
(1–1)n = nC0 – nC1 + nC2 – ... + (–1)n nCn
æ n +1 ö æ n +3ö \ 0 = nC0 – nC1 + nC2 – ... + (–1)n nCn
terms and those are ç ÷ and ç ÷ terms.
è 2 ø è 2 ø n
\ C0 – nC1 + nC2 – nC3 +....+ (–1)n nCn = 0
BINOMIAL THEOREM
120

n
\ C0 + nC2 + nC4 + ... = nC1 + nC3 + nC5 +...
1
\ C0 + C2 + C4 +... = C1 + C3 + C5 +... Put x = 0, we get C = –
(n + 1)
C0, C2, C4, ... are called as even coefficients
C1, C3, C5... are called as odd coefficients Therefore

Let C0 + C2 + C4 +... = C1 + C3 + C5 +... = k (1 + x) n +1 - 1 C x 2 C x3 C x n +1 ... (2)

n
= C0 x + 1 + 2 + ......... + n
Now C0 + C1 + C2 + C3+... + Cn = 2 n +1 2 3 n +1
\ (C0 + C2 + C4 +...) + (C1 + C3 + C5...) = 2n
Put x = 1 in (2) we get
\ k + k = 2n
2k = 2n 2 n +1 - 1 C C
= C 0 + 1 + ......... + n
n +1 2 n +1
2n
\ k= Put x = – 1 in (2) we get,
2
\ k = 2n–1 1 C C
= C 0 - 1 + 2 - .............
\ C0 + C2 + C4 + ... = C1 + C3 + C5 +... = 2 n–1 n +1 2 3
\ The sum of even coefficients = The sum of odd coefficients
= 2n–1 5. BINOMIAL THEOREM FOR ANY INDEX
Properties of Binomial Coefficient
If n is any real number and |x| < 1 then

(i) C0 + C1 + C2 + ............ + Cn = 2n
n (n - 1) 2 n (n - 1) (n - 2) 3
(ii) C0 – C1 + C2 – ............ + (–1)n Cn = 0 (1 + x)n = 1 + nx + x + x + ...
2! 3!
(iii) C0 + C2 + C4 + ............ = C1 + C3 + C5 +.......... = 2n – 1.

(iv) n
Cr1 =n Cr2 Þ r1 = r2 or r1 + r2 = n Here there are infinite number of terms in the expansion,
The general term is given by
n
(v) Cr + nCr – 1 = n + 1Cr
(vi) r nCr = nn – 1Cr–1 n (n - 1) (n - 2)...(n - r + 1) x r
t r +1 = ,r ³ 0
r!
Some Important Results

(i) Differentiating (1 + x)n = C0 + C1x + C2x2 + ........ + Cnxn, NOTES :

on both sides we have,
n(1 + x)n – 1 = C1 + 2C2x + 3C3x2 + ....... +nCnxn – 1 ....(1) (i) Expansion is valid only when – 1 < x < 1
Put x = 1 n
(ii) Cr can not be used because it is defined only for natural
Þ n2n – 1 = C1 + 2C2 + 3C3 + ........ + nCn
number, so nCr will be written as
Put x = –1
Þ 0 = C1 – 2C2 + ........ +(–1)n – 1 nCn. n (n - 1).........(n - r + 1)
Differentiating (1) again and again we will have r!
different results.
(iii) As the series never terminates, the number of terms in
(ii) Integrating (1 + x)n, we have,
the series is infinite.

(1 + x ) n +1 C x 2 C x3 C x n +1 (iv) If first term is not 1, then make it unity in the following

+ C = C 0 x + 1 + 2 + ......... + n
n +1 2 3 n +1 x
way. (a + x ) n = a n (1 + x / a ) n if <1
(where C is a constant) a
BINOMIAL THEOREM
121

NOTES : 6. MULTINOMIAL EXPANSION

In the expansion of (x1 + x2 +........ +xn)m where m, n Î N and
While expanding (a + b)n where n is a negative integer or a
x1, x2, ..........., xn are independent variables, we have
fraction, reduce the binomial to the form in which the first term
is unity and the second term is numerically less than unity. (i) Total number of terms = m + n – 1Cn – 1

Particular expansion of the binomials for negative index, (ii) Coefficient of x1r1 x 2 r2 x 3 r3 .........x n rn (where r1 + r2 +
|x|<1
m!
........... + rn = m, ri Î N È {0} is
1 r1!r2 !.......rn !
1. = (1 + x ) -1
1+ x (iii) Sum of all the coefficients is obtained by putting all
= 1 – x + x2 – x3 + x4 – x5 + ..... the variables x1 equal to 1.

1
2. = (1 - x ) -1
1- x

= 1 + x + x2 + x3 + x4 + x5 + .....

1
3. = (1 + x ) - 2
(1 + x ) 2

= 1 – 2x + 3x2 – 4x3 + .....

1
4. = (1 - x ) - 2
(1 - x ) 2

= 1 + 2x + 3x2 + 4x3 + .....

BINOMIAL THEOREM 122

SOLVED EXAMPLES

Example – 1
1 1
Expand = (1) 64x12 (1) –(6) (32) x10 × + 15 (16) x8 × 2
x x

6
æ 1ö 1 1
(i) (2x2 + 3)4 (ii) ç 2 x 2 - ÷ – 20 × 8x6 × 4
3 + 15(4) x ×
è xø x x4

Sol. (i) (2x2 + 3)4 = 1 1

- 6( 2x 2 ) ´ 5
+ (1) (1) 6
= 4C0 (2x2)4 (3)0 + 4C1 (2x2)3 (3)1 + 4C2 (2x2)2 x x

(3)2 + 4C3 (2x2)1 (3)3 + 4C4 (2x2)0 (3)4

= (1) 16x8 (1) + 4 (8x6) (3) + 6 (4x4) (9) + 4 (2x2) 27 + (1) (1) 81 ì ü
ï 6 6 6 6 ï
ï C0 = C6 = 1, C1 = C5 = 6 ï
ï 6! 6 ´ 5´ 4! ï
ì 4C0 = 4C4 =1, 4C1 = 4C3 = 4ü Q í 6 C2 = = =15 ý
ï 2!4! 2 ´ 4! ï
ï ï
Q í 4 4! 4 ´ 3´ 2! ý ï6 6! 6 ´ 5 ´ 4 ´ 3! ï
ï C2 = 2 ! 2 ! = 2!´ 2 = 6 ï ï C3 = = = 20 ï
î þ î 3!3! 3´ 2 ´ 3! þ

= 16x8 + 96x6 + 216x4 + 216x2 + 81

12 1
= 64 x12 – 192x9 + 240x6 – 160x3 + 60 – +
x3 x6
6 0
æ 2 1ö 6 2 6æ 1ö
(ii) ç 2x - ÷ = C0 (2x ) ç ÷ -
è xø èxø
Example – 2

1 2 Expand (1 + x + x2)3.
6 æ1ö æ1ö
C1 (2x ) ç ÷ + 6C2 (2 x2 )4 ç ÷ -
2 5

è xø è xø Sol. Let y = x + x2. Then,

(1 + x + x2)3 = (1 + y)3 = 3C0 + 3C1 y + 3C2 y2 + 3C3 y3

æ1ö
3 = 1 + 3y + 3y2 + y3 = 1 + 3 (x + x2) + 3 (x + x2)2 + (x + x2)3
6
C3 (2 x 2 )3 ç ÷ + 6C4 (2x 2 )2
è xø = 1 + 3 (x + x2) + 3(x2 + 2x3 + x4) + {3C0x3 (x2)0 + 3C1 x3–1 (x2)1

+ 3C2x3–2 (x2)2 + 3C3 x0 (x2)3}

4 5 6
æ1ö 6 2 æ1ö 6 2 0æ1ö = 1 + 3 (x + x2) + 3(x2 + 2x3 + x4) + (x3 + 3x4 + 3x5 + x6)
ç ÷ - C5 ( 2x ) ç ÷ + C6 (2 x ) ç ÷
èxø èxø èxø = x6 + 3x5 + 6x4 + 7x3 + 6x2 + 3x + 1
BINOMIAL THEOREM 123

Example – 3 = 100000 + 5 × 104 (.1) + 10 × (103) (.01) + 10 × 102 (.001)

+5 × 10 (.0001) + 0.00001
5 5
Prove that ( 5 + 1) - ( 5 - 1) = 352 = 100000 + 5000 + 100 + 1 + 0.005 + 0.00001 = 105101. 00501

Sol. ( 5 + 1)5 - ( 5 - 1)5 = Example – 6

5
é 5 C0 ( 5 )5 + 5 C1 ( 5 ) 4 (1) + 5C 2 ( 5 )3 (1) 2 ù Prove that S 5Cr = 31
ê ú r =1
ê + 5 C3 ( 5 ) 2 (1)3 + 5C 4 ( 5 ) (1) 4 ú
=
ê + 5 C5 ( 5 ) 0 (1)5 ú
ë û 5
Sol. S 5Cr = 5C1 + 5C2 + 5C3 + 5C4 + 5C5
r =1

é 5 C 0 ( 5 ) 5 - 5 C1 ( 5 ) 4 (1) + 5 C 2 ( 5 ) 3 (1) 2 ù 5! 5! 5! 5! 5!
ê ú = + + + +
-ê - 5 C3 ( 5 ) 2 (1) 3 + 5 C 4 ( 5 ) (1) 4 ú 1!4! 2!3! 3!2! 4!1! 5!0!
ê 5 0
- C 5 ( 5 ) (1) 5 ú
ë û
5 5.4 5.4 5
= + + + +1
1 2 2 1
= 2 éë 5 C1 52 + 5 C3 .5 + 5C5 ùû
= 5 + 10 + 10 + 5 + 1 = 31
= 2 5 ´ 25 + 10 ´ 5 + 1
Example – 7

ì 5 C0 = 5C5 = 1; 5C4 = 5; ü Find n, if nC6 : n–3C3 = 33 : 4.

ï ï
í5 5 5.4 5 ý
ï C2 = C3 = = 10; C1 = 5 ï Sol. Given, nC6 : n–3C3 = 33 : 4.
î 2.1 þ
n! 3! n - 3 - 3 ! 33
= 2[125 + 51] \ ´ =
6! n - 6 ! n -3 ! 4
= 352

n! 3! 33 n n -1 n - 2 33
Example – 4 or . = or =
n - 3 ! 6! 4 6.5.4 4
Using binomial theorem compute (99)5.
or n(n – 1) (n – 2) = 6.5.33 = 11.3.3.2.5
Sol. (99)5 = (100–1)5 = 5C0 (100)5 – 5C1 (100)4 + 5C2 (100)3
or n(n – 1) (n – 2) = 11.(3.3).(2.5) = 11.10.9 \ n = 11
– 5C3 (100)2 + 5C4 (100)1 – 5C5 (100)0
= (100)5 –5 ×(100)4 + 10 × (100)3 – 10 × (100)2 + 5 × 100 – 1 Example – 8
= 1010 – 5 × 108 + 107 – 105 + 5 × 102 – 1
If nC8 = nC6 determine n and hence nC2.
= (1010 + 107 + 5 × 102) – (5 × 108 + 105 + 1)
Sol. Given, nC8 = nC6
= 10010000500 – 500100001 = 9509900499
We know that n C x = n C y then x = y or x + y = n
Example – 5
Þn=8+6
Use the binomial theorem to find the exact value of (10.1)5. Þ n = 14
5 5
Sol. (10.1) = (10 + 0.1)
14 ´13
= 105 + 5C1 104 (.1) + 5C2 103 (.1)2 + 5C3 102 (.1)3 Now nC2 = 14C2 = 2!
= 91
+ 5C4 10 (.1)4 + 5C5 (.1)5
BINOMIAL THEOREM 124

Example – 9
11 ! 2 7 4 4
\ t5 = ( x ) ´ 12
15 15
If C3r = Cr+3, find r. 4! 7! x
Sol. We know that if nCx = nCy, then x = y or x + y = n
15
C3r = 15Cr+3 11´ 10 ´ 9 ´ 8 ´ 7 ! 14 256
\ t5 = x ´ 12
4 ´ 3 ´ 2 ´ 7! x
3
\ Either 3r = r + 3 Þ r= ,
2 \ t5 = 330 × 256x2 Þ t5 = 84480x2
which is not possible, since r is an integer.
Example – 12
or 3r + r + 3 = 15 Þ r = 3.
Hence r = 3. n
æ 1ö
Given that the 4th term in the expansion of ç px + ÷
Example – 10 è xø

5
8 is , find n and p.
æ 3 ö 2
Find the third term in the expansion of ç 2 x 2 + ÷
è 2 xø
n
1
3 Sol. Given expansion is æç px + ö÷
Sol. Let a = 2x2, b = ,n = 8 è xø
2x
For third term, r = 2
Given, T4 = 5
tr+1 = nCr an–r br 2

2
8 2 8- 2 æ 3 ö n -3 æ1ö 5
3
= C 2 (2x ) ç ÷ \ n
C3 px
è 2x ø ç ÷ =
èxø 2

8.7.6! 2 6 9 é 8 8! ù 1 5
= (2 x ) ´ 2 ê Q C2 = ú Þ n
C3 p n - 3 x n - 3 . =
2!6! 4x ë 2!6!û x3 2

8.7 6 12 9 n! 5
= ´2 ´x ´ 2 Þ .p n - 3 x n - 6 = ...(1)
2 4x 3! n - 3 ! 2
= 63 × 64x10 = 4032x10
Since R.H.S. of (1) is independent of x,

Example – 11 therefore n – 6 = 0 \ n = 6.

6! 3 5
11 From 1 , .p =
æ 4ö 3! 3! 2
Find the fifth term in the expansion of ç x 2 - 3 ÷
è x ø
5
-4 Þ 20p3 =
2
Sol. Let, a = x , b = 3 , n = 11 2
x
3
For fifth term, r = 4 1 æ1ö 1
Þ p3 = =ç ÷ \p= .
\ n
tr+1 = Cr a . bn–r r 8 è2ø 2

4
æ-4ö 1
\ t5 = 11C4 (x2)11–4 ç 3 ÷ Hence n = 6 and p = .
èx ø 2
BINOMIAL THEOREM 125

Example – 13 Þ 7r = n – r + 1
Þ n – 8r = –1 ............ (1)
Given positive integers r > 1, n > 2 and the coefficient of

(3r) th and (r + 2) th terms in the binomial expansion of n

Cr 7
And n
=
Cr +1 42
(1 + x)2n are equal . Then :
(a) n = 2r (b) n = 2r + 1
n! r + 1 ! n - r -1 ! 1
(c) n = 3r (d) none of these
Þ r! n - r ! . n!
=
6
Ans. (a)
Sol. In the expansion (1 + x)2n, t3r = 2nC3r–1 (x)3r–1
r +1 1
and tr+2 = 2nCr+1 (x)r+1 Þ =
n -r 6
Since, binomial coefficients of t3 r and tr+2 are equal.
Þ 6r + 6 = n – r \ n – 7r = 6 ............ (2)
\ 2nC = 2nCr+1
3r–1
Now, (2) – (1) Þ r=7
Þ 3r – 1 = r + 1 or 2n = (3r – 1) + (r + 1)
From (1), n = 55.
Þ 2r = 2 or 2n = 4r

Þ r = 1 or n = 2r Example – 15

But r > 1 If in the expansion of (1 + x)n, the coefficients of 14th, 15th

\ We take, n = 2r and 16th terms in A.P. find n.
Sol. The coefficients of 14th, 15th and 16th tems in the
Example – 14
expansion of (1 + x)n will be nC13, nC14 and nC15 respectively.

If the coefficients of three consecutive terms in the Given, nC13, nC14 and nC15 are in A.P.
expansion of (1 + a)n are in the ratio 1 : 7 : 42, find n. \ n
C14 – nC13 = nC15 – nC14
Sol. Let the three consecutive terms in the expansion of (1+a)n or 2 . nC14 = nC13 + nC15
be rth, (r + 1)th and (r + 2)th terms respectively.
n! n! n!
In the expansion of (1 + a)n, or 2. = +
14 ! n -14 ! 13 ! n -13 ! 15 ! n -15 !
coefficient of rth term = nCr–1,
coefficient of (r + 1)th term = nCr. Multiplying both sides by 15! (n – 13)!, we get

coefficient or (r + 2)th term = nCr+1

15! n -13 ! 15! n -13 ! 15! n -13 !
Given, nCr–1 : nCr : nCr+1 = 1 : 7 : 42. 2. = +
14! n -14 ! 13! n -13 ! 15! n -15 !

n
C r -1 1 or 2.15 (n – 13) = 15.14 + (n – 13) (n – 14)
\ n
=
Cr 7
or 30n – 390 = 210 + n2 – 27n + 182
or n2 – 57n + 782 = 0
n! r! n - r ! 1
Þ . = or (n – 34) (n – 23) = 0
r -1 ! n - r +1 ! n! 7
Hence n = 23 or 34.

r 1
Þ =
n - r +1 7
BINOMIAL THEOREM 126

Example – 16
r
æ1ö
t r +1 = 9 C r (2)9-r ç ÷ x 9-3r
10
è3ø
é æxö æ 3 öù
The term independent of x in ê ç ÷ + ç 2 ÷ ú is:
êë è 3 ø è 2x ø úû To get term independent of x, must have
x9–3r = x0
(a) 1 (b) 10C1
9 – 3r = 0 Þ – 3r = –9 Þ r=3
(c) 5/12 (d) none of these
3
Ans. (d) æ1ö
\ 9
C3 (2) 9-3 ç ÷
è3ø
10 - r r
10 æ x ö æ 3 ö
Sol. Tr +1 = Cr ç ÷÷ çç ÷
ç 3 2x 2 ÷ø
è ø è 9! 1 9 ´ 8 ´ 7 ´ 6! 1
´ 26 ´ = ´ 64 ´
3!6! 27 3 ´ 2 ´ 6! 27
Equating x power to zero

28 ´ 64 1792
10 - r = =
-r = 0 9 9
2

10 – 3r = 0 1792
Constant term independent of x =
9
10
Þr =
3 -2
(ii) Let a = x, b = , n = 15
x2
Independent of ‘x’ term is not possible
tr+1 = nCr an–r . br
Example – 17
r
æ -2ö
Find the constant term (term independent of x) in the tr+1 = 15Cr (x)15–r ç 2 ÷
èx ø
expansion of
tr+1 = 15Cr (x)15–r (–2)r x–2r
9 15
æ 1 ö æ 2 ö
(i) ç 2x + 2 ÷ (ii) ç x - 2 ÷ tr+1 = 15Cr (–2)r (x)15–3r
è 3x ø è x ø
To get constant term independent of x,

1 x15–3r = x0
Sol. Let a = 2x, b = 2 , n = 9
3x 15 – 3r = 0 Þ – 3r = – 15 Þ r=5

tr+1 = nCr an–r . br 15!

15
\ C5 (-2)5 = (-32)
5!10!
r
æ 1 ö
t r +1 = 9 C r (2x )9- r ç 2 ÷
è 3x ø
15 ´ 14 ´ 13 ´ 12 ´11 ´ 10!
= ´ -32
5 ´ 4 ´ 3 ´ 2 ´10!
r
æ1ö
t r+1 = 9 Cr (2)9-r ç ÷ x -2r .x 9-r = – 77×39×32 = – 96096
è 3ø
Constant term independent of x = – 96096
BINOMIAL THEOREM 127

Example – 18
5
11 4 11-5 æ -1 ö
t 6 = C5 ( x ) ç 3÷
Find the middle term (s) in the expansion of èx ø

12 11
æ 1 ö
(i) æç x + y ö÷ (ii) ç x 4 - 3 ÷ 11! 24 æ - 1 ö
çy x÷ è x ø t6 = x ç 15 ÷
è ø 5! 6! èx ø

x y 11´ 10 ´ 9 ´ 8 ´ 7 ´ 6!
Sol. (i) Let a = , b = , n = 12 t6 = (- x 9 )
y x 5 ´ 4 ´ 3 ´ 2 ´ 1´ 6!
n is even.
= -462 x9

æ n + 2 ö æ 12 + 2 ö 14 For t7, r = 6
\ ç ÷=ç ÷= =7
è 2 ø è 2 ø 2
6
11 4 11- 6 æ -1ö
7th term is middle term, t 7 = C6 ( x ) ç 3÷
èx ø
tr+1 = nCr an–r . br
For 7th term, r = 6 11! 20 1
t7 = x ´ 18
6!5! x
12 - 6 6
æ xö æ yö
t7 = 12C6 ç ÷ ç ÷
è yø èxø 11´10 ´ 9 ´ 8 ´ 7 ´ 6! 2
t7 = x
6!´ 5 ´ 4 ´ 3 ´ 2
6 6
12! æ x ö æ y ö t7 = 11 × 3 × 2 × 7 = 462x2
t7 = ´ç ÷ ´ ç ÷
6!6 ! è y ø è x ø
Example – 19
12 ´11 ´10 ´ 9 ´ 8 ´ 7 ´ 6 !
t7 =
6 ´ 5 ´ 4 ´ 3´ 2 ´ 6 ! 1
n
The middle term in expansion of æç x 2 + 2 + 2 ö÷ is :
è x ø
t7 = 77 × 12 = 924
\ Middle term = 924
n! 2n!
(a) (b)
-1 [(n / 2)!]2 [(n / 2)!]2
(ii) Let a = x4, b = , n = 11
x3
1.3.5........(2n + 1) n (2n)!
(c) 2 (d)
æ n + 1 ö æ 11 + 1 ö n! (n!) 2
n is odd. ç ÷=ç ÷ = 6,
è 2 ø è 2 ø
Ans. (d)

æ n + 3 ö æ 11 + 3 ö Sol. Middle term in expansion of

ç ÷=ç ÷=7
è 2 ø è 2 ø
n 2n
æ 2 1 ö æ 1ö
6th and 7th term are middle term, çx + 2 + 2÷ = çx + ÷
è x ø è xø
tr+1 = nCran–r . br
So, (n + 1)th term
For t6, r = 5
2n (2n)!
Þ Cn =
n!n!
BINOMIAL THEOREM 128

Example – 20 = coefficient of x9 in (1 + x)45

= 45C9 [Since in the expansion of (1 + x)n,
7
æ 1ö coefficient of xr = nCr]
Find the middle terms(s) in the expansion of ç x 2 + ÷
è xø
45!
=
9!36!
1
Sol. Let a = x2, b = ,n=7
x

n is odd. Example – 22

æ n +1 ö æ 7 +1 ö æ n +3ö æ 7+3ö 47
5
52 - j
ç ÷=ç ÷ = 4 and ç ÷=ç ÷=5 Find the value of the expression C4 + S C3 .
è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø j =1

4th and 5th terms are middle terms, 5

47 52 - j
Sol. Given expression = C4 + S C3 .
for t4, r = 3 j =1

tr+1 = nCran–r . br = 47C4 + (51C3 + 50C3 + 49C3 + 48C3 + 47C3)

3 = 47C4 + (47C3 + 48C3 + 49C3 + 50C3 + 51C3)

7 2 7 -3 æ1ö
t 4 = C3 ( x ) ç ÷ = (47C4 + 47C3) + (48C3 + 49C3 + 50C3 + 51C3)
èxø
= 48C4 +48C3 + 49C3 + 50C3 + 51C3 [Q nCr + nCr-1 = n+1Cr]
7! 1 = (48C4 + 48C3) + (49C3 + 50C3 + 51C3)
t4 = ´ (x 2 )4 ´ 3
4!3! x = (49C4 + 49C3) + (50C3 + 51C3)
= (50C4 + 50C3) + 51C3 = 51C4 + 51C3 = 52C4.
7 ´ 6 ´ 5 ´ 4! 8 1
t4 = ´x ´ 3
4!´ 3 ´ 2 x
Example – 23

t4 = 35x5 The sum of coefficient in (1 + x – 3x2)2134 is

For t5, r = 4 (a) –1 (b) 1
4 (c) 0 (d) 22134
7 2 7 -4 æ1ö
t5 = C4 x ç ÷
è xø Ans. (b)
Sol. Sum of co-efficients can be obtained by substituting x = 1
7! 1 \ Sum of co-efficients = (1 + 1 – 3)2134 = (–1)2134 = 1
t5 = ´ x6 ´ 4
4!3! x
Example – 24
7 ´ 6 ´ 5 ´ 4! 2
t5 = ´ x = 35x 2 The sum of the coefficients in the expansion of
4!´ 3 ´ 2
(6a – 5b)n, where n is a positive integer, is
(a) 1 (b) –1
Example – 21
n
(c) 2 (d) 2n–1
Find the coefficient of x9 in (1 + 3x + 3x2 + x3)15.
Ans. (a)
Sol. (1 + 3x + 3x2 + x3)15 = [(1 + x)3]15 = (1 + x)45
Sol. Sum of coefficients we get when a = b = 1
\ Coefficient of x9 in (1 + 3x + 3x2 + x3)15
Þ (6 – 5)n = 1
BINOMIAL THEOREM 129

Example – 25 + (2n + n2n–1 . 2 . 7 – 2n . 7n – 2n)

= 142 (nC2 . 2n–2 + nC3 . 2n–3 . 14 + ... + 14n–2)
n
r n n
Prove that rS= 0 3 . C r = 4 . This is divisible by 142 i.e. by 196 for all positive integral
value of n.
Sol. (1 + x)n = nC0 x0 + nC1 x+ nC2 x2 + ... + nCn xn Note : If n = 1, nC2 = 0, nC3 = 0 etc.
n
\ C0 x0 + nC1 x + nC2 x2 + .... + nCn xn = (1 + x)n ....(1) \ Given expression = 142 ×0 =0, which is divisible by 196.
n
Now S 3r . n C r Example – 28
r =0

= nC0 30 + nC1 31 + nC2 32 + .... + nCn 3n Using binomial theorem, prove that 6 n – 5n always
leaves the remainder 1 when divided by 25 for all positive
= (1 + 3)n
integers n.
= 4n.
Sol. 6n – 5n = (1 + 5)n – 5n

Example – 26 = (1 + nC1 5 + nC2 52 + ... + nCn 5n) – 5n

= (1 + n . 5 + nC2 . 52 + ... + nCn 5n) – 5n
18
Numerically greatest term, in the expansion of (8 – 5x) ,
= 1 + nC2 52 + nC3 53 + ... + nCn 5n
(where x = 2/5) is :
= 1 + 25 (nC2 + nC3 . 5 + ... + nCn 5n–2)
(a) 1623 × 224 (b) 1623 × 222
= 1 + 25.k where k is a positive integer.
(c) 1623 × 223 (d) none of these
\ When 6n – 5n is divided by 25, remainder will be 1 for all
Ans. (d)
positive integer n.
18
æ 5x ö 5 2 1
Sol. (8 - 5x)18 = 818 ç1 - ÷ , a = 1, b = - ´ = - Example – 29
è 8 ø 8 5 4
Which number is larger, (1.2)4000 or 800 ?
1 Sol. (1.2)4000 = (1 + 0.2)4000
19 ´
(n + 1)| b | 4 = 3.8
= = 4000C0 + 4000C1 (0.2) + sum of positive terms
| b |+ | a | 5
4 = 1 + 4000 (0.2) + a positive number
= 1 + 800 + a positive number
T4 is greatest term
> 800
T4 = 18C3 815 (–2)3, so it is negative
Hence (1.2)4000 > 800.

Example – 27
Example – 30
Show that 24n – 2n (7n + 1) is some multiple of the square of
The coefficient of xn in expansion of (1 + x) (1 –x)n is
14, where n is a postive integer.
(a) (n – 1) (b) (–1)n (1 – n)
Sol. 24n – 2n (7n + 1) = (16)n – 2n (7n + 1)
(c) (–1)n–1 (n–1)2 (d) (–1)n–1 n
= (2 + 14)n – 2n . 7n – 2n
Ans. (b)
= (2n + nC1 2n–1 . 14 + nC2 2n–2 . 142 + ... + 14n) – 2n . 7n – 2n
Sol. (1 + x) (1 – x)n = (1 – x)n + x(1 – x)n
= 142 (nC2 2n–2 + nC3 2n–3 14 + ... + 14n–2)
\ Coefficient of xn is = (–1)n + (–1)n–1 nC1
+ (2n + nC1 . 2n–1 . 14 –2n . 7n – 2n)
= (–1)n [1 – n]
2 n n–2 n n–3 n–2
= 14 ( C2 2 + C3 2 . 14 + ... + 14 )
BINOMIAL THEOREM 130

Example – 31 Example – 33

The coefficient of x7 in the expansion of (1 – x – x2 + x3)6 is

n
(a) –132 (b) –144 æ 1ö
Find the term independent of x in (1 + x) ç 1+ ÷ m
è xø
(c) 132 (d) 144
Ans. (b)
n n
m æ 1 ö = 1+ x m æ x +1 ö
Sol. (1 – x – x2 + x3) 6 = ((1 – x) (1 – x2))6 = (1 – x)6 (1 – x2)6 Sol. Given expression = 1 + x ç 1+ ÷ ç ÷
è xø è x ø
6 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6
= (1 – C1 x + C2x – C3 x + C4 x – C5x + C6x )
(1 – 6C1x2 + 6C2x4 – 6C3x6 + 6C4x8 – 6C5x10 + 6C6 x12) m+n
1+ x m+n
= = x - n 1+ x
Coeff. of x7 = (–6C1) (–6C3) + (–6C3) (6C2) + (–6C5) (–6C1) x n

= 6.20 – 20 . 15 + 6 . 6 = 120 – 300 + 36 = – 144

\ Required term independent of x
Example – 32 = coefficient of x0 in x–n (1 + x)m+n

If the coefficients of x 3 and x 4 in the expansion of = coefficient of xn in (1 + x)m+n

(1 + ax + bx2) (1 – 2x)18 in powers of x are both zero, then
m+n m+n !
(a, b) is equal to : = Cn =
n!m!

272 ö æ 251 ö
(a) æç16, (b) ç16, ÷
è 3 ÷ø è 3 ø [Since in the expansion of (1 + x)n, co-efficient of xr = nCr]

Example – 34
æ 251 ö æ 272 ö
(c) ç14, ÷ (d) ç14, ÷
è 3 ø è 3 ø
Find the coefficient of x5 in the expansion of the product
Ans. (a) (1 + 2x)6 (1 – x)7.

Sol. On expanding the given expression we get, Sol. (1 + 2x)6 = [1 + 6C1 (2x) + 6C2 (2x)2 + 6C3 (2x)3 + 6C4 (2x)4

Þ (1 + ax + bx2) (1 – 18C1 (2x) + 18C2 (2x)2 – 18C3 (2x)3 + ... + 18C18 + 6C5 (2x)5 + 6C6 (2x)6] .....(1)
(2x)18) Again, (1 – x)7 = 1 – 7C1 x + 7C2 x2 – 7C3 x3 + 7C4 x4 – 7C5 x5
Coefficient of x3, + 7C6 x6 – 7C7 x7
Þ – 18C1 (2b) + 18C2 (4a) – 8. 18C3 = 0 = 1 – 7x + 21x2 – 35x3 + 35x4 – 21x5 + 7x6 – x7 .....(2)
Þ 51a = 3b + 544 ..(1) Now (1 + 2x)6 (1 – x)7
Similarly coefficient of x4, = (1 + 12x + 60x2 + 160x3 + 240x4 + 192x5 + .....)
18
Þ C4 (2)4 – 18C3 . 8a + 18C2 4b = 0 × (1 – 7x + 21x2 – 35x3 + 35x4 – 21x5 + .....)
Þ 32a = 3b + 240 ..(2) \ Required coefficient of x5 in the product
On solving (1) and (2) we get, = 1 × (–21) + 12 × 35 + 60 × (–35)

+ 160 × 21 + 240 × (–7) + 192 × 1

272
Þ a = 16 and b =
3 = –21 + 420 – 2100 + 3360 – 1680 + 192 = 171
BINOMIAL THEOREM 131

Example – 35
( -1) (-1 - 1) (-1 - 2) ù
+ (- x)3 .....to ¥ ú
Simplify first three terms in the expansion of the following 3! û
(i) (1 + 2x)–4 (ii) (5+4x)–1/2 = (1 + x) (1 + x + x2 + x3 + x4 +...... to ¥)
Sol. (i) (1 + 2x)–4 = = [1 + x + x2 + x3 + x4 + ....... to ¥] + [x + x2 + x3 + x4+ ......... to ¥]

(-4) (-4 - 1) = 1 + 2x + 2x2 + 2x3 + 2x4 + 2x5 + ...... to ¥

1 + (-4) (2x ) + (2x ) 2 +.................
2! Hence coefficient of x4 = 2

(-4) (-5) Example – 37

= 1 - 8x + (4x 2 ) +.................
2
Find the square root of 99 correct to 4 places of deicmal.
= 1–8x + 40x2 + .....
1
-1
Sol. (99) 1/ 2 1/ 2 é æ 1 öù 2
-1 -1
é 4x ù 2 = (100 - 1) = ê100 ç1 - ÷ú
(ii) (5 + 4 x) 2 = 5 2 ê1 + ú ë è 100 øû
ë 5û

1
é æ 1 öù 2
é æ -1 ö æ -1 ö ù = ê100 ç1 - ÷ú
ê æ - 1 ö æ 4 x ö ç 2 ÷ ç 2 - 1÷ æ 4x ö 2
-1 ú ë è 100 øû
= 5 ê1 + ç ÷ ç ÷ + è ø è
2 ø
ç ÷ + ...ú
ê è 2 øè 5 ø 2! è 5 ø ú
ê ú = (100)1/2 [1–0.01]1/2
ë û

é 1 1æ1 ö ù
ê ç - 1÷ ú
é æ -1 öæ - 3 ö ù = 10 ê1 + 2 (-0.01) + 2 è 2 ø (-0.01) 2 + ........to ¥ ú
ê 2x ç 2 ÷ ç 2 ÷ 16 x 2
-1 ú ê 1! 2! ú
= 5 ê1 -
2
+ è øè ø´ + ...ú ê
ë
ú
û
ê 5 2 25 ú
ê ú
ë û
= 10 [1–0.005 – 0.0000125 + ......... to ¥]
= 10 (.9949875) = 9.94987 = 9.9499
-1
é 2x 6 x 2
2
ù
= 5 ê1 - + + ....ú
ë 5 25 û Example – 38

The number of terms in the expansion of (2x + 3y – 4z)n, is

Example – 36
(a) n + 1 (b) n + 3
4
Find the coefficient of x in the expansion of
(n + 1) (n + 2)
(c) (d) none of these
1+ x 2
if | x | < 1
1- x
Ans. (c)

1+ x Sol. Number of terms = n+r–1Cr–1

Sol. = (1 + x ) (1 - x ) -1
1- x = n+3–1C3–1

é (-1) ( -1) (-1 - 1) (n + 2) (n + 1)

= (1 + x) ê1 + ( - x) ( - x) 2 =
1! 2! 2
ë
BINOMIAL THEOREM 132

Example – 39 Example – 40

The coefficient of (a3 b 6 c8 d 9 e f) in the expansion of Find the total number of terms in the expansion of
(a + b + c – d – e – f)31 is : (1 + a + b)10 and coefficient of a2b3.
(a) 123210 (b) 23110 Sol. Total number of terms = 10 + 3 – 1 C3 – 1 =12C2 = 66
(c) 3110 (d) none of these
10!
Coefficient of a2b3 =
Ans. (d) 2!´ 3!´ 5! =2520
Sol. The coefficient of a3 b6 c8 d9 e f in expansion of
(a + b + c – d – e – f)31 is zero as that term is not possible in
expansion as sum of powers in not 31.
BINOMIAL THEOREM 133

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Binomial theorem for positive integral index 12
æ x3 2 ö
9. 5th term from the end in the expansion of ç - 2 ÷ is
ç 2 x ÷
1 1 x è ø
1. If + = , then x is equal to
8 9 10
(a) – 7920 x–4 (b) 7920 x4
(a) 100 (b) 90 (c) 7920 x–4 (d) –7920 x4
(c) 170 (d) none of these 10. If the coefficients of (r + 4)th term and (2r + 1)th term in the
2. n n n n n–1 1 n n
The expansion (x + a) = C0 x + C1 x a + ..... + Cn a is valid expansion of (1 + x)18 are equal, then r =
when n is (a) 3 (b) 5
(a) an integer (b) a natural number (c) 3 or 5 (d) none of these
(c) a rational number (d) none of these 9
æ 3 ö
11. The term independent of x in the expansion of ç 2x - 2 ÷ is
3. ( x + x 3 - 1) 5 + ( x - x 3 - 1 ) 5 is a polynomial of degree è x ø

(a) 5 (b) 6 (a) 33 . 9C3 (b) 26 . 33 9C3

(c) 7 (d) 8 (c) –33 . 9C3 (d) –26 . 33 . 9C3
4. (1.003)4 is nearly equal to 8
æ1 1 1
- ö
(a) 1.012 (b) 1.0012 12. In the expansion of ç x 3 + x 5 ÷ , the term independent of
ç2 ÷
è ø
(c) 0.988 (d) 1.003
x is
5. The number of non-zero terms in the expansion of
(a) T5 (b) T7
é 1+ 3 2 x 9 + 1- 3 2 x 9 ù (c) T6 (d) T8
ëê úû is
13. The term independent of x in the expansion of
(a) 9 (b) 10 8
é t -1 -1 x + t -1 +1 -1
(c) 5 (d) None of these êë x -1 ùú is :
û
General term of binomial expansion
3 3
æ 1- t ö æ 1+ t ö
18
(a) 56 ç ÷ (b) 56 ç ÷
3 è 1+ t ø è 1- t ø
6. The term void of x in the expanion of æç x - 2 ö÷ is
è x ø
4 4
æ 1- t ö æ 1+ t ö
(a) 18C6 (b) 18C6 36 (c) 70 ç ÷ (d) 70 ç ÷
è 1+ t ø è 1- t ø
(c) 18C12 (d) 18C6 312
7. If n Î N and the coefficients of x–7 and x–8 to the expansion of 14. The greatest value of the term independent of x, as a varies
20
æ 1 ö
n
æ sin a ö
ç 2 + ÷ are equal then n = over R, in the expansion of ç x cos a + ÷ is :
è 3x ø è x ø

(a) 56 (b) 15 (a) 20C10 (b) 20C19

(c) 45 (d) 55 10
8. If n,p Î N and in the expansion of (1 + x)n the coefficient of (c) 20C6 (d) 20C10 æç 1 ö÷
è 2ø
pth and (p + 1)th terms are respectively p and q. The p + q =
15. The coefficient of x8 y10 in the expansion of (x + y)18 is
(a) n + 3CP (b) n + 1C1
(a) 18C8 (b) 18P10
(c) n + 2C1 (d) nCP
(c) 218 (d) None of these
BINOMIAL THEOREM 134

10
25. The coefficient of x 50 in the binomial expansion of
æ l ö
16. If the term independent of x in the expansion of ç x - 2 ÷ (1 + x)1000 + x(1 + x)999 + x2(1 + x)998 + ..... + x1000 is:
è x ø
is 405, then l equals 1000 ! 1000 !
(a) 50 ! 950 ! (b) 49 ! 951 !
(a) –3 (b) 3
(c) 3 or –3 (d) None of these
17. If (1 + ax)m =1 + 8x + 24x2 + ..., then the value of a and m are 1001 ! 1001 !
(c) 51 ! 950 ! (d) 50 ! 951 !
respectively.
(a) 4,2 (b) 2,4
Binomial coefficient problems
(c) 1,8 (d) None of these

Application of binomial theorem 26. If nC3 = nC2, then n is equal to

(a) 2 (b) 3
18. If n Î N then 49n + 16 n – 1 is divisible by
(c) 5 (d) none of these
(a) 3 (b) 19
27. If n+1C4 = 9 nC2 , then n =
(c) 64 (d) 29
(a) 10 (b) 9
19. Remainder when 7100 is divided by 25 is
(c) 12 (d) 11
(a) 1 (b) 24
28. If n Î N and (1+x) = 1 + a1x + a2x2 + ... + anxn. If a1, a2 and a3
n
(c) 18 (d) none of these
are in A.P., then the value of n is
20. The co-efficient of x4 in the expansion of (1 + x + x2 + x3)n is
(a) 4 (b) 5
(a) nC4 (b) nC4 + nC2
(c) 6 (d) 7
(c) nC4 + nC1 + nC4 . nC2 (d) nC4 + nC2 + nC1 . nC2
29. The sum rCr + r+1Cr + r+2Cr + ... + nCr (n > r) equals
21. Co-efficient of x5 in the expansion of (x2 – x – 2)5 is :
(a) nCr+1 (b) n+1
Cr+1
(a) –83 (b) –82
(c) n+1Cr–1 (d) n+1Cr
(c) –81 (d) 0
30. The sum of coefficient in the expansion of (1 + x – 3x2)3148 is
22. The number of integral terms in the expansion of
(a) 8 (b) 7
500
3+ 2 is : (c) 1 (d) –1

(a) 128 (b) 129 31. If the sum of the coefficients in the expansion of
(a2x2 – 6ax + 11)10, where a is constant, is 1024, then the
(c) 251 (d) 512
value of a is :
23. The coefficient of x99 in
(a) 5 (b) 1
(x + 1) (x + 3) (x + 5) ..... (x + 199) is
(c) 2 (d) 3
(a) 1 + 2 + 3 + .... + 99 (b) 1 + 3 + 5 + .... + 199
32. If n Î N and (1 – x + x2)n = a0 + a1x + a2x2 + ...... + a2nx2n, then
(c) 1.3.5. ....... 199 (d) None of these a0+ a2+ a4 + ... +a2n is equal to :
24. The coefficient of x17 in the expansion of
(x – 1) (x – 2) ........ (x – 18) is 3n +1 3n -1
(a) (b)
2 2
(a) 342 (b) –171

171 n 1 n 1
(c) (d) 684 (c) 3 - (d) 3 +
2 2 2
BINOMIAL THEOREM 135
33. The sum of the numerical coefficients in the expansion of n
n
12 40. Statement I : å (r + 1) . Cr = (n + 2) 2n -1
æ x 2y ö r =0
ç1 + + ÷ , is
è 3 3 ø
n
(a) 1 (b) 2 Statement II : å (r + 1) n
C r .x r = (1 + x) n + nx (1 + x) n -1
r =0
(c) 212 (d) none of these
50
34. In the expansion of (1 + x) , the sum of the coefficient of (a) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
odd powers of x is (b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true;
(a) 0 (b) 249 Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I
(c) 2 50
(d) 2 51 (c) Statement I is true, Statement II is true;
35. Sum of the last 30 coefficients in the expansion of (1 + x)59, Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I
when expanded in ascending powers of x is (d) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
59 58
(a) 2 (b) 2 41. a, b, c, d are any four consecutive co-efficients of any
(c) 230 (d) 229 a + b b+c c+d
binomial expansion, then , , are in :
36. 10
C1 + 10C2 + 10C3 + .............+ 10C10 = a b c

(a) 512 (b) 511 (a) A.P.

(c) 1024 (d) none of these (b) G.P.

37. The value of nC0 – nC1 + nC2 – .... + (–1)n nCn is (c) H.P.

(a) 1 (b) n (d) arithmetico geometric progression

42. The value of
(c) 2n (d) 0
7
n
C0 + 7 C1 + 7
C1 + 7 C2 + ... + 7
C6 + 7 C7 is
2 n +1
38. å C2 r +1 is equal to
(a) 27 – 1 (b) 28 – 2
r =0

(c) 28 – 1 (d) 28
(a) 22n–1 (b) 22n
(c) 22n+1 –1 (d) 22n+1 Numerical Value Type Questions

10 10 43. If n + 2 = 210 n - 1, then the value of n is equal to

39. Let S1 = å j ( j - 1) 10 C j , S2 = å j 10 C j and
j=1 j=1 44. The total number of terms in the expansion of
(x + a)100 + (x – a)100 after simplification is
10
S3 = å j2 10
Cj 45. If 2nC3 : nC2 : : 44 : 1, then the value of n is
j=1
46. If 32C2n–1 = 32Cn–3 , then n =

Statement I : S3 = 55×29. 6
æ 3 ö
Statement II : S1 = 90 × 28 and S2 = 10×28. 47. The coefficient of x in ç x 5 + 3
÷÷ is :
ç
è x3 ø
(a) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; n
æ 1/3 1 ö
Statement II is a correct explanation for Statement I 48. If the last term in the binomial expansion of ç 2 - ÷ is
è 2ø
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is true;
log 3 8
Statement II is not a correct explanation for Statement I æ 1 ö
ç 5/3 ÷ , then the 5th term form the beginning is :
è3 ø
(d) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
BINOMIAL THEOREM 136

12
52. If n Î N and second, third and fourth terms in the expansion
49. If rth term in the expansion of æç x 2 + 1 ö÷ is independent of of (x + a)n are 240, 720 and 1080 respectively, then the value
è xø of n is
x, then r = 53. If the sum of binomial coefficients in the expansion
n
æ 2x 2
10 æ 1ö
3 ö ç 2x + ÷ is 256, then term independent of x is
50. The middle term in the expansion of ç + 2 ÷ is è xø
è 3 2x ø
54. Coefficient of x5 in the expansion of (1 + x2)5 (1 + x)4 is
51. If T 2/T 3 in the expansion of (a + b) n and T 3/T 4 in the
55. The number of irrational terms in the expansion of
(a + b)n+3 are equal, then n =
45
41/ 5 + 71/10 is
BINOMIAL THEOREM 137

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. If the number of terms in the expansion of 5. The coefficient of x –5 in the binomial expansion of

n 10
æ 2 4ö æ ö
ç1 - + ÷ , x ¹ 0, is 28, then the sum of the coefficients ç x + 1 - x -1 ÷ ,
è x yø ç 2 1 1
÷ where x ¹ 0, 1, is :
è x 3 - x 3 +1 x - x 2 ø
of all the terms in this expansion, is : (2016)
(2017/Online Set–2)
(a) 2187 (b) 243
(a) 1 (b) 4
(c) 729 (d) 64
(c) –4 (d) –1
2. For x Î R, x ¹ –1, if
6. The sum of the co-efficients of all odd degree terms in the
expansion of
2016
i
(1 + x)2016 + x(1 + x)2015 + x2(1 + x)2014 + …… + x2016 = åa x , i 5 5
i =0
x + x3 - 1 + x - x 3 - 1 , x > 1 is : (2018)
then a17 is equal to : (2016/Online Set–1)
(a) 2 (b) -1
2017! 2016! (c) 0 (d) 1
(a) 17! 2000! (b) 17! 1999!
7. If n is the degree of the polynomial

8 8
2017! 2016! é 2 ù é 2 ù
(c)
2000!
(d)
16! ê 3 3
ú +ê 3 3
ú and m is
ë 5x + 1 - 5x - 1 û ë 5x + 1 + 5x - 1 û
3. If the coefficients of x-2 and x-4 in the expansion of the coefficient of xn in it, then the ordered pair (n, m) is
equal to : (2018/Online Set–1)
18
æ 1 ö (a) (24, (10)8) (b) (8, 5(10)4)
ç x3 + 1 ÷ , (x > 0), are m and n respectively, then m is
ç 1
÷ n (c) (12, (20)4) (d) (12, 8(10)4)
è 2x 3 ø
8. The coefficient of x 10 in the expansion of
equal to : (2016/Online Set–2) (1 + x)2 (1 + x2)3 (1 + x3)4 is equal to :
(2018/Online Set–2)
4
(a) 182 (b) (a) 52 (b) 56
5
(c) 50 (d) 44
5 9. The coefficient of x2 in the expansion of the product (2–x2)
(c) (d) 27
4 . ((1+2x+3x2)6 + (1–4x2)6) is : (2018/Online Set–3)
(a) 107 (b) 106
21 10 21 10
4. The value of C1 - C1 + C2 - C 2 + (c) 108 (d) 155
10. The sum of the series
21
C3 -10 C3 + 21
C 4 - 10 C4 + ..... + 21
C10 -10 C10
2 × 20C0 + 5 × 20C1 + 8 × 20C2 + 11 × 20C3 + ... + 62 × 20C20
is: (2017)
is equal to: (8-04-2019/Shift-1)
(a) 221 – 211 (b) 221 – 210 (a) 226 (b) 225
20 9 20 10
(c) 2 – 2 (d) 2 – 2 (c) 223 (d) 224
BINOMIAL THEOREM 138

11. The sum of the co-efficient of all even degree terms in x in 17. The coefficient of x18 in the product
the expansion of (1 + x)(l - x)10(1 + x + x 2)9 is (12-04-2019/Shift-1)
6 6
x + x 3 - 1 + x - x 3 - 1 , x > 1 is equal to : 18. If 20 C1 + 22 20
C 2 + 32 20
C3 + ... + 20 2 20
C 20 = A 2 b ,

(8-04-2019/Shift-1) then the ordered pair A, b is equal to _____.

12. If the fourth term in the binomial expansion of (12-04-2019/Shift-2)
6 (a) (420, 19) (b) (420, 18)
æ 1 1 ö
ç x1+ log10 x + x12 ÷ is equal to 200, and x > 1, then the (c) (380, 18) (d) (380, 19)
ç ÷
è ø 19. The term independent of x in the expansion of
value of x is: (8-04-2019/Shift-2)
6
æ 1 x8 ö æ 2 3 ö
(a) 100 (b) 10 ç - ÷ . ç 2 x - 2 ÷ is equal to ______.
3
è 60 81 ø è x ø
(c) 10 (d) 104
13. If the fourth term in the Binomial expansion of (12-04-2019/Shift-2)
6 (a) -72 (b) 36
æ2 log8 x ö 7
ç +x ÷ ( x > 0) is 20 ´ 8 , then a value of x is : (c) -36 (d) -108
èx ø

(9-04-2019/Shift-1) 2 403 k
20. If the fractional part of the number is ,
15 15
(a) 83 (b) 8-2
then k is equal to: (9-01-2019/Shift-1)
(c) 8 (d) 82

14. If some three consecutive coefficients in the binomial 3

æ1- t6 ö
4
n 21. The coefficient of t in the expansion of ç ÷
expansion of x + 1 in powers of x are in the ratio 2:15:70, è 1- t ø
then the average of these three coefficients is:
(9-01-2019/Shift-2)
(9-04-2019/Shift-2)
(a) 14 (b) 15
(a) 964 (b) 232
(c) 10 (d) 12
(c) 227 (d) 625
5
15. If the coefficients of x2 and x3 are both zero, in the expansion 22. If the third term in the binomial expansion of 1 + x log2 x
15
of the expression 1 + ax + bx 2 1 - 3x in powers of x, equals 2560, then a possible value of x is:
then the ordered pair (a, b) is equal to : (10-1-2019/Shift-1)
(10-04-2019/Shift-1)
1
(a) (28, 861) (b) (–54, 315) (a) (b) 4 2
4
(c) (28, 315) (d) (–21, 714)
16. The smallest natural number n, such that the coefficient 1
(c) (d) 2 2
8
n
æ 2 1 ö n
of x in the expansion of ç x + 3 ÷ is C23 , is:
è x ø 20 3
20
æ Ci -1 ö k
(10-4-2019/Shift-2)
23. If å ç 20
i =1 è C + 20
C
÷ =
21
, then k equals:
i i -1 ø
(a) 38 (b) 58
(c) 23 (d) 35 (10-1-2019/Shift-1)
BINOMIAL THEOREM 139

24. The positive value of l for which the co-efficient of x 2 in 29. A ratio of the 5th term from the beginning to the 5th term

10 10
æ l ö 2 æ 1 ö
the expression x ç x + 2 ÷ is 720, is: 1
è x ø from the end in the binomial expansion of ç 2 3 + ÷
çç 1 ÷÷
è 2 3 3
ø
(10-01-2019/Shift-2)
is (12-01-2019/Shift-1)
(a) 4 (b) 2 2
1 1

(c) 5 (d) 3 (a) 1: 2(6) 3 (b) 1: 4(16) 3

25 1 1
50
25. If å Cr × 50 - r C25 - r = K 50
C25 , then K is equal to: (c) 4(36) 3 :1 (d) 2(36) 3 :1
r =0

30. The total number of irrational terms in the binomial

(10-01-2019/Shift-2)
60
(a) (25) 2 (b) 2 25 - 1 æ 1 1
ö
expansion of ç 7 5 - 310 ÷ is (12-01-2019/Shift-2)
è ø
(c) 2 24 (d) 2 25
26. The sum of the real values of x for which the middle term (a) 55 (b) 49
(c) 48 (d) 54
3 8
æ x 3ö
in the binomial expansion of ç + ÷ equals 5670 is, 31. If nC4 , nC5 , and nC6 are in A.P., then n can be:
è 3 xø
(12-01-2019/Shift-2)
(11-01-2019/Shift-1)
(a) 9 (b) 14
27. Let (x + 10)50 + (x – 10)50 = a0 + a1x + a2x2 + ….. + a50x50, for
(c) 11 (d) 12
a2
all x Î R , then is equal to : 32.
3 2
Let a > 0, b > 0 be such that a + b = 4. If the maximum
a0
value of the term independent of x in the binomial
(11-01-2019/Shift-2)
(a) 12.50 (b) 12.00 10
æ 1 1
- ö
(c) 12.25 (d) 12.75 expansion of ç ax 9 + bx 6 ÷ is 10k, then k is equal to :
ç ÷
è ø
28. Let Sn = 1 + q + q2 + ....... + qn and

2 n (2-9-2020/Shift-1)
æ q +1 ö æ q +1 ö æ q +1ö
Tn =1 + ç ÷+ç ÷ + .......... + ç ÷ where q is a (a) 176 (b) 336
è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø
(c) 352 (d) 84
real number and q ¹ 1.
101 101 n
If C1 + C2 . S1 + ....... +101 C101 . S100 = a T100 , æ 1ö
33. For a positive integer n, ç1 + ÷ is expanded in increasing
è xø
then a is equal to : (11-01-2019/Shift-2)
powers of x. If three consecutive coefficients in this
(a) 299 (b) 202
expansion are in the ratio, 2:5:12, then n is equal to ……….
100
(c) 200 (d) 2 (2-09-2020/Shift-2)
BINOMIAL THEOREM 140

34. If the number of integral terms in the expansion of 41. If the constant term in the binomial expansion of
n 10
æ 12 1
ö æ k ö
ç 3 + 5 8
÷ is exactly 33, then the least value of n is : ç x- 2÷ is 405 , then k equals:
è ø è x ø

(3-09-2020/Shift-1) (6-09-2020/Shift-2)

(a) 128 (b) 248 (a) 1 (b) 9

(c) 2 (d) 3
(c) 256 (d) 264
35. If the term independent of x in the expansion of
42. If the sum of the coefficients of all even powers of x in
æ 3 2 1 ö÷
9
çç x - ÷ is k, then 18 k is equal to : 2 3 2n
3 x ø÷
çè 2 the product 1 + x + x + x ..... + x

(3-09-2020/Shift-2) 1 - x + x 2 - x 3 ..... + x 2 n is 61, then n is equal to

(a) 5 (b) 9 (7-01-2020/Shift-1)
(c) 7 (d) 11 43. 7
The coefficient of x in the expression

10 20
a (1 + x)10 + x (1 + x)9 + x 2 (1 + x)8 + ....... + x10 is :
2 r
36. Let 2 x + 3x + 4 å
= ar x . Then 7 is equal to ……
r =0 a13 (7-01-2020/Shift-2)
(a) 420 (b) 330
(4-09-2020/Shift-1)
(c) 210 (d) 120
37. If for some positive integer n, the coefficients of three
consecutive terms in the binomial expansion of (1+x)n+5 44. If a and b be the coefficients of x4 and x2 respectively
are in the ratio 5:10:14, then the largest coefficient in this
6 6
expansion is : (4-9-2020/Shift-2) in the expansion of x + x 2 - 1 + x - x 2 - 1 , then
(a) 792 (b) 252
(8-01-2020/Shift-2)
(c) 462 (d) 330
38. The natural number m, for which the coefficient of x in the (a) a + b = -30 (b) a - b = -132

22 (c) a + b = 60 (d) a - b = 60
æ m 1 ö
binomial expansion of ç x + 2 ÷ is 1540, is
è x ø 10
45. The coefficient of x 4 in the expansion of 1 + x + x 2 is
…………… (5-09-2020/Shift-1)
(9-01-2020/Shift-1)
6
39. The coefficient of x 4 in the expansion of 1 + x + x 2 + x3
16
x 1 ö
in powers of x, is___ (5-09-2020/Shift-2) 46. In the expansion of æç + ÷ , if l1 is the least
è cos q x sin q ø
40. If p denotes the fractional part of the number p, then
p p
value of the term independent of x when £q £ and
8 4
ì 3200 ü
í ý , is equal to: (6-09-2020/Shift-1) l2 is the least value of the term independent of x when
î 8 þ
p p
£q £ , then the ratio l : l is equal to :
5 1 16 8 2 1

(a) (b)
8 8 (9-1-2020/Shift-2)
(a) 16 : 1 (b) 8 : 1
7 3
(c) (d) (c) 1 : 8 (d) 1 : 16
8 8
BINOMIAL THEOREM 141

54. The probability that a randomly selected 2 digit number

47. If Cr = 25Cr and C0 + 5. C1 + 9. C2 + ... + 101. C25 = 225. k
n
then k is equal to (9-1-2020/Shift-2) belongs to the set n Î N : 2 - 2 is a multiple of 3 is

48. The coefficient of x 256 in the expansion of equal to : (27-07-2021/Shift-1)

100
1- x
101
x2 + x +1 is: (20-07-2021/Shift-1) 1 1
(a) (b)
2 3
(a) -100 C16 (b) 100
C16
2 1
100 100 (c) (d)
(c) C15 (d) - C15 3 6

49. The number of rational terms in the binomial expansion of 11

æ 2 1 ö
1 120 55. If the coefficients of x 7 in ç x + ÷ and x -7 in
æ 14 ö è bx ø
çç 4 + 5 6 ÷÷ is ______. (20-07-2021/Shift-1)
è ø 11
æ 1 ö
50. For the natural numbers m, n, if ç x - 2 ÷ , b ¹ 0, are equal, then the value of b is equal
è bx ø
m n
1- y 1+ y = 1 + a1 y + a 2 y 2 + ....... + a m + n y m + n and to: (27-07-2021/Shift-1)
(a) –1 (b) 2
a1 = a 2 = 10, then the value of m + n is equal to
(c) –2 (d) 1
(20-07-2021/Shift-2)
56. A possible value of ' x ', for which the ninth term in the
(a) 88 (b) 64
10
(c) 100 (d) 80 æ 1ö
ìï log 25x -1 + 7
x -1
ç - ÷ log3 5 +1 üï
è 8ø
expansion of í3 3 +3 ý in the
51. If b is very small as compared to the value of a, so that the ïî ïþ
b
cube and other higher powers of can be neglected in æ1ö
5x -1 +1
a increasing powers of 3çè 8 ÷ø log3 is equal to 180, is:
the identity
(27-07-2021/Shift-2)
1 1 1 1 (a) 2 (b) 1
+ + .......... + = an + bn 2 + gn 3 ,
a - b a - 2b a - 3b a - nb (c) 0 (d) –1
then the value of g is is ? (25-07-2021/Shift-1) 57. The number of elements in the set

b2 a+b n Î 1, 2, 3,.....,100 11
n
> 10
n
+ 9
n
is ______. is
(a) (b)
3a 3 3a 2
(22-07-2021/Shift-2)
2 2
a +b a+b 58. If the constant term, in binomial expansion of
(c) (d)
3a 3 3a 3 10
æ r 1 ö
52. The term independent of ‘x’ in the expansion of ç 2x + 2 ÷ is 180, then r is equal to _____.
è x ø
10
æ x +1 x -1 ö (22-07-2021/Shift-2)
ç 2/3 1/3
- 1/ 2 ÷
, where x ¹ 0,1 is equal to
è x - x +1 x - x ø
59. The sum of all those terms which are rational numbers in
_________ ? (25-07-2021/Shift-1) 12
æ 13 1
ö
53. The ratio of the coefficient of the middle term in the the expansion of çç 2 + 3
4
÷÷ is: (25-07-2021/Shift-2)
20 è ø
expansion of 1 + x and the sum of the coefficients of
(a) 27 (b) 89
19
two middle terms in expansion of 1 + x is ?
(c) 35 (d) 43
(25-07-2021/Shift-1)
BINOMIAL THEOREM 142

60. If the greatest value of the term independent of ' x ' in the 67. If 20
C r is the co-efficient of x r in the expansion of
æ cos a ö
10 10! 20
expansion of ç x sin a + a ÷ is 2 , then the 2 20
è x ø 5! 1+ x
20
, then the value of år
r =0
C r is equal to :

value of ' a ' is equal to: (25-07-2021/Shift-2)

(26-08-2021/Shift-1)
(a) 2 (b) –1
(a) 420 ´ 219 (b) 420 ´ 218
(c) 1 (d) –2
(c) 380 ´ 218 (d) 380 ´ 219
10100
æ 1 ö
61. The lowest integer which is greater than ç1 + 100 ÷ is 68. 3 ´ 7 22 + 2 ´10 22 - 44 when divided by 18 leaves the
è 10 ø
______. (25-07-2021/Shift-2) remainder ___________. (27-08-2021/Shift-2)

(a) 3 (b) 4
æ 36 ö
(c) 2 (d) 1 69. If ç 4 ÷ k is the term independent of x in the binomial
è4 ø
62. If the coefficients of x 7 and x 8 in the expansion of
12
n æ x 12 ö
æ xö expansion of ç - 2 ÷ , then k is equal to
ç 2 + ÷ are equal, then the value of n is equal to___. è4 x ø
è 3ø
__________ ? (31-08-2021/Shift-1)
(25-07-2021/Shift-2)
70. If the coefficient of a 7 b8 in the expansion of
63. Let n Î N and x denote the greatest integer less than 10
a + 2b + 4ab is K × 216 , then K is equal to______.
or equal to x. If the sum of n + 1 terms of
(31-08-2021/Shift-2)
n
C0 , 3.n C1 , 5.n C 2 , 7.n C3 , …..is equal to 2100 .101, then
71. Let n be a positive integer. Let
é n - 1ù
2ê ú is equal to________. (25-07-2021/Shift-2) n éæ 1 ö k æ 3 ök æ 7 ö k æ 15 ö k æ 31 ök ù
ë 2 û A = å (-1) k n Ck êç ÷ + ç ÷ + ç ÷ + ç ÷ + ç ÷ ú
k =0 êëè 2 ø è 4 ø è 8 ø è 16 ø è 32 ø úû
n
64. If the sum of the coefficients in the expansion of x + y
is 4096, than greatest coefficient in the expansion 1
If 63A = 1 - , then n is equal to ____.
is_______ ? (01-09-2021/Shift-2) 230

(16-03-2021/Shift-2)
ìæ n ö
ænö é n ù ïç ÷ , if 0 £ k £ n 72. If n is the number of irrational terms in the expansion of
= k
65. Let ç ÷ denote n C k and êë k úû íè ø
èkø ï0 , otherwise
æ 14 1
ö
60
î
çç 3 + 58 ÷÷ , then n - 1 is divisible by
è ø
9
æ 9 ö é 12 ù 8 æ 8 ö é 13 ù
If A k = å ç ÷ ê ú + å ç i ÷ ê13 - k + i ú and (16-03-2021/Shift-1)
i = 0 è i ø ë12 - k + i û i=0 è ø ë û
(a) 8 (b) 26
A 4 - A 3 = 190p, then p is equal to _______.
(c) 7 (d) 30
(26-08-2021/Shift-2)
6
6
20 2
73. The value of å Cr . 6 C 6 - r is equal to :
20
66. å
k =0
Ck is equal to: (27-08-2021/Shift-1) r=0

(17-03-2021/Shift-2)
41 40
(a) C 20 (b) C 20 (a) 1024 (b) 1124

(c) 40
C 21 (d) 40
C19 (c) 1324 (d) 924
BINOMIAL THEOREM 143

74. Let the coefficients of third, fourth and fifth terms in the
æ n ö ì n Cr , if n ³ r ³ 0
80. For integers n and r, let ç r ÷ = í
æ a ö
n
è ø î0, otherwise
expansion of ç x + 2 ÷ , x ¹ 0, be in the ratio 12 : 8 : 3.
è x ø The maximum value of k for which the sum
Then the term independent of x in the expansion, is equal k
æ10 ö æ 15 ö k +1
æ12 ö æ 13 ö
to ............ . å ç i ÷ ç k - i ÷ + å ç i ÷ ç k + 1 - i ÷ is maximum, is
i =0 è øè ø i=0 è øè ø
(Round off the answer to nearest integer) equal to ____. (24-02-2021/Shift-2)
(17-03-2021/Shift-2) 81. The value of

75. If (2021)3762 is divided by 17, then the remainder is - 15 C1 + 2 15 C 2 - 3 15 C3 + ××× - 15 15 C15

……………. . (17-03-2021/Shift-1) + 14 C1 + 14 C3 + 14 C5 + ××× + 14 C11 (24-02-2021/Shift-1)

76. The term independent of x in the expansion of (a) 214 (b) 213 - 13
10
é x +1 x -1 ù (c) 216 (d) 213 - 14
ê 2/3 1/3
- 1/ 2 ú
, x ¹ 1, is equal to
ëx - x +1 x - x û 82. If the reminder when x is divided by 4 is 3, then the
2022
remainder when 2020 + x is divided by 8
_______. (18-03-2021/Shift-2)
is_______. (25-02-2021/Shift-2)
77. Let n C r denote the binomial coefficient of x r in the 83. The maximum value of the term independent of ‘t’ in the
expansion of (1 + x) n . If æ 1 1 10
ö
ç tx 5 + 1 - x 10
÷
10 expansion of ç t ÷ where x Î 0,1 is
ç ÷
å (22 + 3k) n Ck = a.310 + b.210 , a, b Î R, then a + b
k =0
è ø

(26-02-2021/Shift-1)
is equal to _______. (18-03-2021/Shift-2)
10! 2.10!
78. Let (1 + x + 2x 2 ) 20 = a 0 + a1 x + a 2 x 2 + ...... + a 40 x 40 . (a) (b)
3(5!) 2 3 3(5!) 2
Then, a1 + a 3 + a 5 + ..... + a 37 is equal to :
10! 2.10!
(18-03-2021/Shift-1) (c) (d)
3(5!) 2
3(5!) 2
(a) 2 20 (220 - 21) (b) 219 (2 20 + 21)
84. Let m, n Î N and gcd 2, n = 1. If

(c) 219 (2 20 - 21) (d) 2 20 (220 + 21) æ 30 ö æ 30 ö æ 30 ö æ 30 ö

30 ç ÷ + 29 ç ÷ +¼.. + 2 ç ÷ + 1 ç ÷ = n × 2m , then
79. If n ³ 2 is a positive integer, then the sum of the series è0ø è1ø è 28 ø è 29 ø

n +1 2
æ ænö n ö
C2 + 2 C2 + 3 C2 + 4 C2 +¼. + n C2 is n + m is equal to _____ . ç Here ç k ÷ = C k ÷
è è ø ø
(24-02-2021/Shift-2) (26-02-2021/Shift-1)
2
n(n + 1)(2n + 1) 85. If the fourth term in the expansion of ( x + x log x )7 is 2

(a) n(n + 1) (n + 2) (b)

12 6 4480, then the value of x where x Î N is equal to :
(17-03-2021/Shift-1)
n(2n + 1)(3n + 1)
(c) n(n - 1)(2n + 1) (d) (a) 4 (b) 2
6 6
(c) 3 (d) 1
BINOMIAL THEOREM 144

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 8. In the binomial expansion of (a – b)n, n ³ 5, the sum of the
5th and 6th terms is zero. Then, a/b equals
1. The ratio of the coefficient of x10 in (1-x2)10 and the term
n -5 n-4
10 (a) (b)
æ 2ö 6 5
independent of x in ç x - ÷ , is
è x ø
5 6
(a) 1 : 16 (b) 1 : 32 (c) (d)
n-4 n -5
(c) 1 : 64 (d) none of these
9. The greatest value of the term independent of x in the
n expansion of (x sin a + x–1 cos a)10, a Î R, is
æ 1ö
2. If the fourth term in the expansion of ç px + ÷ is
è xø 10!
(a) 25 (b)
independent of x, then the value of term is (5!)2

(a) 5p3 (b) 10p3

10!
(c) 20p3 (d) none of these (c) (d) none of these
25 ´ (5!) 2
3. The greatest coefficent in the expansion of (1 + x)2n is
10. If the ratio of 7th term from the beginning to the seventh
(a) 2nCn (b) 2nCn–1
x
(c) 2nCn–2 (d) none of these æ 1 ö 1
term from the end in the expansion of ç 3 2 + 3 ÷ is
è 3ø 6
4. Which of the following expression is divisible by 1225 ?
(a) 62n – 35n–1 (b) 62n – 35n+1 then x, is
(c) 62n – 35n (d) 62n – 35n+2 (a) 9 (b) 6, 15
5. The number of distinct terms in the expansion of (c) 12, 9 (d) none of these
(x + y – z)16 is 11. The sum of coefficients of the two middle terms in the
(a) 136 (b) 153 expansions of (1 + x)2n – 1 is equal to :
(c) 16 (d) 17 (a) (2n – 1)Cn (b) (2n – 1)Cn + 1
6. The total number of terms in the expansion of (c) 2nCn – 1 (d) 2nCn
(a + b + c + d)n, n Î N is 12. The greatest term (numerically) in the expansion of
3
n n +1 n + 2 n n +1 n + 2 n + 3 (2 + 3x)9, when x = , is
(a) (b) 2
6 6
5 ´ 311 5 ´ 313
(a) (b)
n +1 n + 2 n + 3 2 2
(c) (d) none of these
6
7 ´ 313
(c) (d) none of these
7. If rth and (r + 1)th term in the expansion of (1 + x)n are 2
equal, then n = 13. The greatest term (numerically) in the expansion of

1+ x r - x 1+ x r - x 1
(a) (b) (3 – 5x)11, when x = is
4x 3x 5
(a) 55 × 39 (b) 46 × 39
1+ x r - x 1+ x r - x (c) 55 × 36 (d) none of these
(c) (d)
x r
BINOMIAL THEOREM 145
14. If 7103 is divided by 25, then the remainder is 25. The sum 1. 20C1 –2. 20C2 + 3. 20C3 – .....–20C20 is equal to
(a) 20 (b) 16 (a) 219 (b) 0
(c) 18 (d) 15 (c) 220 – 1 (d) none of these
15. The last digit of the number (32)32 is 26. 1. nC1 + 2, nC2 + 3. nC3 + ....+ n. nCn is equal to
(a) 4 (b) 6
n n +1
(c) 8 (d) none of these (a) .2n (b) 2n+1–3
4
16. 97 + 79 is divisible by
(c) n2n–1 (d) none of these
(a) 6 (b) 24
(c) 64 (d) 72 27. If Cr stands for nCr, then the sum of the series

17. The number 525 – 325 is divisible by : ænö ænö

2 ç ÷! ç ÷ !
(a) 2 (b) 3 è 2 ø è 2 ø é C 2 - 2C2 + 3C 2 - .... + ( -1)n (n +1) C 2 ù
n! ë 0 1 2 nû
(c) 5 (d)7
18. If 0 £ r £ n, then the coefficient of xr in the expansion of where n is an even positive integer, is equal to :
2 n
P = 1 + (1 + x) + (1 + x) + ..... + (1 + x) is (a) (–1)n/2 (n + 2) (b) (–1)n (n + 1)
(a) nCr (b) n+1Cr+1 (c) (–1)n/2 (n + 1) (d) none of these
(c) nCr+1 (d) none of these
28. If A = 2nC0. 2nC1 + 2nC1 2n–1C1 + 2nC2 2n–2C1 + .....then A is
19. The coefficient of x 20 in the expansion of
(a) 0 (b) 2n
-5
40 æ 1 ö (c) n22n (d) 1
1+ x2 .ç x2 + 2 + 2 ÷ is
è x ø 29. The coefficient of x50 in the expansion : (1 + x)1000 + 2x
(1 + x)999 + 3x2 (1 + x)998 +...+1001 terms
(a) 30C10 (b) 30C25
(c) 1 (d) none of these (a) 1002C50 (b) 1002C51
(c) 1005C50 (d) 1005C48
20. The integral part of ( 2 + 1)6 is:
n n
1 r t
(a) 198 (b) 197 30. If s n = å n and t n = å n then n is equal to
r =0 Cr r =0 Cr s n
(c) 196 (d)163

1 n n
21. If =1 + a1x + a2x2 + ..., then the value of ar is (a) (b) -1
1 - 2x + x 2 2 2

(a) 2r (b) r + 1 2n - 1
(c) r (d) r – 1 (c) n – 1 (d)
2
6
50 32
22. The value of C4 + å 56 - r C3 is 31. If 7 divides 3232 , the remainder is :
r =1
(a) 1 (b) 0
(a) 56C4 (b) 56C3
(c) 4 (d) 6
(c) 55C3 (d) 55C4
32. The term independent of x in the expansion of (1 + x)n
23. If n is a positive integer greater than 1, then
n
a – nC1(a – 1) + nC2(a – 2) – ....+ (–1)n (a – n) is equal to æ 1 ö is :
ç1 + ÷
(a) n (b) a è xø
(c) 0 (d) none of these
24. If (1 +x) 15 = C 0 + C 1 x+C 2 x 2 +....+ C 15 x 15 , then (a) C02 + 2C12 + 3C22 + ... + (n + 1)Cn2
15 (b) (C0 + C1 + C2 + ... + Cn)2
C02 -15 C12 +15 C22 -15 C32 + ....15 C15
2
is equal to

(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) C02 + C12 + ... + Cn2

(c) –1 (d) none of these (d) none of these
BINOMIAL THEOREM 146

n 42. The coefficient of x99 in the polynomial

æ 1 ö
33. The number of terms in the expansion of ç x 2 + 1 + 2 ÷ , (x – 1) (x – 2) .... (x – 100) is .....
è x ø
n Î N is. Match the Following
(a) 2n (b) 3n
Each question has two columns. Four options are given
(c) 2n + 1 (d) 3n + 1 representing matching of elements from Column-I and
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
34. Integral part of (7 + 4 3) n is (n Î N)
to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option
(a) an even number corresponding to the correct matching.
(b) an odd number
43. Match the entries in Column-I representing in n with their
(c) an even or an odd number depending upon the of n
values given in Column-II.
(d) none of these
Column I Column II
Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]
(A) 16 C n + 16
C n +1 + (P) 15
25
35. In the expansion of (x + y + z)
17 18
25
Cn+2 ³ C 2n -1
(a) every term is of the form Cr . r C k . x 25 - r .y r - 5 .z k
16 17
(b) the coefficient of x8y9z9 is 0 (B) Cn +5 £ Cn + 6 (Q) 6
(c) the number of term is 325
(C) 12 ´ (n C6 )2 £ 7 ´ (R) 7
(d) none of these.
36. Element in set of values of r for which, ( n +1 C5 ) ´ ( n +1 C7 )
18
C r - 2 + 2. 18 C r -1 + 18
Cr ³ 20
C13 is : (D) 2 ´ ( n -1 C 4 - n -1
C3 ) (S) 12
(a) 9 (b) 5
< 5 ´ (n -2 C2 )
(c) 7 (d) 10
37. The expansion of (3x + 2)-1/2 is valid in ascending powers The correct matching is
of x, if x lies in the interval (a) A–Q, R ; B–Q, R ; C–P, Q, R, S; D–Q, R
(a) (0, 2/3) (b) (-3/2, 3/2) (b) A–Q ; B–Q, R ; C–P, Q, R, S; D–Q, R

(c) (-2/3, 2/3) (d) (-¥, -3 / 2) (3 / 2, ¥) (c) A–Q, R ; B–Q ; C–P, Q, R, S; D–Q, R
(d) A–Q, R ; B–Q, R ; C–P, Q, S; D–Q, R
Numerical Value Type Questions
44. Match the following with their no. of terms.
n n n
38. If Cr–1 = 36, Cr = 84 and Cr+1 = 126, then r = Column-I Column-II
39. Let the co-efficients of xn in (1 + x)2n & (1 + x)2n-1 be P & Q 3
(A) (x1 + x2+ x3……+ xn) (P) infinite
4
æP+Qö (B) (x1 + x2 + x3)n (Q) n + 2C3
respectively, then ç ÷ =
è P ø
(C) (1 - x) -3 (| x |< 1) (R) £ 2n + 1
40. Sum of square of all possible values of ‘r’ satisfying the
equation (D) (1+ x + x2)n (S) n+2C2
39 39 39 39 The correct matching is
C3r -1 - Cr 2 = Cr 2 -1 - C3r is :
(a) A– Q; B–S; C–R; D–Q
10
1 1 1 1 (2 - 1) (b) A –S; B–S; C–P; D–R
41. If + + + ...... + = then find
1!10! 2!9! 3!8! 10!1! k10! (c ) A –Q; B –S; C–R; D–R
the value of k.
(d) A –Q; B –S; C–P; D–R
BINOMIAL THEOREM 147

Text 48. Prove that C0 – 22 . C1 + 32 . C2 – ..... + (–1)n (n + 1)2 . Cn = 0,

n > 2 where Cr = nCr.
45. Let n be a positive integer and
49. Prove that : (2nC0)2 – (2nC1)2 + (2nC2)2 + ... + (2nC2n)2
(1 + x + x2)n = a0 + a1x + ..... + a2nx2n.
= (–1)n.2n Cn.
2 2 2
Show that a 0 - a1 + ..... + a 2n = a n . 50. Prove that :

46. Given sn = 1 + q + q2 + ..... + qn C12 - 2.C22 + 3.C32 - ...... - 2n.C2n

2 n
= -1 n. 2n Cn
2 n
q + 1 æ q +1 ö æ q +1 ö
Sn =1+ +ç ÷ + .... + ç ÷ ,q ¹ 1 .
2 è 2 ø è 2 ø
Prove that n+1C1 + n+1C2s1 + n+1C3s2 +
.... + n+1Cn+1sn = 2nSn
47. Find the sum of the series :

n
r n é 1 3r 7r 15r ù
å (-1) Cr ê r + 2r + 3r + 4r ....upto mtermsú
2 2 2 2
r =0 ë û
BINOMIAL THEOREM 148

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 7. For r = 0, 1, ...., 10, let Ar, Br and Cr denote, respectively, the
coefficient of xr in the expansions of (1 + x)10, (1+x)20 and
ænö æ n ö æ n ö
1. For 2 £ r £ n, ç ÷ + 2 ç ÷+ç ÷ is equal to : (2000) 10
è r ø è r -1ø è r - 2 ø (1 + x)30. Then åA r (B10 Br - C10 A r ) is equal to (2010)
r =1

æ n + 1ö æ n + 1ö
(a) ç ÷ (b) 2 ç ÷ 2
è r -1 ø è r -1 ø (a) B10 – C10 (b) A10 B10 - C10 A10

æn +2ö (c) 0 (d) C10 – B10

æ n + 2ö
(c) 2 ç ÷ (d) ç ÷
è r ø è r ø 8. Coefficient of x 11 in the expansion of
2 4 3 7 4 12
(1 + x ) (1 + x ) (1 + x ) is (2014)
2. In the binomial expansion of (a – b)n, n ³ 5 the sum of the
5th and 6th terms is zero. Then a/b equals : (2001) (a) 1051 (b) 1106

(c) 1113 (d) 1120

n -5 n-4
(a) (b)
6 5 Numerical Value Type Questions

5 6 9. The coefficient of three consecutive terms (1 + x)n+5 are in

(c) (d)
n-4 n -5 the ratio 5 : 10 : 14. Then, n is equal to (2013)

10. The coefficient of x 9 in the expansion of

m
æ10 öæ 20 ö æpö
3. The sum å ç ÷ç ÷ , where ç ÷ = 0 if p > q, is maximum (1 + x) (1 + x2) (1 + x3) … (1 + x100) is (2015)
i =0 è i øè m - i ø èqø
11. Let m be the smallest positive integer such that the
when m is : (2002)
coefficient of x2 in the expansion of
(a) 5 (b) 10
(1 + x)2 + (1 + x)3 +…..+ (1 + x)49 + (1 + mx)50 is (3n + 1) 51C3
(c) 15 (d) 20
for some positive integer n. Then the value of n is(2016)
4. Coefficient of t24 in (1 + t2)12 (1 + t12) (1 + t24) is : (2003)
12. Let X = (10C1)2 + 2(10C2)2 + 3(10C3)2 +..... + 10(10C10)2, where
(a) 12C6 + 3 (b) 12C6 + 1
10
Cr , r Î {1, 2, ..., 10} denote binomial coefficients. Then,
(c) 12C6 (d) 12C6 + 2
5. If n – 1Cr = (k2 – 3) nCr + 1, then k belong to : (2004) 1
the value of X is ______ (2018)
1430
(a) (-¥, - 2] (b) [2, ¥)

(c) éë - 3, 3 ùû (d) ( 3, 2]
é ån k å
n
nC k2
k
ù
ê ú
13. Suppose det ê k =n 0 k =o
n ú = 0 holds for some
n n C 3k
æ 30 öæ 30 ö æ 30 öæ 30 ö æ 30 öæ 30 ö ê å Ck k å k ú
6. ç ÷ç ÷ - ç ÷ç ÷ + .... + ç ÷ç ÷ is equal to ë k =0 k =0 û
è 0 øè 10 ø è 1 øè 11 ø è 20 øè 30 ø

(2005)
n n
Ck
30
(a) C11 60
(b) C10 positive integer n. Then å k +1
k =0
equals. (2019)
30 65
(c) C10 (d) C55
BINOMIAL THEOREM 149

Text 15. Prove that

14. For any positive integers m, n (with n > m), æ n öæ n ö æ n öæ n -1 ö k - 2 æ n öæ n - 2 ö

2 k ç ÷ç ÷ - 2k -1 ç ÷ç ÷ + 2 ç ÷ç ÷ - .....
è 0 øè k ø è 1 øè k -1 ø è 2 øè k - 2 ø
ænö
let ç ÷ = n C m . Prove that
èmø æ n öæ n - k ö æ n ö
+ (-1)k ç ÷ç ÷=ç ÷ (2003)
è k øè 0 ø è k ø
æ n ö æ n -1 ö æ n - 2 ö æ m ö æ n +1 ö
ç ÷+ç ÷+ç ÷ + ... + ç ÷ = ç ÷
m
è ø è m ø è m ø è m ø è m +1ø
Hence, or otherwise, prove that

æ n ö æ n -1 ö æ n - 2 ö æ mö æ n+ 2 ö
ç ÷ + 2ç ÷ + 3ç ÷ + .... + n - m +1 ç ÷ = ç ÷
èmø è m ø è m ø è mø è m+2ø
(2000)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book

BINOMIAL THEOREM

Please share your valuable feedback by

scanning the QR code.
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION
 Chapter 13 151

PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION

NOTES :
1. FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES OF COUNTING
1. Let r and n be positive integers such that l £ r £ n. Then,
1.1 Fundamental Principle of Multiplication
the number of all permutations of n distinct items or

objects taken r at a time, is

If an event can occur in m different ways following which
n
another event can occur in n different ways following which Pr = nCr × r !

another event can occur in p different ways. Then the total

Proof : Total ways = n(n – 1)(n – 2) . . . (n - r - 1)
number of ways of simultaneous happening of all these
events in a definite order is m × n × p.

1.2 Fundamental Principle of Addition n(n - 1)(n - 2)...(n - r - 1)(n - r)!

=
(n - r)!
If there are two jobs such that they can be performed
independently in m and n ways respectively, then either of
n!
the two jobs can be performed in (m + n) ways. =
(n - r )!

2. SOME BASIC ARRANGEMENTS AND SELECTIONS

= nPr.

2.1 Combinations So, the total no. of arrangements (permutations) of n-

distinct items, taking r at a time is nPr or P(n, r).

Each of the different selections made by taking some or all
2. The number of all permutations (arrangements) of n
of a number of distinct objects or items, irrespective of their
distinct objects taken all at a time is n!.
arrangements or order in which they are placed, is called a
combination. 3. The number of ways of selecting r items or objects from
a group of n distinct items or objects, is
2.2 Permutations
n!
Each of the different arrangements which can be made by = n Cr .
(n - r )! r!
taking some or all of a number of distinct objects is called a
permutation.
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION
152

3. GEOMETRIC APPLICATIONS OF nCr 4. PERMUTATIONS UNDER CERTAIN CONDITIONS

The number of all permutations (arrangements) of n different
(i) Out of n non-concurrent and non-parallel straight lines,
objects taken r at a time :
points of intersection are nC2.
(i) When a particular object is to be always included in
(ii) Out of ‘n’ points the number of straight lines are (when
each arrangement, is n–1Cr–1 × r ! .
n
no three are collinear) C2 .
(ii) When a particular object is never taken in each
(iii) If out of n points m are collinear, then No. of straight
arrangement, is n – 1Cr × r!.
n m
lines = C2 – C2 + 1

(iv) In a polygon total number of diagonals out of n points 5. DIVISION OF OBJECTS INTO GROUPS

n ( n - 3) 5.1 Division of items into groups of unequal sizes

(no three are collinear) = nC2 – n = .
2
1. The number of ways in which (m + n) distinct items can
(v) Number of triangles formed from n points is nC3 . be divided into two unequal groups containing
(when no three points are collinear)
m+n !
m and n items, is .
(vi) Number of triangles out of n points in which m are m!n!
collinear, is nC3 – mC3 .
2. The number of ways in which (m+ n+ p) items can be
(vii) Number of triangles that can be formed out of n points
(when none of the side is common to the sides of divided into unequal groups containing m, n, p items, is

polygon), is nC3 – nC1 – nC1 . n – 4C1

m+n+p !
m+n+p
Cm . n + pCm = .
(viii) Number of parallelograms in two systems of parallel m!n ! p!
lines (when 1st set contains m parallel lines and 2nd set
contains n parallel lines), is = nC2 × mC2 3. The number of ways to distribute (m + n+ p) items among

(ix) Number of squares in two system of perpendicular 3 persons in the groups containing m, n and p items

parallel lines (when 1st set contains m equally spaced = (No. of ways to divide) × (No. of groups)!
nd
parallel lines and 2 set contains n same spaced parallel
lines) m+n+p !
= ´ 3!.
m!n!p!
m -1
= å (m - r)(n - r); (m < n )
r =1
5.2 Division of Objects into groups of equal size

(x) The maximum number of parts into which a plane is cut The number of ways in which mn different objects can be
divided equally into m groups, each containing n objects
n2 + n + 2
by n lines is and the order of the groups is not important, is
2
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION
153

4. Suppose there are r things to be arranged, allowing

æ mn ! ö 1
ç ÷ repetitions. Let further pl, p2, ...., pr be the integers such
ç n! m ÷ m !
è ø
that the first object occurs exactly p1 times, the second

occurs exactly p2 times subject, etc. Then the total

The number of ways in which mn different items can be
number of permutations of these r objects to the above
divided equally into m groups, each containing n objects
condition, is
and the order of groups is important, is

(p1 + p 2 + ... + p r )!
æ mn ! 1 ö mn ! .
ç ´ ÷ m! = p!p 2 !p 3 !....p r !
ç n! m m! ÷ n!
m
è ø

7. DISTRIBUTION OF ALIKE OBJECTS

6. PERMUTATIONS OF ALIKE OBJECTS (i) The total number of ways of dividing n identical items
among r persons, each one of whom, can receive 0, 1,
1. The number of mutually distinguishable permutations 2, or more items (£ n), is n + r – 1Cr – 1.

of n things, taken all at a time, of which p are alike of one OR

kind, q alike of second kind such that p + q = n, is The total number of ways of dividing n identical objects
into r groups, if blank groups are allowed, is n + r – 1Cr – 1.

n! (ii) The total number of ways of dividing n identical items

p!q! among r persons, each of whom, receives at least one
item is n – 1Cr – 1.
OR
2. The number of permutations of n things, of which p are
The number of ways in which n identical items can be
alike of one kind, q are alike of second kind and remaining divided into r groups such that blank groups are not
allowed, is n – 1Cr – 1.
n! (iii) The number of ways in which n identical items can be
all are distinct, is . Here p + q ¹ n
p!q!
divided into r groups so that no group contains less
than k items and more than m (m < k) is
3. The number of permutations of n things, of which p1 are The coefficient of xn in the expansion of

alike of one kind; p2 are alike of second kind; p3 are alike (xm + xm + 1 + . . . . xk)r

of third kind; ..... ; pr are alike of rth kind such that

8. NO. OF INTEGRAL SOLUTIONS OF LINEAR
EQUATIONS AND INEQUATIONS
n!
p1 + p2 + . . . + pr = n, is .
p1 !p2 !p3 !....pr !
Consider the eqn. x1 + x2 + x3 + x4 + . . . .+ xr = n ...(i)
where x1, x2,. . . . ., xr and n are non–negative integers.
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION
154

This equation may be interpreted as that n identical objects 3. The total number of ways of selecting zero or more items
are to be divided into r groups. from a group of n identical items is (n + 1).
1. The total no. of non-negative integral solutions of the
equation x1 + x2 + ....+ xr = n is n + r –1Cr –1. 4. The total number of selections of some or all out of

2. The total number of solutions of the same equation in p + q + r items where p are alike of one kind, q are alike of
n–1
the set N of natural numbers is Cr– 1. second kind and rest are alike of third kind, is
3. In order to solve inequations of the form [(p + 1)(q + 1)(r+ 1)]– 1.
x1 + x2 + . . . . .+ xm  n
5. The total number of ways of selecting one or more items
we introduce a dummy (artificial) variable xm + 1 such
from p identical items of one kind; q identical items of
that x1 +x2 + . . . . + xm + xm + 1 = n, where xm + 1  0.
second kind; r identical items of third kind and n different
The no. of solutions of this equation are same as the no. of
items, is (p + 1) (q + 1)(r + 1) 2n – 1
solutions of in Eq. (i).

9. CIRCULAR PERMUTATIONS 11. THE NUMBER OF DIVISORS AND THE SUM OF

THE DIVISORS OF A GIVEN NATURAL NUMBER
1. The number of circular permutations of n distinct objects
is (n – l)!.
n n n n
Let N  p11 .p22 .p33 .....pk k ...(1)
2. If anti-clockwise and clockwise order of arrangements are
not distinct then the number of circular permutations of n
where pl, p2, . . . . , pk are distinct prime numbers and
distinct items is 1/2 {(n – 1)!}
n1, n2,....,nk are positive integers.
e.g., arrangements of beads in a necklace, arrangements
of flowers in a garland etc. 1. Total number of divisors of N = (n1 + 1)(n2 + 1) . . .(nk + 1).

2. This includes 1 and n as divisors. Therefore, number of

10. SELECTION OF ONE OR MORE OBJECTS divisors other than 1 and n, is

(n1 + 1)(n2 + 1)(n3 + 1). . . . .(nk + 1) – 2.

1. The number of ways of selecting one or more items from a
3. The sum of all divisors of (1) is given by
group of n distinct items is 2n – 1.

Proof : Out of n items, 1 item can be selected in nCl ways;  p n 1 1  1  p n 2 1  1  p n 3 1  1  p n k 1  1 
3
n  1 
2
 ....
k
.
2 items can be selected in C2 ways; 3 items can be p  1 p  1 p  1
 1  2  3   p k  1 
selected in nC3 ways and so on......

Hence, the required number of ways

12. DEARRANGEMENTS
= nC1 + nC2 + nC3 + . . . . + nCn

= (nC0 + nC1 + nC2 + . . . . + nCn) – nC0 If n distinct objects are arranged in a row, then the no. of
ways in which they can be dearranged so that none of them
= 2n – 1.
occupies its original place, is
2. The number of ways of selecting r items out of n identical
items is 1 .

SCAN CODE
Permutation and Combination
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION
155

a a a
ì 1 1 1 1 1ü 13.3 Let n be a positive integer and n = p1 1 p2 2 ... p k k be a prime
n!í1 - + - + - .... + - 1 n ý
î 1! 2! 3! 4! n!þ
decomposition of n. Then the number of distinct ordered
and it is denoted by D (n). pairs of positive integers (p, q), such that the least common
multiple of p and q is n, is (2a1 + 1) (2a2 + 1) ... (2ak + 1)
If r (0 £ r £ n) objects occupy the places assigned to them
i.e., their original places and none of the remaining (n - r) 13.4 For any positive integer r, let d r be the number of
objects occupies its original places, then the no. of such derangements of an r-element set. Then
ways, is
n
D(n – r) = nCr . D(n – r) 1 + å n Cr d r = n !
r =1

ì 1 1 1 n -r 1 ü for any integer n > 0 or

= nCr . (n – r) ! í1 - 1! + 2! - 3! + .... + - 1 ý.
( n - r )!þ
î
n
n
13.SOME IMPORTANT RESULT OF PERMUTATION å Cr d r = n ! where d 0 = 1
r =0

AND COMBINATION
n -1
13.1 Let X and Y be non-empty finite sets, |X| = m and |Y| = n.
and d 0 = n !- å n Cr d r
Then r =0

1. The number of functions from Y into X is mn.

2. The number of injections (one-one functions) from Y

into X is zero it m < n, and mCn .n! (= mPn) if m ³ n.

3. The number of bijections of Y onto X is zero if m ¹ n,

and m! if m = n.

13.2 For any positive integers m and r such that m ³ r, let am(r) be
the number of surjections of an m-element set onto an r-

r
r
element set. Then å C sa m ( s ) = r m
s =1
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 156

SOLVED EXAMPLES

Example – 1 Example – 4

Find the number of different signals that can be generated How many numbers divisible by 5 and lying between 4000
and 5000 can be formed from the digits 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.
by arranging at least 2 flags in order (one below the other)
on a vertical staff, if five different flags are available. Sol. Clearly, a number between 4000 and 5000 must have 4 at
thousand’s place. Since the number is divisible by 5 it must
Sol. Since a signal may consist of either 2 flags, 3 flags, 4 flags or have 5 at unit’s place. Now, each of the remaining places
5 flags. Therefore, (viz. hundred’s and ten’s) can be filled in 5 ways.
Hence, total number of required numbers = 1×5×5×1=25.
Total number of signals = Number of 2 flags signals

+ Number of 3 flags signals Example – 5

The flag of a newly formed forum is in the form of three

+ Number of 4 flags signals blocks, each to be coloured differently. If there are six
different colours on the whole to choose from, how many
such designs are possible ?
+ Number of 5 flags signals Sol. Since there are six colours to choose from, therefore, first
block can be coloured in 6 ways. After choosing first block
=5×4+5×4×3+5×4×3×2+5×4×3×2×1 second and third can be choosen in 5 and 4 ways
respectively.
= 20 + 60 + 120 + 120 = 320
Hence, by the fundamental principle of multiplication, the
number of flag-designs is 6×5×4 = 120.
Example – 2

Example – 6
Find the total number of ways of answering 5 objective
type questions, each question having 4 choices. Find the number of 4 letter words, with or without meaning,
which can be formed out of the letters of the word ROSE,
Sol. Since each question can be answered in 4 ways. So, the
when
total number of ways of answering 5 questions is 4×4×4×4×4
(i) the repetition of the letters is not allowed.
= 45.
(ii) the repetition of the letters is allowed.
Sol. (i) The total number of words is same as the number of ways
Example – 3
of filling in 4 vacant places by the 4 letters. The first place
can be filled in 4 different ways by any one of the 4 letters R,
How many three-digit numbers more than 600 can be
O, S, E. Since the repetition of letters is not allowed.
formed by using the digits 2, 3, 4, 6, 7. Therefore, the second, third and fourth place can be filled in
Sol. Clearly, repetition of digits is allowed. Since a three-digit by any one of the remaining 3, 2, 1 different ways respectively.
number greater than 600 will have 6 or 7 at hundred’s place. Thus, by the fundamental principle of counting the required
number of ways is 4×3×2×1 = 24.
So, hundred’s place can be filled in 2 ways. Each of the ten’s
and one’s place can be filled in 5 ways. Hence, required number of words = 24.
(ii) If the repetition of the letters is allowed, then each of the 4
Hence, total number of required numbers = 2×5×5=50.
vacant places can be filled in succession in 4 different ways.
Hence, required number of words = 4×4×4×4 = 256.
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 157

Example – 7
6! 5! 7!
= ´ ´
How many numbers are there between 100 and 1000 such 3! (6 - 3) ! 3! (5 - 3) ! 3! (7 - 3) ! = 7000
that at least one of their digits is 7 ?
Sol. Clearly, a number between 100 and 1000 has 3-digits Example – 11
\ Total no. of 3-digit nos having atleast one of their digits as 7
In how many ways can a team of 3 boys and 2 girls be
= (3digit nos) - (3-digit no. in which 7 does not appear) selected from 6 boys and 5 girls ?
Total number of 3-digit number = 9×10×10 = 900. Sol. Required number of ways.
Total no. of 3-digit no. in which 7 does not appear at all : We = 6C3 × 5C2
have to form 3-digit nos by using the digits 0 to 9, except 7.
So, hundred’s place can be filled in 8 ways and each of the 6! 5!
= ´
ten’s and one’s place can be filled in 9 ways. 3!(6 - 3) ! 2! (5 - 2) ! = 20 × 10 = 200

So, required ways = 8×9×9 = 648

Hence, total number of 3-digit numbers having at least one Example – 12
of their digits as 7 is 900 – 648 = 252.
Among 22 cricket players, there are 3 wicketkeepers and 6
bowlers. In how many ways can a team of 11 players be
Example – 8
chosen so as to include exactly one wicket keeper and
atleast 4 bowlers ?
Find the exponent of 2 in 50 ! ?
Sol. We have to choose 11 players which include exactly 1 wicket
é 50 ù é 50 ù é 50 ù é 50 ù é 50 ù keeper and atleast 4 bowlers.
Sol. E 2 50! = ê ú + ê 2 ú + ê 3 ú + ê 4 ú + ê 5 ú
ë 2 û ë2 û ë2 û ë2 û ë2 û Combinations include 1 wicket keeper – 4 bowlers,

= 25 + 12 + 6 + 3 + 1 = 47. 1 wicket keeper – 5 bowlers and 1 wicket keeper – 6 bowlers

Total number of combinations.
Example – 9 = 3C1 × 6C4 × 13C6 + 3C1 × 6C5 × 13C5 + 3C1 × 6C6 × 13C4

Find the number of triangles obtained by joining 10 points = 77220 + 23166 + 2145 = 102531
on a plane if ?
Example – 13
(i) no three of which are collinear
(ii) four points are collinear In how many ways can 5 students be selected out of 11
Sol. (i) Since no three point are collinear, any three non-collinear students if
points can be selected to form a triangle. (i) 2 particular students are included ?
Number of triangles required = 10C3 = 120 (ii) 2 particular students are not included ?
(ii) If four points are collinear Sol. There are 11 students, we have to select 5 students.
10 4
Required no. of triangles = C3 – C3 = 120 – 4 = 116 (i) 2 particular students are included then reqd no. of ways
(because selection of 3 collinear point does not make a triangle.)
9! 9 ´ 8 ´ 7 ´ 6!
= 11-2 C5-2 = 9 C3 = = = 84
3!6! 3 ´ 2 ´ 6!
Example – 10
(ii) 2 particular students are not included then reqd no. of ways
Find the number of ways of selecting 9 balls from 6 red
balls, 5 white balls and 7 blue balls if each selection consists 11 - 2 9!
C 5 = 9C 5 =
of 3 balls of each colour. 5!4 !
Sol. The number of ways of selecting 9 balls from 6 red balls, 5
white balls and 7 blue balls containing 3 balls of each colour 9´8´7 ´6
= = 9 ´ 7 ´ 2 = 126
= 6C3 × 5C3 × 7C3 4 ´ 3´ 2
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 158

Example – 14 Example – 18

How many different signals can be made by 5 flags from 8 A mixed doubles tennis game is to be arranged from 5 married
flags of different colours ? couples. In how many ways the game be arranged if no
husband and wife pair is included in the same game ?
Sol. The total number of signals is the number of arrangements
of 8 flags by taking 5 flags at a time. Sol. To arrange the game we have to do the following operations.

Hence, required number of signals = 8C5 × 5! = 6720 (i) Select two men from 5 men in 5C2 ways.
(ii) Select two women from 3 women excluding the wives of the
Example – 15 men already selected. This can be done in 3C2 ways.
(iii) Arrange the 4 selected persons in two teams. If the selected
How many different signals can be given using any men are M1 and M2 and the selected women are W1 and W2,
number of flags from 5 flags of different colours ? this can be done in 2 ways :
Sol. The signals can be made by using at a time one or two or M1W1, play against M2W2
three or four or five flags. M2W1 play against M1W2
Hence, by the fundamental principle of addition, Hence the number of ways to arrange the game
5 5 5 5
Total number of signals = P1 + P2 + P3 + P4 + P5 5
= 5C2 3C2 (2) = 10 × 3 × 2 = 60
= 5 + 20 + 60 + 120 + 120 = 325
Example – 19
Example – 16
In how many ways can 7 departments be divided among 3
ministers such that every minister gets at least one and
How many 4-letter words, with or without meaning, can
atmost 4 departments to control ?
be formed out of the letters of the word, ‘LOGARITHMS’,
if repetition of letters is not allowed ? Sol. The ways in which we can divide 7 departments among 3
ministers such that each minister gets atleast 1 and atmost 4.
Sol. There are 10 letters in the word ‘LOGARITHMS’.
S.No. M1 M2 M3
So, the number of 4 - letter words = 10C4 × 4! = 10P4 = 5040
1 4 2 1

Example – 17 2 2 2 3
3 3 3 1
In how many ways can a cricket team be selected from a Note : If we have a case (2, 2, 3), then there is no need to
group of 25 players containing 10 batsmen 8 bowlers, make cases (3, 2, 2) or (2, 3, 2) because we will include them
5 all –rounders and 2 wicketkeepers ? Assume that the whem we apply distribution formula to distribute ways of
team of 11 players requires 5 batsmen, 3 all–rounders. 2– division among ministers.
bowlers and 1 wicketkeepeer. Case I : We divide 7 departements among 3 ministers in
Sol. Divide the selection of team into four operation. number 4, 2, 1 i.e. unequal division. As any minister can get
4 departments, any can get 2 any can get 1 department, we
I: Selection of batsman can be done (5 from 10) in 10C5 ways.
should apply distribution formula.
II : Selection of bowlers can be done (2 from 8) in 8C2 ways.
we get :
III : Selection of all–rounders can be done (3 from 5) in 5C3 ways.
Number of ways to divide and distribute department in
IV : Selection of wicketkeeper can be done (1 from 2) in 2C1 number 4, 2, 1
ways.
é 7 ù
Þ the team can be selected in = 10C5 × 8C2 × 5C3 × 2C1 ways = =ê ú ´ 3! = 630 ....(i)
ë 4 2 1û
10! ´ 8 ´ 7 ´10 ´ 2
= 141120. Case II : It is ‘equal as well as unequal’ division. As any
5! 5! 2!
minister can get any number of departments, we use complete
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 159

distribution formula. Example – 21

we get : Find the number of ways in which 8 different flowers can
Number of ways to divide departments in number 2, 2, 3, be strung to form a garland so that 4 particular flowers are
never separated.
é 7 1ù Sol. Considering 4 particular flowers as one group of flower, we
=ê ú ´ 3! = 630 ....(ii) have five flowers (one group of flowers and remaining four
ë 2 2 3 2û
4!
Case III : It is also ‘equal as well as unequal’ division. As flowers) which can be strung to form a garland in ways.
2
any minister can get any number of departments, we use But 4 particular flowers can be arranged themselves in 4!
complete distribution of formula. 4! ´ 4!
ways. Thus, the required number of ways = = 288.
we get : 2
Number of ways to divide and distribute in number 3, 3, 1
Example – 22
é 7 1ù In how many ways 6 letters can be placed in 6 envelopes
=ê 2
ú ´ 3! = 420 ....(iii)
êë 3 1 2 2 úû such that
(a) No letter is placed in its corresponding envelope.
Combining (i), (ii) and (iii), we get number of ways to divide (b) at least 4 letters are placed in correct envelopes.
7 departments among 3 minister
(c) at most 3 letters are placed in wrong envelopes.
= 630 + 630 + 420 = 1680 ways. Sol. (a) Using dearrangement theorem.
Number of ways to place 6 letters in 6 envelopes such that
Example – 20 all are placed in wrong envelopes.

Find the sum of all five–digit numbers that can be formed é 1 1 1 1ù

= 6 ê1 - + - + .... + ú
using digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 if repetition is not allowed ? ë 1 2 3 6û

Sol. There are 5! = 120 five digit numbers and there are 5 digits. = 360 – 120 + 30 – 6 + 1 = 265
Hence by symmetry or otherwise we can see that each digit (b) Number of ways to place letters such that at least 4
will appear in any place letters are placed in correct envelopes
= 4 letters are placed in correct envelopes and 2 are
5! in wrong + 5 letters are placed in correct envelopes and 1 in
(unit’s or ten’s or . . . . . .) times. wrong + All 6 letters are placed in correct envelopes
5
= 6C4 × 1 + 0 (not possible to place 1 in wrong envelope) + 1
Þ X = sum of digits in any place
6´5
= + 1 = 16
5! 5! 5! 5! 5! 2
Þ X= ´ 5 + ´ 4 + ´ 3 + ´ 2 + ´1
5 5 5 5 5 (c) Number of ways to place 6 letters in 6 envelopes such
that at most 3 letters are placed in wrong envelopes = 0
letter is wrong envelope and 6 in correct + 1 letter in wrong
5! 5!
Þ X= ´ 5 + 4 + 3 + 2 + 1 = 15 envelope and 5 in correct 2 letters in wrong envelopes and
5 5 4 are in correct + 3 letters in wrong envelopes and 3 in
correct = 1 + 0 (not possible to place 1 in wrong envelope) +
Þ the sum of all numbers
6C × 1 + 6C é 1 1 1ù
= X + 10X + 100X + 1000X + 10000X 4 3 3 ê1 - + - ú
ë 1 2 3û
= X (1 + 10 + 100 + 1000 + 10000)
6 ´ 5 6 ´ 5 ´ 4 æ 3 - 3ö
5! = 1+ + ç - ÷
= (15)(1 + 10 + 100 + 1000 + 10000) 2 6 è2 3ø
5
= 1 + 15 + 20 × 2 = 56.
= 24 (15) (11111) = 3999960
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 160

Example – 23 (ii) The two groups of girls and boys can be arranged in 2!
ways. 5 girls can be arranged among themselves in 5! ways.
How many different words can be formed with the letters
Similarly, 5 boys can be arranged among themselves in 5!
of the word EQUATION so that
ways. Hence, by the fundamental principle of counting, the
(i) the words begin with E ? total number of requisite seating arrangements
(ii) the words begin with E and end with N ? = 2! (5! × 5!) = 2 (5!)2.

Sol. Clearly, the given word contains 8 letters out of which 5 are (iii) The total number of ways in which all the girls are never
vowels and 3 consonants. together

(i) Since all words must begin with E. So, we fix E at the first = Total number of arrangements -
7
place. So, total number of words = P7 = 7 ! Total number of arrangements in which all the girls are
(ii) Since all words must begin with E and end with N. So, we fix always together
E at the first place and N at the last place. 2
= 10!- 2 5!
6
Hence, the required number of words = P6 = 6!

Example – 24 Example – 26

In how many ways 5 boys and 3 girls can be seated in a Five boys and five girls form a line with the boys and girls
row so that no two girls are together ? alternating. Find the number of ways of making the line.

Sol. The 5 boys can be seated in a row in 5P5 = 5! ways. In each Sol. 5 boys can be arranged in a line in 5P5 = 5! ways. Since the
of these arrangements 6 places are created, shown by the boys and girls are alternating. So, corresponding each of
cross-marks, as given below : the 5! ways of arrangements of 5 boys we obtain 5 places
marked by cross as shown below :
×B×B×B×B×B×
(i) B1 × B2 × B3 × B4 × B5 × (ii) × B1 × B2 × B3 × B4× B5.
Since no two girls are to sit together, so we may arrange 3
girls in 6 places. This can be done in 6P3 ways i.e. 3 girls can Clearly, 5 girls can be arranged ir 5 places marked by cross in
be seated in 6P3 ways. (5 ! + 5!) ways.

Hence, the total number of seating arrangements Hence, the total number of ways of making the line

= 5P5 × 6P3 = 5! × 6 × 5 × 4 = 14400. = 5! × (5! + 5!) = 2 (5!)2.

Example – 25 Example – 27

Find the number of ways in which 5 boys and 5 girls be How many five-letter words containing 3 vowels and 2
seated in a row so that consonants can be formed using the letters of the word
‘EQUATION’ so that the two consonants occur together ?
(i) No two girls may sit together.
Sol. There are 5 vowels and 3 consonants in the word
(ii) All the girls sit together and all the boys sit together.
‘EQUATION’ 3 vowels out of 5 and 2 consonants out of 3
(iii) All the girls are never together. can be chosen in 5C 3 × 3C2 ways. As consonants occur
Sol. (i) 5 boys can be seated in a row in 5P5 = 5! ways. Now, in the together, Considering 2 consonants as one letter, we have 4
6
6 gaps 5 girls can be arranged in P5 ways. letters which can be arranged in 4! ways. But two consonants
Hence, the number of ways in which no two girls sit together can be put together in 2! ways. Therefore, 5 letters in each
group can be arranged in 4! × 2! ways.
= 5! × 6P5 = 5! × 6!
The required no. of words = (5C3 × 3C2) × 4!×2!=1440.
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 161

Example – 28 Example – 30

How many words with or without meaning, each 2 of How many different words can be formed by using all the
vowels and 3 consonants can be formed from the letters letters of the word ‘ALLAHABAD’ ?
of the word DAUGHTER ? (i) In how many of them vowels occupy the even
Sol. There are 3 vowels and 5 consonants in the word positions?
DAUGHTER out of which 2 vowels and 3 consonants can (ii) In how many of them both L do not come together ?
be chosen in 3C2 × 5C3 ways. These selected five letters can
Sol. There are 9 letters in the word ‘ALLAHABAD’ out of which
now be arranged in 5! ways.
4 are A’s, 2 are L’s and the rest are all distinct.
Hence, required number of words
= 3C2 × 5C3 × 5! 9!
So, the requisite number of words = = 7560 .
4! 2!
= 3 × 10 × 120 = 3600
(i) Four A’s will occupy four even places in 1 way. Now, we are
Example – 29 left with 5 places and 5 letters, of which two are alike (2 L’s)

(i) How many different words can be formed with the 5!

and other distinct, can be arranged in ways.
letters of the word HARYANA ? 2!
(ii) How many of these begin with H and end with N ?
5! 4! 5!
Total no. of reqd. words = ´ = = 60 .
(iii) In how many of these H and N are together ? 2! 4! 2!
Sol. (i) There are 7 letters in which 3 are alike
8!
(ii) The no. of words in which both L come together = = 1680.
7! 7! 4!
So, total number of words = = = 840 .
3!1!1!1!1! 3!
Hence, the no. of words in which both L do not come together
(ii) After fixing H in first place and N in last place, we have 5 = Total no. of words – No. of words in which both L come together
letters out of which three are alike = 7560 – 1680 = 5880.
5!
So, total number of words = = 20 .
3!
(iii) If H and N together we have 6 letters out of which 3 are
6!
alike.These 6 letters can be arranged in ways. But H and N
3!
can be arranged amongst themselves in 2! ways.

6!
Hence, the requisite number of words = × 2! = 120 × 2 = 240.
3!
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 162

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

The fundamental principle of counting 8. The number of all four digit numbers is equal to
(a) 9999 (b) 9000
1. There are 4 letter boxes in a post office. In how many ways 4
(c) 10 (d) none of these
can a man post 8 distinct letters ?
9. The number of all four digits numbers with distinct digits is
(a) 4 × 8 (b) 84
(a) 9×10×10×10 (b) 10P4
(c) 48 (d) P (8, 4)
(c) 9 × 9P3 (d) none of these
2. In an examination there are three multiple choice questions
and each question has 4 choices out of which only one is 10. The number of even numbers that can be formed by using
correct. If all the questions are compulsory, then number of the digits 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 taken all at a time (without repetition)
ways in which a student can fail to get all answers correct, is
is (a) 120 (b) 48
(a) 11 (b) 12 (c) 1250 (d) none of these
(c) 27 (d) 63 11. The number of all three digit numbers having no digit as 5 is
3. Every one of the 5 available lamps can be switched on to (a) 252 (b) 225
illuminate certain Hall. The total number of ways in which
(c) 648 (d) none of these
the hall can be illuminated, is :
12. All possible three digits even numbers which can be formed
(a) 32 (b) 31
with the condition that if 5 is one of the digit, then 7 is the
(c) 5 (d) 5! next digit is :
4. A new flag is to be designed with six vertical strips using (a) 5 (b) 325
some or all of the colours yellow, green, blue and red. Then,
(c) 345 (d) 365
the number of ways this can be done such that no two
adjacent strips have the same colour is 13. How many of the 900 three digit numbers have at least one
even digit ?
(a) 12 × 81 (b) 16 × 192
(a) 775 (b) 875
(c) 20 × 125 (d) 24 × 216
(c) 450 (d) 750
5. 4 buses run between Bhopal and Gwalior. If a man goes
from Gwalior to Bhopal by a bus and comes back to Gwalior 14. The number of six digit numbers that can be formed from the
by another bus, then the total possible ways are digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 & 7 so that digits do not repeat and the
terminal digits are even is :
(a) 12 (b) 16
(a) 144 (b) 72
(c) 4 (d) 8
(c) 288 (d) 720
Arrangement & selection for different objects
15. An eight digit number divisible by 9 is to be formed using
digits from 0 to 9 without repeating the digits. The number
6. How many numbers lying between 500 and 600 can be
of ways in which this can be done is:
formed with the help of the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 when the
digits are not to be repeated (a) 72 7 (b) 18 7
(a) 20 (b) 40
(c) 60 (d) 80 (c) 40 7 (d) 36 7

7. The number of 3 digit odd numbers, that can be formed by 16. 8-digit numbers are formed using the digits 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 4,
using the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 when the repetition is allowed, 4. The number of such numbers in which the odd digits do
is not occupy odd places, is :
(a) 60 (b) 108 (a) 160 (b) 120
(c) 36 (d) 30 (c) 60 (d) 48
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 163

17. Two women and some men participated in a chess 24. There are five different green dyes, four different blue dyes
tournament in which every participant played two games and three different red dyes. The total number of
with each of the other participants. If the number of games combinations of dyes that can be chosen taking at least one
that the men played between themselves exceeds the number green and one blue dye is
of games that the men played with the women by 66, then 12
(a) 3255 (b) 2
the number of men who participated in the tournament lies
in the interval: (c) 3720 (d) none of these

(a) [8, 9] (b) [10, 12) 25. Given 6 different toys of red colour, 5 different toys of blue
colour and 4 different toys of green colour. Combination of
(c) (11, 13] (d) (14, 17)
toys that can be chosen taking at least one red and one blue
18. On the occasion of Deepawali festival each student of a toys are :
class sends greeting cards to the others. If there are 20
students in the class, then the total number of greeting (a) 31258 (b) 31248
cards exchanged by the students is (c) 31268 (d) None of these

(a) 20
C2 (b) 2 .20 C 2 26. A father with 8 children takes them 3 at a time to the
Zoological gardens, as often as he can without taking the
(c) 2.20 P2 (d) None of these same 3 children together more than once. The number of
times he will go to the garden is
19. In a touring cricket team, there are 16 players in all including
5 bowlers and 2 wicket-keepers. How many teams of 11 (a) 336 (b) 112
players from these, can be chosen, so as to include three (c) 56 (d) None of these
bowlers and one wicket-keeper 27. In how many ways can two balls of the same colour be
(a) 650 (b) 720 selected out of 4 distinct black and 3 distinct white balls
(c) 750 (d) 800 (a) 5 (b) 6
20. Three couples (husband and wife) decide to form a (c) 9 (d) 8
committee of three members. The number of different
28. If the letters of the word SACHIN are arranged in all possible
committee that can be formed in which no couple finds a
ways and these words are written out as in dictionary, then
place is :
the word SACHIN appears at serial number
(a) 60 (b) 12
(a) 602 (b) 603
(c) 27 (d) 8
(c) 600 (d) 601
21. 5 Indian and 5 American couples meet at a party and shake
29. If the letters of the word ‘MOTHER’ are written in all possible
hands. If no wife shakes hands with her own husband and
no Indian wife shakes hands with a male, then the number orders and these words are written out as in a dictionary,
of hand shakes that takes place in the party is : find the rank of the word ‘MOTHER’.

(a) 95 (b) 110 (a) 307 (b) 308

(c) 135 (d) 150 (c) 309 (d) 120

22. A rack has 5 different pairs of shoes. The number of ways in 30. The letters of the word RANDOM are written in all possible
which 4 shoes can be chosen from it so that there will be no orders and these words are written out as in a dictionary
complete pair is then the rank of the word RANDOM is
(a) 1920 (b) 200 (a) 614 (b) 615
(c) 110 (d) 80 (c) 613 (d) 616
23. In how many ways can six boys and five girls stand in a row 31. If all permutations of the letters of the word AGAIN are
if all the girls are to stand together but the boys cannot all arranged as in dictionary, then fiftieth word is
stand together ? (a) NAAGI (b) NAGAI
(a) 172,800 (b) 432,000 (c) NAAIG (d) NAIAG
(c) 86,400 (d) None of these
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 164

32. If all the letters of the word “QUEUE” are arranged in all 40. Out of 10 points in a plane 6 are in a straight line. The
possible manner as they are in a dictionary, then the rank of number of triangles formed by joining these points are
the word QUEUE is : (a) 100 (b) 150
th th
(a) 15 (b) 16
(c) 120 (d) None of these
th th
(c) 17 (d) 18
41. The number of straight lines that can be formed by joining
33. The letters of word “RADHIKA” are permuted and arranged 20 points no three of which are in the same straight line
in alphabetical order as in English dictionary. The number except 4 of them which are in the same line
of words the appear before the word “RADHIKA” is :
(a) 183 (b) 186
(a) 2193 (b) 2195
(c) 197 (d) 185
(c) 2119 (d) 2192
42. There are n distinct points on the circumference of a circle.
Geometrical counting problems The number of pentagons that can be formed with these
points as vertices is equal to the number of possible
34. Number of rectangles in figure shown which are not squares triangles. Then the value of n is
is :
(a) 7 (b) 8
(c) 15 (d) 30

Arrangement & selection of like objects

43. How many different words can be formed by jumbling the

letters in the word MISSISSIPPI in which no two S are
adjacent ?
(a) 159 (b) 160 (a) 7.6C4 . 8C4 (b) 8. 6C4 . 7C4
(c) 161 (d) None of these (c) 6.7. 8C4 (d) 6.8. 7C4
35. There are n points on a circle. The number of straight lines 44. The number of all possible different arrangements of the
formed by joining them is equal to word “BANANA” is
(a) nC2 (b) nP2
(a) 6 (b) 6 ´ 2 ´ 3
(c) nC2 – 1 (d) none of these
36. Let Tn be the number of all possible triangles formed by 6
joining vertices of an n-sided regular polygon. If (c) 2 3 (d) none of these
Tn + 1 – Tn = 10, then the value of n is
45. The total number of ways of arranging the letters AAAA
(a) 7 (b) 5
BBB CC D E F in a row such that letters C are separated from
(c) 10 (d) 8 one another is
37. There are 10 points in a plane, out of these 6 are collinear. If (a) 2772000 (b) 1386000
N is the number of traingles formed by joining these points,
(c) 4158000 (d) none of these
then
(a) N > 190 (b) N £ 100 46. A library has ‘a’ copies of one book, ‘b’ copies of each of
two books, ‘c’ copies of each of three books, and single
(c) 100 < N £ 140 (d) 140 < N £ 190
copy each of ‘d’ books. The total number of ways in which
38. Number of diagonals of a convex hexagon is these books can be arranged in a row is
(a) 3 (b) 6
(a + b + c + d)! (a + 2b + 3c + d)!
(c) 9 (d) 12 (a) (b) 2 3
a!b!c! a! b! c!
39. The interior angles of a regular polygon measure 150° each.
The number of diagonals of the polygon is
(a + 2b + 3c + d)!
(a) 35 (b) 44 (c) (d) none of these
a!b!c!
(c) 54 (d) 78
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 165

47. A question paper on mathematics consists of twelve 54. The number of ways in which 52 cards can be divided into 4
questions divided into three parts. A, B and C, each sets, three of them having 17 cards each and the fourth one
containing four questions. In how many ways can an having just one card
examinee answer five questions, selecting atleast one from
each part. 52 ! 52 !
(a) (b)
(a) 624 (b) 208 (17!)3 (17!)3 3!

(c) 2304 (d) none of these

51! 51!
48. Number of ways in which 4 boys and 2 girls (all are of (c) (d)
(17!)3 (17!)3 3!
different heights) can be arranged in a line so that boys as
well as girls among themselves are in decreasing order of 55. The number of ways in which 12 balls can be divided
height (from left to right), is : between two friends, one receiving 8 and the other 4, is
(a) 1 (b) 6!
12! 12!2!
(c) 15 (d) None of these (a) (b)
8!4! 8!4!
49. The total number of selections of atleast one fruit which can
be made from 3 bananas, 4 apples and 2 oranges is 12!
(c) (d) none of these
(a) 39 (b) 315 8!4!2!
(c) 512 (d) none of these
Distribution of alike objects
50. The total number of different combinations of one or more
letters which can be made from the letters of the word 56. The number of ways of distributing 8 identical balls in 3
‘MISSISSIPPI’ is distinct boxes, so that none of the boxes is empty, is
(a) 150 (b) 148 (a) 5 (b) 21
(c) 149 (d) None of these (c) 38 (d) 8C3
Distribution of different objects 57. The total number of ways in which 11 identical apples can
be distributed among 6 children is that at least one apple is
51. The set S = {1, 2, 3,..., 12} is to be partitioned into three given to each child
sets A, B, C of equal size. Thus, A È B È C = S, A Ç B =
(a) 252 (b) 462
B Ç C = A Ç C = f. The number of ways to partition S is
(c) 42 (d) none of these
(a) 12!/3!(4!)3 (b) 12!/3!(3!)4 58. If a,b,c,d are odd natural numbers such that a + b + c + d = 20,
(c) 12!/(4!)3 (d) 12!/(3!)4 then the number of values of (a, b, c, d) is :

52. In an election three districts are to be canvassed by 2, 3 and (a) 165 (b) 455
5 men respectively. If 10 men volunteer, the number of ways (c) 310 (d) 255
they can be alloted to the different districts is : 59. Number of ways in which 25 identical balls can be distributed
10! 10! among Ram, shyam, Sunder and Ghanshyam such that at
(a) 2! 3! 5! (b) 2! 5! least 1, 2, 3, and 4 balls are given to Ram, Shyam, Sunder and
Ghanshyam respectively, is :
10! 10! (a) 18 C4 (b) 28
C3
(c) 2! 2 5! (d) 2! 2 3! 5!
24 18
(c) C3 (d) C3
53. The number of ways to give 16 different things to three
2
persons A, B, C so that B gets 1 more than A and C gets 2 60. The total number of ways in which n number of identical
more than B, is : balls can be put in n numbered boxed (1, 2, 3, ......... n) such
th
that i box contains at least i number of balls, is :
16!
(a) (b) 4!5!7! n2 n 2 -1
4!5!7! (a) C n -1 (b) Cn -1

16! n 2 + n -2
(c) (d) 3!5!8! (c) (d) None of these
3!5!8! 2 C n -1
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 166

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. The number of ways of selecting 15 teams from 15 men 6. A man X has 7 friends, 4 of them are ladies and 3 are men.
and 15 women, such that each team consists of a man and His wife Y also has 7 friends, 3 of them are ladies and 4 are
men. Assume X and Y have no common friends. Then the
a woman, is : (2015/Online Set–1)
total number of ways in which X and Y together can throw
(a) 1880 (b) 1120 a party inviting 3 ladies and 3 men, so that 3 friends of
(c) 1240 (d) 1960 each of X and Y are in this party is : (2017)
(a) 485 (b) 468
2. If all the worlds (with or without meaning) having five
letters, formed using the letters of the word SMALL and (c) 469 (d) 484

arranged as in a dictionary; then the position of the word 7. If all the words, with or without meaning, are written using
the letters of the word QUEEN and are arranged as in
SMALL is : (2016)
English dictionary, then the position of the word QUEEN
(a) 59th (b) 52nd is : (2017/Online Set–1)
(c) 58th (d) 46th (a) 44th (b) 45th
3. If the four letter words (need not be meaningful ) are to be (c) 46th (d) 47th
formed using the letters from the word 8. The number of ways in which 5 boys and 3 girls can be
“MEDITERRANEAN” such that the first letter is R and seated on a round table if a particular boy B 1 and a
particular girl G1 never sit adjacent to each other, is :
the fourth letter is E, then the total number of all such
words is : (2016/Online Set–1) (2017/Online Set–2)
(a) 5 × 6! (b) 6 × 6!
11! (c) 7! (d) 5 × 7!
(a) 2! 3 (b) 110
9. From 6 different novels and 3 different dictionaries, 4
novels and 1 dictionary are to be selected and arranged
(c) 56 (d) 59 in a row on a shelf so that the dictionary is always in the
middle. The number of such arrangements is : (2018)
15
2 æ 15 Cr ö (a) at least 750 but less than 1000
4. The value of år
r =1
çç 15 ÷÷ is equal to :
è Cr -1 ø (b) at least 1000
(c) less than 500
(2016/Online Set–1) (d) at least 500 but less than 750
(a) 560 (b) 680 10. n-digit numbers are formed using only three digits 2, 5
and 7. The smallest value of n for which 900 such distinct
(c) 1240 (d) 1085
numbers can be formed, is : (2018/Online Set–1)
n+2 (a) 6 (b) 7
C6
5. If = 11, then n satisfies the equation :
n-2
P2 (c) 8 (d) 9
11. The number of four letter words that can be formed using
(2016/Online Set–2) the letters of the word BARRACK is :
(2018/Online Set–2)
(a) n 2 + 3n - 108 = 0 (b) n 2 + 5n - 84 = 0
(a) 120 (b) 144
(c) n 2 + 2n - 80 = 0 (d) n 2 + n - 110 = 0 (c) 264 (d) 270
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 167
12. The number of numbers between 2,000 and 5,000 that can 19. A group of students comprises of 5 boys and n girls. If
be formed with the digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 (repetition of digits is the number of ways, in which a team of 3 students can
not allowed) and are multiple of 3 is : randomly be selected from this group such that there is at
(2018/Online Set–3) least one boy and at least one girl in each team, is 1750,
(a) 24 (b) 30 then n is equal to : (12-04-2019/Shift-2)

(c) 36 (d) 48 (a) 28 (b) 27

13. All possible numbers are formed using the digits 1, 1, 2, 2, (c) 25 (d) 24
2, 2, 3, 4, 4 taken all at a time. The number of such numbers 20. Consider a class of 5 girls and 7 boys. The number of
in which the odd digits occupy even places is : different teams consisting of 2 girls and 3 boys that can
(8-04-2019/Shift-1) be formed from this class, if there are two specific boys A
14. The number of four-digit numbers strictly greater than and B, who refuse to be the members of the same team, is:
4321 that can be formed using the digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (9-01-2019/Shift-1)
(repetition of digits is allowed) is: (8-04-2019/Shift-2) (a) 500 (b) 200
(a) 288 (b) 360 (c) 300 (d) 350
(c) 306 (d) 310 21. The number of natural numbers less than 7,000 which can
15. A committee of 11 members is to be formed from 8 males be formed by using the digits 0, 1,3, 7, 9 (repetition of
and 5 females. If m is the number of ways the committee is digits allowed) is equal to: (9-01-2019/Shift-2)
formed with at least 6 males and n is the number of ways
(a) 374 (b) 372
the committee is formed with at least 3 females, then m =
n = k, then k is (9-04-2019/Shift-1) (c) 375 (d) 250

16. Some identical balls are arranged in rows to form an 22. The number of functions f from {1, 2, 3, ..., 20} onto
equilateral triangle. The first row consists of one ball, the {1, 2, 3, ....., 20} such that f(k) is a multiple of 3, whenever
second row consists of two balls and so on. If 99 more k is a multiple of 4, is : (11-01-2019/Shift-2)
identical balls are added to the total number of balls used
(a) 65 ´ (15)! (b) 5!´ 6!
in forming the equilateral triangle, then all these balls can
be arranged in a square whose each side contains exactly
(c) (15)!´ 6! (d) 56 ´15
2 balls less than the number of balls each side of the
triangle contains. Then the number of balls used to form 23. Consider three boxes, each containing 10 balls labelled 1,
the equilateral triangle is: (9-04-2019/Shift-2) 2, ... , 10. Suppose one ball is randomly drawn from each
(a) 157 (b) 262 of the boxes. Denote by ni, the label of the ball drawn
from the ith box, (i = 1, 2, 3). Then, the number of ways in
(c) 225 (d) 190
which the balls can be chosen such that n1 < n2 < n3 is:
17. The number of 6 digit numbers that can be formed using
the digits 0, 1, 2, 5, 7 and 9 which are divisible by 11 and (12-01-2019/Shift-1)
no digit is repeated, is: (10-04-2019/Shift-1) 24. There are m men and two women participating in a chess
18. Suppose that 20 pillars of the same height have been tournament. Each participant plays two games with every
erected along the boundary of a circular stadium. If the other participant. If the number of games played by the
top of each pillar has been connected by beams with the men between themselves exceeds the number of games
top of all its non-adjacent pillars, then the total number of played between the men and the women by 84, then the
beams is (10-4-2019/Shift-2) value of m is (12-01-2019/Shift-2)
(a) 170 (b) 180 (a) 12 (b) 11
(c) 210 (d) 190 (c) 9 (d) 7
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 168

25. If the letters of the word ‘MOTHER’ be permuted and all 33. Two families with three members each and one family with
the words so formed (with or without meaning) be listed four members are to be seated in a row. In how many
as in a dictionary, then the position of the word ‘MOTHER’ ways can they be seated so that the same family members
is ………. (2-9-2020/Shift-1) are not separated? (6-09-2020/Shift-1)

26. Let n > 2 be an integer. Suppose that there are n Metro (a) 2! 3! 4! (b) (3!)3.(4!)
stations in a city located along a circular path. Each pair (c) 3! (4!)3 (d) (3!)2.(4!)
of stations is connected by a straight track only. Further, 34. The number of words (with or without meaning) that can
each pair of nearest stations is connected by blue line, be formed from all the letters of the word “LETTER” in
whereas all remaining pairs of stations are connected by which vowels never come together is _____
red line. If the number of red lines is 99 times the number
(6-09-2020/Shift-2)
of blue lines, then the value of n is :
35. Total number of six-digit numbers in which only and all
(2-09-2020/Shift-2)
the five digits 1,3,5,7 and 9 appear, is
(a) 201 (b) 199
(7-01-2020/Shift-1)
(c) 101 (d) 200
1
27. The value of (2. 1 P0 - 3. 2 P1 + 4. 3 P2 - up to 51 th term) (a) 56 (b) (6!)
2
+ (1! – 2! + 3! – …….. up to 51th term) is equal to :
(3-09-2020/Shift-1) 5
(c) 6! (d) (6!)
(a) 1 – 51 (51)! (b) 1 + (52)! 2
(c) 1! (d) 1 + (51)! 36. The number of ordered pairs (r, k) for which
28. The total number of 3-digit numbers, whose sum of digits 6·35 C r = k 2 - 3 ·.36 Cr +1 , where k is an integer, is :
is 10, is …….. (3-09-2020/Shift-2)
(7-01-2020/Shift-2)
20
50 - r (a) 4 (b) 6
29. The value of å
r =0
C6 is equal to :
(c) 2 (d) 3

(4-09-2020/Shift-1) 37. If a, b and c are the greatest values of 19 Cp ,20 Cq ,21 Cr

respectively, then: (8-01-2020/Shift-1)
(a) 51 C7 -30 C 7 (b) 51 C7 +30 C7
a b c a b c
(c) 50 C7 -30 C7 (d) 50 C6 -30 C6 (a) = = (b) = =
11 22 42 10 11 42
30. A test consists of 6 multiple choice questions, each
having 4 alternative answers of which only one is correct. a b c a b c
(c) = = (d) = =
The number of ways, in which a candidate answers all six 11 22 21 10 11 21
questions such that exactly four of the answers are 38. An urn contains 5 red marbles, 4 black marbles and 3
correct, is ______ (4-9-2020/Shift-2) white marbles. Then the number of ways in which 4
31. The number of words, with or without meaning, that can marbles can be drawn so that at most three of them are
be formed by taking 4 letters at a time from the letters of red is____. (8-01-2020/Shift-1)
the word ‘SYLLABUS’ such that two letters are distinct 39. The number of 4 letter words (with or without meaning)
and two letters are alike, is (5-09-2020/Shift-1) that can be made from the eleven letters of the word
32. There are 3 sections in a question paper and each section “EXAMINATION” is (8-01-2020/Shift-2)
contains 5 questions. A candidate has to answer a total 40. If the number of five digit numbers with distinct digits
of 5 questions, choosing at least one question from each
and 2 at the 10th place is 336k , then k is equal to:
section. Then the number of ways, in which the candidate
can choose the questions, is: (5-09-2020/Shift-2) (9-01-2020/Shift-1)
(a) 2250 (b) 2255 (a) 8 (b) 7
(c) 1500 (d) 3000 (c) 4 (d) 6
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 169

41. There are 15 players in a cricket team, out of which 6 are 49. Let P1 , P2 ...., P15 be 15 points on a circle. The number of
bowlers, 7 are batsmen and 2 are wicketkeepers. The
number of ways, a team of 11 players be selected from distinct triangles formed by points Pi , p j , Pk such that
them so as to include at least 4 bowlers, 5 batsmen and 1 i + j + k ¹ 15, is (01-09-2021/Shift-2)
wicketkeeper, is _________. (20-07-2021/Shift-1)
(a) 12 (b) 419
20
1 A (c) 455 (d) 443
42. For k Î N, let =å k ,
a a + 1 a + 2 ..... a + 20 k =0 a + k 50. Two squares are chosen at random on a chessboard (see
figure). The probability that they have a side in common is
2
æ A + A15 ö
where a > 0. Then then value of 100 ç 14 ÷ is
è A13 ø
equal to ______? (20-07-2021/Shift-2)
43. There are 5 students in class 10, 6 students in class 11 and
8 students in class 12. If the number of ways, in which 10
students can be selected from them so as to include at
least 2 students from each class and at most 5 students
from the total 11 students of class 10 and 11 is 100 k, then
k is equal to______ ? (25-07-2021/Shift-1)
44. Let n be a non-negative integer. Then the number of
divisors of the form “ 4n + 1 ” of the number
10 11 13 (01-09-2021/Shift-2)
10 . 11 . 13 is equal to _____.
1 1
(27-07-2021/Shift-2) (a) (b)
18 7
45. Let A = 0,1, 2,3, 4,5,6, 7 . Then the number of bijective
1 2
(c) (d)
functions f : A ® A such that f 1 + f 2 = 3 - f 3 is 9 7
equal to ______. (22-07-2021/Shift-2) 51. All the arrangements, with or without meaning, of the word
46. If the digits are not allowed to repeat in any number formed FARMER are written excluding any word that has two R
by using the digits 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, then the number of all appearing together. The arrangements are listed serially in
numbers greater than 10,000 is equal to _______. the alphabetic order as in the English dictionary. Then the
(22-07-2021/Shift-2) serial number of the word FARMER in this list is _______
(01-09-2021/Shift-2)
47. If n Pr = n Pr +1 and n C r = n Cr -1 , then the value of r is equal
52. A number is called a palindrome if it reads the same
to (25-07-2021/Shift-2)
backward as well as forward. For example 285582 is a six
(a) 3 (b) 1
digit palindrome. The number of six digit palindromes,
(c) 4 (d) 2 which are divisible by 55, is______.
(27-08-2021/Shift-1)
ïì æa bö üï
48. Let M = íA = ç ÷ : a, b, c, d Î ±3, ±2, ±1, 0 ý Define
îï èc dø ïþ 53. If 1 P1 + 2. 2 P2 + 3. 3 P3 + ........15.15 P15 = q p r - s, 0 £ s £ 1,

q +s
f : M ® Z, as f A = det A for all A Î M, where Z is then C r - s is equal to ______. (26-08-2021/Shift-1)
set of all integers. Then the number of A Î M such that 54. The number of three-digit even numbers, formed by the
f A = 15 is equal to _______ ? digits 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 if the repetition of digits is not

(25-07-2021/Shift-1) allowed, is ______. (26-08-2021/Shift-1)

PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 170

65. A scientific committee is to be formed from 6 Indians and

55. Let S = 1, 2,3, 4,5, 6,9 . Then the number of elements in
8 foreigners, which includes at least 2 Indians and double
the set T = {A Í S : A ¹ f and the sum of all the elements the number of foreigners as Indians. Then the number of
of A is not a multiple of 3} is ______. ways the committee can be formed is
(27-08-2021/Shift-2) (24-02-2021/Shift-1)
56. The number of six letter words (with or without meaning), (a) 575 (b) 1050
formed using all the letters of the word 'VOWELS', so that (c) 1625 (d) 560
all the consonants never come together, is ______ ? 66. The sum of all the 4-digit distinct numbers that can be
(31-08-2021/Shift-1) formed with the digits 1, 2, 2 and 3 is :
57. The number of 4-digit numbers which are neither multiple (18-03-2021/Shift-1)
of 7 nor multiple of 3 is______ (31-08-2021/Shift-2) (a) 122234 (b) 22264
58. A natural number has prime factorization given by (c) 122664 (d) 26664
n = 2 x 3y 5 z , where y and z are such that y + z = 5 and 67. The number of times the digit 3 will be written when listing
the integers from 1 to 1000 is .................... .
5
y -1 + z -1 = , y > z . Then the number of odd divisors of (18-03-2021/Shift-1)
6
68. Consider a rectangle ABCD having 5, 7, 6, 9 points in the
n, including 1, is: (26-02-2021/Shift-2)
interior of the line segments AB, CD, BC, DA respectively.
(a) 6 (b) 6x Let ? be the number of triangles having these points from
(c) 11 (d) 12 different sides as vertices and ? be the number of
59. The total number of 4-digit numbers whose greatest quadrilaterals having these points from different sides as
common divisor with 18 is 3, is _____ vertices. Then b – a is equal to :
(26-02-2021/Shift-2)
(16-03-2021/Shift-2)
60. The number of seven digit integers with sum of the digits
(a) 795 (b) 1173
equal to 10 and formed by using the digits 1, 2 and 3 only
is : (26-02-2021/Shift-1) (c) 1890 (d) 717
(a) 35 (b) 82 69. Team 'A' consists of 7 boys and n girls and Team ‘B’ has 4
boys and 6 girls. If a total of 52 single matches can be
(c) 77 (d) 42
arranged between these two teams when a boy plays
61. The total number of positive integral solutions x, y, z against a boy and a girl plays against a girl, then n is equal
to : (17-03-2021/Shift-1)
such that xyz = 24 is: (25-02-2021/Shift-1)
(a) 4 (b) 5
(a) 45 (b) 36 (c) 2 (d) 6
(c) 24 (d) 30 70. If the sides AB, BC and CA of a triangle ABC have 3, 5 and
62. The total number of numbers, lying between 100 and 1000 6 interior points respectively, then the total number of
that can be formed with the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, if the repetition triangles that can be constructed using these points as
of digits is not allowed and numbers are divisible by either vertices, is equal to : (17-03-2021/Shift-2)
3 or 5, is _____. (25-02-2021/Shift-1) (a) 360 (b) 364
63. The total number of two digit numbers 'n', such that (c) 240 (d) 333
3n + 7n is a multiple of 10, is: (25-02-2021/Shift-2)
64. The students S1, S2,....,S10 are to be divided into 3 groups.
A, B and C such that each group has at least one student
and the group C has at most 3 students. Then the total
number of possibilities of forming such groups is ____.
(24-02-2021/Shift-2)
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 171

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 8. A variable name in a certain computer language must be
either an alphabet or a alphabet followed by a decimal
1. Total 5–digit numbers divisible by 4 that can be formed
digit. Total number of different variable names that can
using 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, when the repetition of digits is allowed
is exist in that language is equal to :

(a) 1250 (b) 875 (a) 280 (b) 290

(c) 1620 (d) 1000 (c) 286 (d) 296
2. The number of 4–digit numbers that can be made with the 9. Every one of the 10 available lamps can be switched on to
digits 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in which at least two digits are identical, illuminate certain Hall. The total number of ways in which
is : the hall can be illuminated, is :
(a) 45 – 5! (b) 505
(a) 55 (b) 1023
(c) 600 (d) None of these
(c) 210 (d) 10!
3. How many numbers greater than 1000, but not greater
than 4000 can be formed with the digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 10. The number of all possible selections of one or more
repetition of digits being allowed : questions from 10 given questions, each question having
(a) 374 (b) 375 an alternative is :
10 10
(c) 376 (d) None of these (a) 3 (b) 2 – 1
10 10
4. The letters of the word SURITI are written in all possible (c) 3 – 1 (d) 2
orders and these words are written out as in a dictionary. 11. There are 20 questions in a questions paper. If no two
Then the rank of the word SURITI is : students solve the same combination of questions but
(a) 236 (b) 245 solve equal number of questions then the maximum number
(c) 307 (d) 315 of students who appeared in the examination is :
5. An ice cream parlour has ice creams in eight different (a) 20C9 (b) 20C11
varieties. Number of ways of choosing 3 ice creams taking
(c) 20C10 (d) None of these
atleast two ice creams of the same variety, is :
12. The number of numbers divisible by 3 that can be formed
(a) 56 (b) 64
by four different even digits is :
(c) 100 (d) none of these
(a) 18 (b) 36
(Assume that ice creams of the same variety are identical and
available in unlimited supply) (c) 20 (d) None of these
6. Seven different coins are to be divided amongst three 13. The integers from 1 to 1000 are written in order around a
persons. If no two of the persons receive the same number circle. Starting at 1, every fifteenth number is marked (that
of coins but each receives atleast one coin and none is left is 1, 16, 31, etc.) This process is continued until a number
over, then the number of ways in which the division may
is reached which has already been marked, then unmarked
be made is :
numbers are
(a) 420 (b) 630
(c) 710 (d) none of these (a) 200 (b) 400

7. Four couples (husband and wife) decide to form a (c) 600 (d) 800
committee of four members. The number of different 14. The number of times of the digits 3 will be written when
committee that can be formed in which no couple finds a
listing the integer from 1 to 1000 is :
place is :
(a) 269 (b) 300
(a) 10 (b) 12
(c) 14 (d) 16 (c) 271 (d) 302
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 172

5
22. The number of ways in which the sum of upper faces of
52 - j four distinct dices can be six.
15. The value of the expression 47C4 + å C 3 is equal to
j=1 (a) 10 (b) 4

(a) 47C5 (b) 52C5 (c) 6 (d) 7

(c)52C4 (d)None of these 23. If the letters of the word MOTHER are arranged in all
possible orders and these words are written as in a
16. There are n concurrent lines and another line parallel to
dictionary, then the rank of the word MOTHER will be
one of them. The number of different triangles that will be
formed by the (n + 1) lines, is (a) 240 (b) 261
(c) 308 (d) 309
n -1 n n -1 n - 2
(a) (b) 24. There are 12 books on Algebra and Calculus in our library,
2 2
the books of the same subject being different. If the
number of selections each of which consists of 3 books
n n +1 n +1 n + 2
(c) (d) on each topic is greatest then the number of books of
2 2
Algebra and Calculus in the library are respectively :
17. The sides AB, BC and CA of a triangle ABC have a, b and (a) 3 and 9 (b) 4 and 8
c interior points on them respectively, then find the number
(c) 5 and 7 (d) 6 and 6
of triangles that can be construced using these interior
points as vertices. 25. If 3n different things can be equally distributed among 3
persons in k ways then the number of ways to divide the
(a) a + b + cC3
3n things in 3 equal groups is :
(b) a + b + cC3 – (aC3 + bC3 + cC3)
(c) a + b + c + 3C3 k
(a) k × 3! (b)
3!
(d) None of these
18. There are 12 books on Algebra and Calculus in our library, (c) 3k (d) None of these
the books of the same subject being different. If the 26. The number of ways in which the sum of upper faces of
number of selections each of which consists of 3 books four distinct dices can be six.
on each topic is greatest then the number of books of (a) 10 (b) 4
Algebra and Calculus in the library are respectively :
(c) 6 (d) 7
(a) 3 and 9 (b) 4 and 8
27. The number of subsets of the set A = {a1, a2, . . . . , an}
(c) 5 and 7 (d) 6 and 6 which contain even number of elements is
19. A committee of 5 is to be chosen from a group of 9 people. (a) 2n – 1 (b) 2n – 1
Number of ways in which it can be formed if two particular
(c) 2n – 2 (d) 2n
persons either serve together or not at all and two other
particular persons refuse to serve with each other, is 28. The number of divisors of 23 . 33 . 53 . 75 of the form
4n + 1, n Î N is :
(a) 41 (b) 36
(c) 47 (d) 76 (a) 46 (b) 47
20. An ice cream parlour has ice creams in eight different (c) 96 (d) 94
varieties. Number of ways of choosing 3 ice creams taking 29. There are n different books and p copies of each in a
atleast two ice creams of the same variety, is : library. The number of ways in which one or more books
(a) 56 (b) 64 can be selected is :
(c) 100 (d) none of these (a) pn + 1 (b) (p + 1)n – 1
21. A bag contains 2 Apples, 3 Oranges and 4 Bananas. The (c) (p + 1)n – p (d) pn
number of ways in which 3 fruits can be selected if atleast
30. Let p,q Î {1,2,3, 4}. The number of equations of the form
one banana is always in the combination (Assume fruit of
px2 +qx + 1 = 0 having real roots must be
same species to be alike) is :
(a) 15 (b) 9
(a) 6 (b) 10
(c) 7 (d) 8
(c) 29 (d) 7
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 173

31. The number of ways in which n different prizes can be 38. The minimum marks required for clearing a certain
distributed amongst m (< n) persons if each is entitled to screening paper is 210 out of 300. The screening paper
receive at most n – 1 prizes, is : consists of ‘3’ sections each of Physics, Chemistry, and
(a) nm – n (b) mn Maths. Each section has 100 as maximum marks. Assuming
there is no negative marking and marks obtained in each
(c) mn – m (d) None of these
section are integers, the number of ways in which a student
32. Two classrooms A and B having capacity of 25 and can qualify the examinatin is (Assuming no cut–off limit) :
(n – 25) seats respectively. An denotes the number of
(a) 210C3 – 90C3 (b) 93C3
possible seating arrangments of room ‘A’, when ‘n’
(c) 213C3 (d) (210)3
students are to be seated in these rooms, starting from
room ‘A’ which is to be filled up full to its capacity. 39. There are 100 different books in a shelf. Number of ways
49 in which 3 books can be selected so that no two of which
If An – An – 1 = 25 ! ( C25) then ‘n’ equals
are neighbours is :
(a) 50 (b) 48 100 97
(a) C3 – 98 (b) C3
(c) 49 (d) 51 96 98
(c) C3 (d) C3
33. The number of ways in which we can choose 3 squares of
unit area on a chess board such that one of the squares Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]
has its two sides common to other two squares
40. The number of ways in which 10 candidates A1, A2, . . ., A10
(a) 290 (b) 292 can be ranked so that A1 is always before A2 is :
(c) 294 (d) 296
10!
34. A teacher takes 3 children from her class to the zoo at a (a) (b) 8! × 10C2
2
time as often as she can, but does not take the same three
children to the zoo more than once. She finds that she (c) 10P2 (d) 10C2
goes to the zoo 84 more than a particular child goes to the 41. If P (n, n) denotes the number of permutations of n different
zoo. The number of chidren in her class is : things taken all at a time then P (n, n) is also identical to
(a) 12 (b) 10 (a) r ! P (n, n – r) (b) (n – r) . P (n, r)
(c) 60 (d) None of these (c) n . P (n – 1, n – 1) (d) P (n, n – 1)
35. Two lines intersect at O. Points A1, A2 . . ., An are taken on where 0 < r < n
one of them and B1, B2, . . . , Bn on the other, the number of 42. Which of the following statements are correct ?
triangle that can be drawn with the help of these (2n + 1)
(a) Number of words that can be formed with 6 only of the
points is :
letters of the word “CENTRIFUGAL” if each word must
(a) n (b) n2 contain all the vowels is 3 . 7 !
(c) n3 (d) n4 (b) There are 15 balls of which some are white and the rest
36. The total number of six digit numbers x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 having are black. If the number of ways in which the balls can
the property x1 < x2 £ x3 < x4 < x5 £ x6, is equal to: be arranged in a row, is maximum then the number of
(a) 11C6 (b) 16C2 white balls must be equal to 7 or 8. Assume balls of the
same colour to be alike.
(c) 17C2 (d) 18C2
(c) There are 12 things, 4 alike of one kind, 5 alike and of
37. Find number of arangements of 4 letters taken from the
another kind and the rest are all different. The total
word EXAMINATION.
number of combinations is 240.
(a) 2454 (b) 2500
(d) Number of selections that can be made of 6 letters from
(c) 2544 (d) None of these the word “COMMITTEE” is 35.
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 174
n–1
43. Identify the correct statement(s) 47. The combinatorial coefficient Cp denotes

(a) Number of zeroes standing at the end of 125 is 30. (a) the number of ways in which n things of which p are
alike and rest different can be arranged in a circle.
(b) A telegraph has 10 arms and each arm is capable of 9 (b) the number of ways in which p different things can be
distinct positions excluding the position of rest. The selected out of n different thing if a particular thing is
number of signals that can be transmitted is always excluded.
10
10 – 1.
(c) number of ways in which n alike balls can be distributed
(c) Number of numbers greater than 4 lacs which can in p different boxes so that no box remains empty and
be formed by using only the digit 0, 2, 2, 4, 4 and 5 each box can hold any number of balls.
is 90. (d) the number of ways in which (n – 2) white balls and p
(d) In a table tennis tournament, every player plays with black balls can be arranged in a line if black balls are
every other player. If the number of games played is separated, balls are all alike except for the colour.
5050 then the number of players in the tournament is 48. The maximum number of permutations of 2n letters in which
100. there are only a’s and b’s, taken all at a time is given by :
2n
44. There are 10 questions, each question is either True or (a) Cn
False. Number of different sequences of incorrect
2 6 10 4n - 6 4n - 2
answers is also equal to (b) . . .... .
1 2 3 n -1 n
(a) Number of ways in which a normal coin tossed 10
times would fall in a definite order if both Heads and n + 1 n + 2 n + 3 n + 4 2n - 1 2n
(c) . . . .... .
Tails are present. 1 2 3 4 n -1 n
(b) Number of ways in which a multiple choice question
containing 10 alternatives with one or more than one 2 n 1.3.5....(2n - 3)(2n - 1)
(d)
correct alternatives, can be answered. n!
(c) Number of ways in which it is possible to draw a sum 49. The combinatorial coefficient C(n, r) is equal to
of money with 10 coins of different denominations
(a) number of possible subsets of r members from a set
taken some or all at a time.
of n distinct members.
(d) Number of different selections of 10 indistinguishable (b) number of possible binary messages of length n with
things takes some or all at a time. exactly r 1’s.
45. The continued product, 2 . 6 . 10 . 14 ........ to n factors is (c) number of non decreasing 2–D paths from the lattice
equal to : point (0, 0) to (r, n)
2n
(a) Cn (d) number of ways of selecting r things out of n different
2n things when a particular thing is always included plus
(b) Pn
the number of ways of selecting ‘r’ things out of n,
(c) (n + 1) (n + 2) (n + 3) ....... (n + n)
when a particular thing is always excluded
(d) none of these
50. Number of ways in which 3 numbers in A.P. can be selected
46. The number of ways of distributing 10 different books from 1, 2, 3, ...... n is :
among 4 students (S1 – S4) such that S1 and S2 get 2
2
books each and S3 and S4 get 3 books each is : æ n -1 ö n(n - 2)
(a) ç ÷ if n is odd (b) if n is odd
(a) 12600 (b) 25200 è 2 ø 4

10! (n - 1) 2 n(n - 2)
(c) 10C4 (d) 2! 2! 3! 3! (c) if n is odd (d) if n is even
4 4
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 175

51. The number of ways in which five different books to be 57. Column–I Column–II
distributed among 3 persons so that each person gets at (A) Four different movies are (P) 11
least one book, is equal to the number of ways in which running in a town. Ten students

(a) 5 persons are allotted 3 different residential flats so go to watch these four movies.
that each person is alloted at most one flat and no two The number of ways in which
persons are alloted the same flat. every movie is watched by atleast
one student, is (Assume each way
(b) number of parallelograms (some of which may be
differs only by number of students
overlapping) formed by one set of 6 parallel lines and
other set of 5 parallel lines that goes in other direction. watching a movie)
(B) Consider 8 vertices of a regular (Q) 36
(c) 5 different toys are to be distributed among 3 children,
octagon and its centre. If T
so that each child gets at least one toy.
denotes the number of triangles
(d) 3 mathematics professors are assigned five different
and S denotes the number of
lectures to be delivered, so that each professor gets at
straight lines that can be formed
least one lecture.
with these 9 points then the value
Numerical Value Type Questions of (T – S) equals
(C) In an examination, 5 children were (R) 52
52. Number of ways in which 12 identical coins can be
found to have their mobiles in
distributed in 6 different purses, if not more than 3 and not
their pocket. The Invigilator fired
less than 1 coin goes in each purse is ...............
them and took their mobiles in
53. The number of non negative integral solution of the
his possession. Towards the end
inequation x + y + z + w < 7 is ..........
of the test, Invigilator randomly
54. 10 identical balls are to be distributed in 5 different boxes returned their mobiles. The number
kept in a row and labled A, B, C, D and E. Find the number of ways in which at most two
of ways in which the balls can be distributed in the boxes children did not get their own
if no two adjacent boxes remain empty.
moblies is
55. There are four balls of different colours and four boxes of (D) The product of the digits of 3214 (S) 60
colours, same as those of the balls. The number of ways in is 24. The number of 4 digit natural
which the balls, one each in a box, could be placed such numbers such that the product of
that a ball does not go to a box of its own colour is.... . their digits is 12, is
56. In how many ways it is possible to select six letters, (E) The number of ways in which a (T) 84
including at least one vowel from the letters of the word mixed double tennis game can
“F L A B E L L I F O R M”. (It is a picnic spot in U. S. A.) be arranged from amongst 5

Match the Following married couple if no husband

and wife plays in the same game, is
Each question has two columns. Four options are given The correct matching is :
representing matching of elements from Column-I and (a) (A–R); (B–T); (C–P); (D–Q); (E–S)
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds (b) (A–T); (B–R); (C–P); (D–Q); (E–S)
to a correct matching. For each question, choose the (c) (A–P); (B–T); (C–R); (D–Q); (E–S)
option corresponding to the correct matching. (d) (A–S); (B–Q); (C–R); (D–T); (E–P)
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 176

58. Match the Column 59. 5 balls are to be placed in 3 boxes. Each box can hold all
Column–I Column–II the 5 balls. Number of ways in which the balls can be
m placed so that no box remains empty, if :
(A) Number of increasing (P) n
Column–I Column–II
permutations of m symbols
(A) balls are identical but boxes are (P) 2
are there from the n set
different
numbers {a1, a2, ... , an} where
(B) balls are different but boxes are (Q) 25
the order among the numbers is
identical
given by a1 < a2 < a3 < ... an–1 < an is
m (C) balls as well as boxes are identical (R) 50
(B) There are m men and n monkeys. (Q) Cn
(D) balls as well as boxes are identical
Number of ways in which every
but boxes are kept in a row (S) 6
monkey has a master, if a man can
You may note that two or more entries of column–I can match
have any number of monkeys
with only entry of column–II
n
(C) Number of ways in which n red (R) Cm
The correct matching is :
balls and (m – 1) green balls can
(a) (A–S); (B–Q); (C–P); (D–S)
be arranged in a line, so tha no
(b) (A–Q); (B–S); (C–P); (D–S)
two red balls are together, is
(c) (A–P); (B–Q); (C–S); (D–S)
(balls of the same colour are alike)
(d) (A–Q); (B–P); (C–S); (D–S)
n
(D) Number of ways in which ‘m’ (S) m
Text
different toys can be distributed
in ‘n’ children if every child may 60. If nCr – 1 = 36, nCr = 84 and nCr+1 = 126, then find the values
receive any number of toys, is of n and r.
The correct matching is :
(a) (A–R); (B –S); (C–Q); (D–P)
(b) (A–S); (B –R); (C–Q); (D–P)
(c) (A–Q); (B –S); (C–R); (D–P)
(d) (A–P); (B –Q); (C–S); (D–R)
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 177

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 7. A debate club consists of 6 girls and 4 boys. A team of 4
members is to be selected from this club including the
1. The number of arrangements of the letters of the word
selection of a captain (from among these 4 members) for
BANANA in which the two N’s do not appear adjacently,
the team. If the team has to include at most one boy, then
is (2002)
the number of ways of selecting the team is (2016)
(a) 40 (b) 60
(a) 380 (b) 320
(c) 80 (d) 100
(c) 260 (d) 95
2. If r, s, t are prime numbers and p, q are the positive integers 8. Let S = {1, 2, 3,…..,9}. For k = 1, 2,…..,5, let Nk be the
such that LCM of p, q is r2s4t2, then the number of ordered number of subsets of S, each containing five elements
pairs (p, q ) is (2006) out of which exactly k are odd. Then
(a) 252 (b) 254 N1 + N2 + N3 + N4 + N5= (2017)

(c) 225 (d) 224 (a) 125 (b) 210

3. The letters of the word COCHIN are permuted and all the (c) 252 (d) 126

permutations are arranged in an alphabetical order as in Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]
an English dictionary. The number of words that appear 9. For non-negative integers s and r, let
before the word COCHIN is (2007)
(a) 360 (b) 192 ì s!
æsö ï if r £ s ,
=
ç ÷ í r !( s - r )!
(c) 96 (d) 48 r
è ø ï if > s
î 0
4. The number of seven digit integers, with sum of the digits
equal to 10 and formed by using the digits 1,2 and 3 only, For positive integers m and n, let
is (2009)
m+n
(a) 55 (b) 66 f ( m , n, p )
g ( m, n ) = å
P=0 æn + pö
where for any nonnegative
(c) 77 (d) 88 ç ÷
è p ø
5. The total number of ways in which 5 balls of different
colours can be distributed among 3 persons so that each integer p,

person gets atleast one ball is (2012) p

æ m öæ n + i ö æ p + n ö
f (m, n, p ) = å ç ÷ç ÷ç ÷
(a) 75 (b) 150 i =0 è i øè p ø è p - i ø

(c) 210 (d) 243

Then which of the following statements is/are TRUE?
6. Six cards and six envelopes are numbered 1,2,3,4,5,6 and (2020)
cards are to be placed in envelopes so that each envelope
(a) g (m, n) = g (n, m) for all positive integers m,n
contains exactly one card and no card is placed in the
envelope bearing the same number and moreover the card (b) g (m, n + 1) = g ( m + 1, n) for all positive integers m,n
numbered 1 is always placed in envelope numbered 2.
Then the number of ways it can be done is (2014) (c) g (2m, 2n) = 2 g (m, n) for all positive integers m,n

(a) 264 (b) 265

(d) g (2m, 2n) = ( g (m, n)) 2 for all positive integers m,n
(c) 53 (d) 67
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 178

14. Five persons A,B,C,D and E are seated in a circular

10. Let S1   i, j, k  : i, j, k  1, 2,...,10 ,
arrangement. If each of them is given a hat of one of the
three colours red, blue and green, then the numbers of
S2   i, j :1  i  j  2  10, i, j  1, 2, ....,10 , ways of distributing the hats such that the person seated
in adjacent seats get different coloured hats is (2019)

S3   i, j, k, l  :1  i  j  k  l, i, j, k, l  1, 2,..., 10 15. An engineer is required to visit a factory for exactly four
days during the first 15 days of every month and it is
mandatory that no two visits take place on consecutive
And S4   i, j, k, l  : i, j, k and l are distinct elements
days. Then the number of all possible ways in which such
visits to the factory can be made by the engineer during
in 1, 2, ..., 10. 1-15 June 2021 is _____. (2020)
16. In a hotel, four rooms are available. Six persons are to be
If the total number of elements in the set Sr is
accommodated in these four rooms in such a way that
n r , r  1, 2, 3, 4. then which of the following statement each of these rooms contains at least one person and at
most two persons. Then the number of all possible ways
is (are) TRUE? (2021) in which this can be done is _____ . (2020)
(a) n1 = 1000 (b) n2 = 44 Match the Following
Each question has two columns. Four options are given
n4
(c) n3 = 220 (d)  420 representing matching of elements from Column-I and
12
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option
Numerical Value Type Questions
corresponding to the correct matching.
11. Let n be the number of ways in which 5 boys and 5 girls
17. Consider all possible permutations of the letters of the
can stand in a queue in such a way that all the girls stand word ENDEANOEL. (2008)
consecutively in the queue. Let m be the number of ways
(A) The number of permutations (P) 5!
in which 5 boys and 5 girls can stand in a queue in such
contianing the word ENDEA, is
a way that exactly four girls stand consecutively in the
(B) The number of permutations in (Q) 2 × 5!
m which the letter E occurs in the
queue. Then the value of is (2015)
n
first and the last positions, is
12. Words of length 10 are formed using the letters A, B, C, D, (C) The number of permutations in (R) 7 × 5!
E, F, G, H, I, J. Let x be the number of such words where no which none of the letters D, L, N
letter is repeated; and let y be the number of such words occurs in the last five positions, is
where exactly one letter is repeated twice and no other (D) The number of permutations in (S) 21 × 5!
which the letters A, E, O occur
y
letter is repeated. Then,  (2017)
9x only in odd positions, is
The correct matching is :
13. The number of 5 digit numbers which are divisible by 4,
(a) ( A-P; B-S; C-Q; D-Q )
with digits from the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} and the repetition of
(b) ( A-S; B-P; C-Q; D-Q )
digits is allowed, is _______. (2018)
(c) ( A-Q; B-S; C-Q; D-P )
(d) ( A-S; B-Q; C-P; D-Q )
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION 179

18. In a high school, a committee has to be formed from a Using the following passage, solve Q.19 and Q.20
group of 6 boys M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6 and 5 girls G1, G2,
G3, G4, G5. Passage

(i) Let a1 be the total number of ways in which the Let an denote the number of all n-digit positive integers

committee can be formed such that the committee has 5 formed by the digits 0, 1 or both such that no consecutive
members, having exactly 3 boys and 2 girls. digits in them are 0. Let bn = The number of such n-digit
integers ending with digit 1 and cn = The number of such
(ii) Let a 2 be the total number of ways in which the
n-digit integers ending with digit 0. (2012)
committee can be formed such that the committee has at
least 2 members, and having an equal number of boys 19. Which of the following is correct ?
and girls.
(a) a17 = a16 + a15 (b) c17 ¹ c16 + c15
(iii) Let a 3 be the total number of ways in which the
(c) b17 ¹ b16 + c16 (d) a17 = c17 + b16
committee can be formed such that the committee has 5
members, at least 2 of them being girls. 20. The value of b6 is

(iv) Let a 4 be the total number of ways in which the (a) 7 (b) 8
committee can be formed such that the committee has 4 (c) 9 (d) 11
members, having at least 2 girls and such that both M1
and G1 are NOT in the committee together. (2018)
Column A Column B

(A) The value of a1 is (P) 136

(B) The value of a 2 is (Q) 189

(C) The value of a 3 is (R) 192

(D) The value of a 4 is (S) 200

(T) 381
(U) 461
The correct matching is :
(a) (A–S; B–U; C–T; D–Q)
(b) (A–U; B–S; C–T; D–Q)
(c) (A–T; B–U; C–S; D–Q)
(d) (A–Q; B–T; C–U; D–S)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book

PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION

Please share your valuable feedback by

scanning the QR code.
 Answer Key
CHAPTER -10 CIRCLES
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (c) 1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (b)
6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (d) 9. (b) 10. (a) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (c) 12. (a) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (c) 11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (210)
16. (c) 17. (d) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (c) 16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (b)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (b) 25. (a) 21. (b) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (a) 25. (a)
26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (a) 29. (a) 30. (b) 26. (d) 27. (5) 28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (a)
31. (d) 32. (b) 33. (c) 34. (b) 35. (a) 31. (2) 32. (d) 33. (d) 34. (b) 35. (9)
36. (c) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (d) 36. (3) 37. (c) 38. (7) 39. (d) 40. (c)
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (a) 41. (b) 42. (d) 43. (c) 44. (36) 45. (c)
46. (d) 47. (a) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (c) 46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (c) 49. (b) 50. (a)
51. (b) 52. (d) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (b) 51. (d) 52. (61) 53. (16) 54. (40) 55. (165)
56. (a) 57. (2.83) 58. (15) 59. (14.42) 56. (b) 57. (1) 58. (a) 59. (d) 60. (a)
60. (1) 61. (16) 62. (8.94) 63. (40) 64. (75) 61. (18) 62. (b) 63. (1) 64. (c) 65. (c)
65. (7.68) 66. (90) 67. (4) 68. (4) 69. (–1.25) 66. (d) 67. (56) 68. (1225) 69. (3) 70. (c)
70. (–18)
ANSWER KEY 181

CHAPTER -10 CIRCLES

EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (a) 1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (b)
6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (b)
6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (a) 10. (a)
11. (a,c) 12. (b,c) 13. (a,b,c) 14. (a,c)
11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (b) 15. (8) 16. (2) 17. (10) 18. (2)
16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (d) 19. (a) 20. (c) 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (a)
21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (d) 24. (b) 25. (c) 24. (a) 25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (a)
29. (d) 30. (d) 31. (a) 32. (a) 33. (d)
26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (b) 29. (d) 30. (d)
34. (d) 35. (b) 36. (0.50)37. (4)
31. (a) 32. (c) 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (c)
36. (b) 37. (c) 38. (c) 39. (a) 40. (c)

38. 3 3  10  39. (Ellipse)

41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (c) 40.  2 x  2 y  10 x  5 y  1  0 
2 2

46. (a) 47. (a,d) 48. (b,d) 49. (a,c,d)

50. (b,c) 51. (a,c) 52. (b,c) 53. (a,c,d)
54. (a,d) 55. (a,b) 56. (b,d) 57. (1) 58. (949)
59. (0) 60. (2) 61. (d) 62. (a) 63. (c)
64. (a) 65. (d) 66. (a) 67. (a) 68. (b)
69. (b) 70. (d) 71. (b) 72. (d) 73. (b)

 1 2
74. (a) 77.   ,  
 5 5

2 2
 4 1
78.  x    y    and ( x  4)  y  (3)
2 2 2 2

 3 3
 Answer Key
CHAPTER -11 CONIC SECTIONS
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (a) 1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (d) 5. (d)
6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (b) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (d) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c)
11. (c) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (a)
16. (a) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (b)
16. (a) 17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (d) 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (d) 24. (d) 25. (c)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (c) 25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (b) 29. (c) 30. (a)
26. (b) 27. (a) 28. (a) 29. (a) 30. (c) 31. (5) 32. (d) 33. (d) 34. (c) 35. (9)
36. (d) 37. (d) 38. (d) 39. (1.25) 40. (a)
31. (c) 32. (d) 33. (d) 34. (b) 35. (a)
41. (a) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (a) 45. (d)
36. (b) 37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (a) 46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (c)
41. (a) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (c) 45. (b) 51. (c) 52. (a) 53. (d) 54. (b) 55. (d)
46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (d) 56. (b) 57. (c) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (b)
61. (a) 62. (d) 63. (a) 64. (d) 65. (a)
51. (a) 52. (c) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (d) 66. (4) 67. (c) 68. (c) 69. (b) 70. (c)
56. (a) 57. (b) 58. (b) 59. (b) 60. (a) 71. (d) 72. (d) 73. (a) 74. (d) 75. (a)
61. (a) 62. (a) 63. (d) 64. (4) 65. (2) 76. (c) 77. (d) 78. (c) 79. (b) 80. (a)
81. (d) 82. (c) 83. (0.5) 84. (d) 85. (b)
66. (2) 67. (0) 68. (24) 69. (14) 70. (5)
86. (c) 87. (34) 88. (c) 89. (9) 90. (b)
71. (90) 72. (60) 73. (1) 74. (2) 75. (2) 91. (c) 92. (c) 93. (3) 94. (c) 95. (c)
76. (12) 77. (16) 78. (3) 79. (4) 80. (8) 96. (c) 97. (d) 98. (c) 99. (a) 100. (2)
101. (a) 102. (b) 103. (b) 104. (d) 105. (36)
106. (b) 107. (d) 108. (b) 109. (2) 110. (a)
111. (c) 112. (b) 113. (d) 114. (d) 115. (b)
116. (80) 117. (b) 118. (b) 119. (b) 120. (a)
121. (9) 122. (d) 123. (2) 124. (3) 125. (b)
ANSWER KEY 183

CHAPTER -11 CONIC SECTIONS

EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (a) 1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (d) 5. (c)
6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (d) 10. (b) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (d)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (a) 11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (d)
16. (d) 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (d) 16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (a)
21. (d) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (c) 25. (a) 21. (a) 22. (a,b) 23. (b,c) 24. (a,d) 25. (a,b)
26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (b) 29. (a) 30. (b) 26. (c,d) 27. (a,b,d) 28. (b,d) 29. (a,d)
31. (d) 32. (b) 33. (d) 34. (d) 35. (b) 30. (a,b) 31. (a,b,d) 32. (a,c,d)
36. (c) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (b) 33. (a,c) 34. (b,c) 35. (a,d) 36. (a,b,d)
41. (a) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (a) 45. (b) 37. (2) 38. (2) 39. (2) 40. (4) 41. (4)
46. (b) 47. (c) 48. (c) 49. (a) 50. (a) 42. (4) 43. (a) 44. (b) 45. (a) 46. (a)
51. (d) 52. (a,c) 53. (a,b,c,d) 54. (a,b,c,d) 47. (c) 48. (d) 49. (a) 50. (c) 52. (a=2)
55. (a,b,c,d) 56. (a,d) 57. (a,b,d) 53. ((x + 1) (y – 1)2 + 4 = 0)
58. (a,b) 59. (a,b,c) 60. (b,c) 61. (228)
2x 7 14 3
62. (12) 63. (900) 64. (27) 65. (145) 66. (50) 54. y = - +4 ,
3 3 3
67. (16) 68. (a) 69. (c) 70. (a) 71. (a)
72. (c) 73. (a) 74. (b) 75. (c) 76. (d) 2
x 2 y2 x 2 + y2
77. (b) 78. (c) 79. (d) 80. (b) 55. - =
9 4 81
81. y2 = 2 (x – 4) 82. (1/9,1/9)

æ1 5ö æ5 1ö
84. P0 ç , ÷ , Q0 ç , ÷
è 2 4 ø è4 2ø

2 2
x2 y r + s
85. 2 + 2
=1
a ar + bs
 Answer Key
CHAPTER -12 BINOMIAL THEOREM
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (c) 1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (a)
6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (c) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (a) 11. (24) 12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (c)
16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (d) 16. (a) 17. (84) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (8)
21. (c) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (b) 25. (d) 21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (100) 24. (a) 25. (d)
26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (d) 29. (b) 30. (c) 26. (0) 27. (c) 28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (d)
31. (d) 32. (a) 33. (c) 34. (b) 35. (b) 31. (b) 32. (b) 33. (118) 34. (c) 35. (c)
36. (d) 37. (d) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (b) 36. (8) 37. (c) 38. (13) 39. (120) 40. (b)
41. (c) 42. (b) 43. (5) 44. (51) 45. (17) 41. (d) 42. (30) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (615)
46. (12) 47. (540) 48. (210) 49. (9) 50. (252) 46. (a) 47. (51) 48. (c) 49. (21) 50. (d)
51. (5) 52. (5) 53. (1120) 54. (60) 55. (41) 51. (a) 52. (210) 53. (1) 54. (a) 55. (d)
56. (b) 57. (96) 58. (8) 59. (d) 60. (a)
61. (a) 62. (55) 63. (98) 64. (924) 65. (49)
66. (b) 67. (b) 68. (15) 69. (55) 70. (315)
71. (6) 72. (b) 73. (d) 74. (4) 75. (4)
76. (210) 77. (19) 78. (c) 79. (b) 80. (12)
81. (d) 82. (1) 83. (b) 84. (45) 85. (b)
ANSWER KEY 185

CHAPTER -12 BINOMIAL THEOREM

EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (b) 1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (d) 5. (d)
6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (a) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (c) 9. (6) 10. (8)
11. (5) 12. (646) 13. (6.20)
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (b)
16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (b)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (a) 25. (b)
26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (a)
31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (c) 34. (b) 35. (a,b)
36. (a,c,d) 37. (a,c) 38. (3) 39. (5.06) 40. (34)
41. (5.50) 42. (-5050) 43. (a) 44. (d)

2mn - 1
47. mn
2 (2 n - 1)
 Answer Key
CHAPTER -13 PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (a) 1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (b) 5. (a)
6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (b) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (c) 12. (d) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (d) 11. (d) 12. (b) 13. (180) 14. (d) 15. (78)
16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (d) 16. (d) 17. (60) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (c)
21. (c) 22. (d) 23. (b) 24. (c) 25. (b) 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (120) 24. (a) 25. (309)
26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (a) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (54) 29. (a) 30. (135)
31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (a) 34. (b) 35. (a) 31. (240) 32. (a) 33. (b) 34. (120) 35. (d)
36. (b) 37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (a) 36. (a) 37. (a) 38. (490) 39. (2454) 40. (a)
41. (d) 42. (b) 43. (a) 44. (c) 45. (b) 41. (777) 42. (9) 43. (238) 44. (924) 45. (720)
46. (b) 47. (a) 48. (c) 49. (d) 50. (c) 46. (96) 47. (d) 48. (16) 49. (d) 50. (a)
51. (c) 52. (a) 53. (a) 54. (b) 55. (b) 51. (77) 52. (100) 53. (136) 54. (52) 55. (80)
56. (b) 57. (a) 58. (a) 59. (d) 60. (c) 56. (576) 57. (5143) 58. (d) 59. (1000) 60. (c)
61. (d) 62. (32) 63. (45) 64. (31650) 65. (c)
66. (d) 67. (300) 68. (d) 69. (a) 70. (d)
ANSWER KEY 187

CHAPTER -13 PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION

EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (b) 1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (c) 5. (b)
6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (c) 9. (b) 10. (c) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (d) 9. (a,b,d)

11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (c) 10. (a,b,d) 11. (5) 12. (5) 13. (625)

16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (a) 20. (b) 14. (30) 15. (495) 16. (1080)

21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (d) 24. (d) 25. (b) 17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (b)

26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (b) 30. (c)
31. (c) 32. (a) 33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (c)
36. (a) 37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (a,b)
41. (a,c,d) 42. (a,b,d)43. (b,c) 44. (b,c,d)
45. (b,c) 46. (b,d) 47. (b,d) 48. (a,b,c,d)
49. (a,b,d) 50. (a,d) 51. (b,c,d) 52. (141)
53. (330) 54. (771) 55. (9) 56. (296) 57. (b)
58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (n = 9 and r = 3)
MASTER INDEX
VOLUME 1:
Quadratic Equations
Complex Numbers
Sequence and Series
Straight Lines

VOLUME 2:
Sets, Relations & Function
Limits and Derivatives
Trigonometry
Statistics
Mathematical Reasoning

VOLUME 3:
Circles
Conic Sections
Binomial Theorem
Permutation and Combination
 Creating Impact at Scale

65 Million+
Monthly
Youtube Views

49 Million+ 40+ Countries

Monthly Where Students
Web + App Visitors Take Live Classes

25 Million+ 26 Million+
Monthly Active Hours of
Users Live Learning

25 43
Parents
Happy
Trust
Students
Vedantu
MILLION+ MILLION+
 Our Achievers of 2021
JEE Advanced 2021

Prerak Kevin Abhinav Vedantu students ace

JEE ADV. AIR 35 JEE ADV. AIR 78 JEE ADV. AIR 156 JEE Advanced 2021
JEE MAIN AIR 243 JEE MAIN AIR 533 JEE MAIN AIR 512

Ankit Shrey
6% of IITs’ upcoming batch
will be from Vedantu

JEE ADV. AIR 172 JEE ADV. AIR 174

JEE MAIN AIR 252 JEE MAIN AIR 238

JEE Main 2021

903 students in
Top 10,000
Vaibhav Bajaj Hrishit B P Sunrit Roy K

AIR 35 AIR 113 AIR 139

78 869
students scored students scored
99.9+ PERCENTILE 99.9+ PERCENTILE

68 444
students in students in
Top AIR 1000 Top AIR 5000 Kushagra Ganesh C Iyer
Sharma
AIR 158 AIR 179

NEET (UG) 2021

AIR 23
Pavit
Online Long Term Course

Score 710 AIR 92

Anirudh
Online Crash Course

Score 705
Shivank
Online Crash Course

AIR 143 Score 700

1172 NEET
Qualifiers

CBSE Class 12 ISC Class 12 CBSE Class 10

Annmary
Aatman Upreti Shreya Roshan Aastha N Raj Gitanjali Rajulal Shreya Nigam Khushi Arora Anshika Singha
Santhosh
98.4% 98.4% 98.0% 99.8% 98.4% 99.8% 99.6% 99.4%

ICSE Class 10

M.D.Sriya Varshil J Patel Mohammad Y Devika Sajeev Sakshi Semwal Aloki Upadhyay Ishita Surana Saumya Gupta

99.4% 97.4% 97.2% 97.2% 97.2% 99.4% 99.2% 99.2%

#HereForRealAchievers